Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

My name is Takua. I’ve just been named the Chronicler, the keeper of the Wall of History. Turaga Vakama took me to the Wall to read everything that was already there. It only had a few vague legends, telling of great heroes and malevolent villains, and world-shaking conflicts, all told without names or dates, and in nearly eroded carvings. I had a lot of trouble reading it.

As far as I or any matoran is concerned, life on the island of Mata Nui has always been peaceful and prosperous. We work, we play, we laugh and joke around campfires and stare at the stars. There isn’t any war, no heroes or villains, just people. Matoran that build, and the rahi that roam the wilds.

So, where did this history come from? Who did it happen to?

I’ve asked Turaga Vakama about those old legends. Every time I get the same response: “The time will come for those tales to be told.” I’m not sure what he means exactly; are they long-forgotten events of the past, or are they prophecies of the future?

I suppose it’s up to me to find out.

            Takua flicked through the rest of his leather-bound journal, skimming his scribblings from long ago. That entry about the Wall of History was the first thing he’d written after Turaga Vakama appointed him as the Chronicler. The rest of the journal told small stories, the occasional matoran saving a friend from drowning or the accomplishments of the Po-Koro kohlii team. It also contained sketches of any strange rahi he’d spotted on his journeys. Takua sighed. He hadn’t made any progress answering the big questions.

            Despite that, he yawned widely and snapped the journal closed. He threw it into his traveling bag and stood from the tree root he had been sitting on. Takua gazed up into the blue sky, lit by the dazzling light of the midday sun. A breeze fluttered past him, carrying the scent of the ocean. The Ga-Koro beach was near, and it was calling to him.

            The serene moment was interrupted when the movement of a tiny creature caught Takua’s eye. A flightless species of rahi bird hopped about among the tree roots, pecking at the hard ground. The Chronicler slowly got out his journal and began a quick charcoal sketch of the creature. Another much rougher breeze blew, ruffling his hair, his clothes, and the pages of the journal. The loud crinkling of the paper made the bird jump and dart out of his line of sight.

            Takua wasted no time chasing after the bird. It wasn’t a well-documented species, and he wasn’t going to miss the chance to observe it. It hopped and fluttered over tree roots and rocks, with Takua stumbling close behind it. Without warning, it ducked into a small dark hole between two boulders and was gone. Grunting in frustration, he stared into the hole the creature had vanished into.

            “Chronicler! Hey, Chronicler!”

            Takua stiffened at the harsh voice. He dove behind a cluster of boulders. He listened to the footsteps of his angry pursuer.

            “I can see you, you know.”

            Takua looked up, craning his neck. A Ta-Koro guard stood above him. He flashed a grin.

            “Hey, Kapura,” Takua said, “Took your time, didn’t you?”

            “Get up.” The guard was not amused. His orange eyes met Takua’s blue ones with disdain. “Turaga Vakama wants to see you.”

            “I can’t imagine why,” Takua grumbled under his breath.

            “Come on, I’m supposed to escort you.”

            Takua bit back a snarky comment and followed his fellow Ta-matoran to their home village. The bright blue sky dulled and greyed due to thick plumes of smoke that constantly streamed from Mangai Volcano, the center of the island. Kapura led Takua through a forest of greenery that gradually grew blacker and deader. Takua sighed loudly in open defiance of Kapura’s slow walking pace, but the guard ignored him. The bare gnarled trees gave way to a great stone wall, which encompassed Ta-Koro, the home of the dutiful Ta-matoran.

            It was more of a fortress than a village, built on top of a great lava lake. The high stone walls were marked by stone watchtowers, each occupied with a vigilant Ta-Koro guard. Within the walls stood the many tiny dwellings in which matoran slept, lit by small fires burning within. All was overlooked by the imposing slopes of the great Mangai Volcano. Takua coughed. Despite being a Ta-matoran himself, the smoke and ash itched his throat, and the heat made his blood and breath feel thick and unpleasant. Nobody seemed to complain about it except him.

            Kapura stopped before the hut of Turaga Vakama, the esteemed village elder. The Ta-Koro guard knocked on the door, saluting when the elder himself answered.

            “The Chronicler, as you requested, Turaga,” Kapura gestured towards Takua.

            “Thank you, Kapura,” the old man said with a smile, “You are dismissed.”

            Kapura saluted again and took his leave. Turaga Vakama gestured for Takua to enter his hut, which he reluctantly did, giving the elder a stiff bow.

            In the center of the hut was the pit of the Sacred Fire. Takua always got a funny feeling whenever he looked too long at it, but Turaga Vakama was known to stare into it for several hours at a time.

            “Please, Chronicler. Have a seat.”

            Turaga Vakama’s voice broke Takua out of his thoughts, and he tore his eyes away from the Sacred Fire to sit on a stool across from the elder. Turaga Vakama stared him down with his intense yellow eyes. Though normally warm and inviting, the elder knew how to put wily matoran in their place when he wanted to. Takua hated that gaze, that sense of disappointment coming from the old sage.

            “So, you went to Ga-Koro today,” the Turaga waited patiently for Takua’s excuse.

            “Well, not quite. I was outside Ga-Koro,” Takua shifted in his seat, “And, uh, I was investigating a...some kind of...” He felt his face burning under Turaga Vakama’s gaze.

            “Curiosity,” the elder said, almost amusedly, “It’s not a bad trait. But to neglect your duties is highly irresponsible.”

            Takua’s gaze dropped to the floor.

            “You remember what a Chronicler’s duty is?”

            Takua sighed. “To observe and document important island events.”

            “Precisely.”

            “But...if there’s nothing happening...”

            Turaga Vakama raised a hand to silence Takua. “There are many areas of interest on this island that require documentation.”

            Takua nodded slowly, his gaze drifting downwards again.

            “Chronicler.”

            Takua looked up at the Turaga.

            “I implore you to seek out those areas of interest if there are no goings-on. They are of great importance to our people. You have the list I gave you, correct?”

            “Yes, Turaga, I do! Just give me a sec...” Takua began rummaging through his adventuring bag. His hand sifted through small stone tablets and rolls of paper, maps, and other oddities he’d picked up in his wanderings. His hand closed around a small, folded scrap of parchment. He pulled it free from the bag and unfolded it, heart sinking when he saw it was some unrelated notes he’d scribbled down weeks ago.

            The seconds scraped by, and Takua felt an increasing agony every time he pulled out the wrong piece of paper, all the while he could feel Turaga Vakama’s yellow eyes on him.

            “Got it!” He declared after finally picking out the right one. He held it up for the elder to see.

            “It seems your storage method needs refinement,” Turaga Vakama said, chuckling softly. Takua forced out a laugh. “Please don’t lose that. You will need it. Starting tomorrow, I want you to visit every location on that list. You’ll find an object of great importance at each site. Gather them and bring them to the Kini Nui temple.”

            Takua jolted from his stool, nearly knocking it over.

            “Objects? What kind? What do they look like?” All the shame of being lectured had melted away, and Takua felt himself burning with curiosity and excitement at this new mission.

            “They are stones, about this long and wide,” the Turaga demonstrated the objects’ dimensions with his hands, “Each one is a different color, corresponding to the six elements.”

            “Yes, Turaga! I’ll get started right away, Turaga!” Takua backed into his stool as he tried shoving all his notes and trinkets back into his bag. The stool toppled and clattered to the floor of the hut.

            “Chronicler,” Turaga Vakama spoke gently, “You may rest for the night. Your mission can wait until morning.”

            “Oh. Oh! Thank you, Turaga!” Takua bowed, set his stool upright once again, and exited the hut, breathing a deep sigh of relief. He bolted towards his own hut, and after only having taken three strides he collided with something solid. Takua whirled to see it was none other than Jaller, the Captain of the Guard.

            “Hey, watch it, Takua!”

            “Maybe you should watch it!” Takua fired back. The two laughed, and Jaller punched Takua in the arm.

            “Ow,” Takua whined and retaliated with a punch to Jaller’s arm.

            “Oh, you just crossed the line!” Jaller grabbed Takua’s arm, while Takua grabbed Jaller’s other arm.

            Just as the two began to wrestle, Turaga Vakama’s voice said, “Captain. Just on time for your report.”

            Jaller stiffened, pushing Takua away from him, and giving the elder a strong salute.

            “Yes, of course, Turaga. Please excuse me, Turaga.” The Captain of the Guard entered the hut, leaving Takua alone outside. He started again for his own dwelling.

            A couple of other Ta-Koro guards passed by, fixing him with a judgmental stare. Takua knew he should have been used to it by now, but it was a reminder of his position in Ta-Koro every time. Turaga Vakama may tolerate him, but that didn’t mean everyone did.

            Not his fault his job was more interesting than theirs. Takua held his head high as he passed the two guards on his way to his tiny hut. In his hand was a list of important objects the Turaga wanted him—no, needed him—to find, and by the Great Spirit Mata Nui, he will find them. Takua was excited to find out for himself exactly what they were for.

            Takua stared at the ceiling of his hut until he decided he wasn’t tired at all. He grabbed a couple of extra charcoal sticks for writing, slung his bag over his shoulder, and exited his hut. As he made his way towards the entrance, he could see other Ta-matoran sleeping in their huts through their windows. The night guards were out, patrolling the wall around Ta-Koro. Before he could make another step toward the main gate, a guard stopped him.

            “Where are you headed at this hour, Chronicler?”

            “Official assignment from Turaga Vakama,” Takua said, holding up the list Vakama had given him. The guard squinted at it suspiciously.

            “Then you don’t mind me asking the Turaga to confirm?”

            Takua sighed, “Come on, Kalama...”

            “Come with me. We’ll confirm with the Turaga, then you can go,” Kalama gestured with his guard staff, a long stick with twin curved points on the end.

            “You can’t take my word just this once?”

            Suddenly another guard ran up in a panic.

            “Kalama, we caught a rahi in one of our traps, and it’s putting up a fight!” the other guard panted. Then, like a miracle from Mata Nui himself, Takua became invisible to them. As the two guards hurriedly discussed their situation, Takua slipped out of the main gate and into the charred forest of Ta-Wahi.

            As the cool night air replaced the smoke over Ta-Koro, Takua watched with great delight as the stars became visible overhead. He traced the familiar patterns with his eyes as he breathed a deep breath of fresh air. Soon he could hear the soothing sound of waves.

            Takua rather liked the setup of Ga-Koro. All its leafy huts were built on large sturdy lily pads that floated on the waters of Naho Bay. Surrounding the village on the north and south sides were a series of high cliffs and boulders, constantly being washed by the waves. The east side was wide open to the endless ocean, where Ga-matoran rowed boats out to fish, and gather seaweed and assorted building materials.

            A pair of Ga-matoran night guards stood vigilant at the woven beachgrass archway that led into the village proper. They allowed Takua through with a friendly nod of the head. Takua nodded back and stepped onto the causeway that led to the first lily pad platform, which hosted a series of huts used for the selling of netting, fish, and other useful materials matoran of other villages couldn’t get anywhere else. From this first platform were two bridges on either side leading to different lily pads.

            Takua took the bridge that led to Turaga Nokama’s hut. A faint yellow glow came from inside, so he assumed the elder of Ga-Koro was still awake. He knocked softly on the wooden door. It didn’t take long for the door to swing open.

            “Oh, Chronicler!” Turaga Nokama greeted warmly, her eyes wrinkling in the corners.

            “Good evening, Turaga,” Takua bowed to her, “I was hoping you could help me out with something…”

            Takua rummaged through his bag, intensely relieved that he pulled out the correct piece of parchment to show her. The Turaga’s blue eyes scanned the parchment thoroughly while Takua wrung his hands. The old woman smiled.

            “Ah, the time has come at last,” she said.

            “For what? What does that mean?”

            Turaga Nokama handed the parchment back to him. “Turaga Vakama has given you quite the challenge.”

            “So? What does it mean, ‘the eye of the ocean’? Is it a place, a thing?” Takua caught a glimpse of the half-moon outside Nokama’s window. Its sparse light danced over the ocean surface. It hung in the inky blue night sky directly above the great domelike Ga-Koro observatory.

            “Maybe…is the moon the ‘eye’?” Takua said, he glanced sideways at Turaga Nokama who simply watched him with mild amusement. He sighed, realizing that she wasn’t going to give him a hint. Takua suspected they both knew Turaga Vakama intended this hunt as a challenge for the Chronicler to accomplish on his own. He turned towards Turaga Nokama and bowed.

            “Sorry for intruding, Turaga,” he said, “Good night.”

            “Good night, Chronicler. And good luck!” Nokama smiled and waved as he exited her hut.

            Takua made his way toward the cliffs. The waves crashed and rolled, spraying cool ocean water over him. A rope ladder hung from the entrance of the observatory, and Takua began the climb as he got soaked by the ocean spray. A stiff wind blew through him, making him shiver. Once at the top, he knocked on the wooden door to the observatory.

            For a moment it seemed nobody heard him, but soon the door swung open, and he was greeted by the nocturnal Ga-Matoran astronomer, Nixie. Her large glassy blue eyes stared into him.

            “Oh, Chronicler!”

            “Hey Nixie, um, I have a question for you,” Takua tried meeting her gaze but found it difficult, “I was wondering if you knew what the ‘eye of the ocean’ was.”

            Her large eyes seemed to grow larger. “Come in!” she chirped, and he reluctantly entered.

            His nervousness dissolved into wonder as he took in the sophisticated architecture of the great dome, how perfectly the wood and grass were woven together, reinforced by a sturdy metal skeleton. Up on the walls were countless star charts and graphs and various other scribblings. There were even more piled up on the floor and haphazardly strewn about. Perhaps he and Nixie were two of a kind, he thought amusedly. The Ga-matoran astronomer led him to the most impressive structure of all: the great silver telescope. It pointed up to the sky through a hole in the ceiling.

            “If it’s an eye you need, there’s not a better one in all of Mata Nui,” Nixie grinned ear to ear. Takua trotted up to the telescope, immediately peering through the eyepiece. He could see the mountains and craters of the moon in incredible detail. He pulled back and looked at Turaga Vakama’s list again. 

            The eye of the ocean points to its location.

            He scrunched up his face. “So…is the moon the eye, or the telescope…?” He looked up at the half-moon through the hole in the ceiling. From here it hung directly above another cliff. He squinted.

            “What’re you looking at?” Nixie asked, startling him.

            Takua pointed up to the telescope. “Can you angle this towards the cliff?” Nixie nodded enthusiastically. She skipped over to a control panel near the wall, threw a switch, worked a crank, and soon the domed ceiling began to move lower, and the telescope with it.

            Soon it pointed where he wanted, and he looked through the eyepiece again. There was a small hole in the cliff from which a faint blue glow emanated. Takua blinked hard and looked again, making sure his eyes weren’t playing tricks. Once he confirmed that it was a blue glow, he decided that was his destination.

            “Thanks, Nixie,” he said, “I’ll be back in a second!”

            He exited through another door and made his way around the observatory. There was a rope bridge leading to the next cliff, where he had seen the hole. But only on the third wooden beam, Takua felt a shift in the bridge’s weight. He moved slower, all his muscles clenching tighter when he felt another shift. The beam he was standing on began to crack and in a panic, he jumped to the next one. He stayed still for a moment. When he took a closer look at the bridge itself, he saw the significant rotting of the wood and rope. His heart sank.

            Takua took a deep breath and continued across even slower than before. The next beam beneath his feet was in extra bad shape, so he stepped over it to the next one. It broke under his weight, sending him through. He grasped the rope with his hands just in time. His legs dangled over the thousand-foot drop to the angry waves below.

            With shallow, panicked breaths, Takua lifted himself up back onto the bridge. He pushed himself stiffly to his feet, clenching up when he felt the bridge shift again. With a grunt of frustration, Takua sprinted forward, the bridge creaking in protest. Once on the other side, he stumbled to his knees. He glanced back at the swaying bridge. He stood up, adjusting his bag on his shoulders. He’d have to worry about it on the way back.

            Takua glanced down the cliff he stood on, seeing the faint blue glow coming from the hole he’d spotted through the telescope. Thunder rolled overhead, so he wasted no time climbing down the cliff face. Once he was eye-level with the hole, he peered through it. He could see a polished cavern filled with water glowing blue from an unknown source. Now how to get inside.

            He craned his neck, trying to spot any entrance to this cavern on the side of the cliff. He began inching his way across the cliff face, his arms and legs screaming. Large waves battered the side of the cliff, soaking him to the bone. He could feel his hands beginning to slip. He clenched his fingers until he thought his knuckles would snap. Thunder cracked the sky again, and lightning illuminated the area for a split second; it revealed a jagged opening in the cliffs right above his head.

            Thanking Mata Nui, Takua lifted himself up through the opening, grunting as the sharp rocks scratched at his arms and legs. Just below him was the cavern, its spherical walls polished so smoothly that he had no doubt it wasn’t natural erosion. It was filled with seawater like a giant bowl. The water was so clear, he could see to the bottom, and he could see where the blue glow was coming from.

            It was a blue stone, just like Turaga Vakama had described. Takua took in a lungful of air and plunged into the water after it. Once it was in his hands, he noticed how warm it was. And once he made it back to the surface and took in a breath of fresh air, he heard the thunder rolling ahead growing in intensity. He climbed his way out of the cavern and back up the side of the cliff.

            He stopped at the rotting rope bridge and scanned the area desperately for any other way back to the observatory. Lighting cracked right above him. Swimming was not an option. Rain began pelting down. Climbing was not a desirable option either. Takua swallowed and stepped onto the bridge.

            Every step made the bridge creak and shift and sway, and Takua finally lost patience. He twisted the rope around one arm and grasped it tight. With his other hand, he dug into his bag and brought out a small knife and sliced through the rope. The whole bridge collapsed, and he swung towards the cliff where the observatory sat. He hit the side of the cliff, still suspended by the rope. He walked himself up the cliff and hoisted himself over the ledge. Another violent lightning strike startled him, and he sprinted to the observatory.

            Once back inside, he breathed a sigh of relief and sank to the floor. 

            “Chronicler!” Nixie gasped, appearing at his side. “You okay? You’re soaked! Oh, why’s your bag glowing?”

            Takua fished out the stone and showed it to her. The blue light shone in her eyes.

            “Woah…” she said.

            “Hey, Nixie,” Takua grunted, “You might want to fix that bridge.”

*          *          *

            After his mission in Ga-Koro had set his expectations, Takua traveled to every village ready to conquer a challenge to obtain each stone. 

            His next destination was Le-Wahi, the large jungle south of Ga-Koro. On Turaga Vakama’s list was the phrase “remove the swamp’s heart.” After searching every swampy area of the jungle he could find, Takua found one where an immense tree grew from the center of the muck. The green stone was intertwined within its innermost branches. After frantically chipping away at the wood with his knife, Takua lodged it free.

            Turaga Vakama’s entry on Po-Koro’s stone read: “check the sundial at sunset.” He asked nearly every Po-Matoran he saw in the rocky desert village, but all of them said there was no sundial in Po-Koro. Stumped, he asked the village elder Turaga Onewa for help. After mumbling something disparaging about “the fire-spitter,” he directed Takua towards the highest rocky peak in Po-Wahi. Takua sat and waited at the peak until the orange sun dipped into the horizon. The long shadow that was cast over the desert led Takua into a rocky canyon crawling with nui-jaga; giant scorpion-like creatures with formidable claws and stinger tails. A bright orange stone was resting in an alcove in the rocky wall above the creatures’ nests. Luckily throwing a few stones into the canyon was all Takua needed to lead the nui-jaga away so he could climb the wall and retrieve the stone.

            Takua then traversed a path that led from Po-Wahi to the dark rocky caverns of the underground village of Onu-Koro. Here, he was supposed to look for the “brightest light in the darkness.” He immediately thought of lightstones, which was a common resource mined by the Onu-Matoran, and which were used to illuminate the tunnels. But how could Turaga Vakama expect him to find the “brightest” lightstone when there were millions down there? An Onu-Matoran miner told Takua about a shaft that was dug from the surface to let in the sun by another particular Onu-Matoran who was considered crazy for his obsession with sunlight. Takua made his way there, finding a complex system of tunnels with large mirrors set up to reflect and bring the sunlight even further underground. The last mirror Takua found was shining directly onto a black stone set upon a tall pedestal in the center of a large round cavern, which was lit more brilliantly than any part of Onu-Koro. Takua was then able to swing from one of the tree roots growing down from the earthy ceiling and grab the stone.

            In the icy mountains of Ko-Wahi, Takua was tasked to find a stone where “the peaks of ice and fire overlap.” He climbed up the snowy slopes of Mount Ihu, bracing himself against the chilling wind, until he could see the summit of the Mangai Volcano, the site of Ta-Koro, in the distance. He made his way around the peak of Mount Ihu until it blocked Mangai Volcano from his view. And directly in front of him was a large gash in the mountain, which led into a slick icy tunnel. It didn’t take long for Takua to slip and begin a long and terrifying slide down into the heart of the mountain. He hit a wall, spun, and kept sliding until he hit a patch of hard-packed snow and skidded to a stop inside a small chamber where the white stone lay in wait. He gleefully snatched the glowing stone from its pedestal but quickly grew indignant when he realized he had to make his way back out of the mountain. So began the slippery and arduous climb.

            The last stone on the list was in Ta-Koro, “across the fiery river and inside the beast’s mouth.” He didn’t want to go back home so soon. Especially since the sun was out, and it’d be gone as soon as he got near Mangai Volcano.

            He took the scenic route home, traversing the edge of the Le-Wahi jungle. All kinds of interesting birdsong flitted back and forth almost as quickly as the rahi flew. The foliage was bright green, with thickly entangled vines that produced vibrant flowers that smelled incredible. Takua stopped to breathe it all in. In the next moment, the peace evaporated as the rahi birdsong grew louder and more chaotic. They lit from the trees, flapping their wings erratically, carrying them miles away in an instant.

            Then the buzzing reached his ears, and Takua started running. Like a dark storm cloud rose a swarm of the large insectoid nui-rama from the jungle canopy. Takua tripped over a tree root and landed in a mud puddle, but he pushed himself off the ground and began running again. The nui-rama raged across the sky, buzzing in wild formations and blocking the full glory of the sun. One flew low and nearly caught Takua with its claws.

            Takua’s thoughts were lost in the cacophony of insectoid wings, and he was nearly relieved to see the smog that marked the edge of Ta-Wahi. The large insects dispersed over the charred forest, and soon the swarm vanished in all directions. Takua panted and coughed as the smoke hit his throat. He glanced around, wondering what had possessed the nui-rama to behave that way; he knew for a fact that this was not their regular migratory pattern.

            He barely realized he had reached the Ta-Koro gate when suddenly Kalama, the guard from earlier, was in his face.

            “Nice of you to show up again,” the guard snarled. His orange eyes punctured holes in Takua’s face.

            “I’m just doing my job,” he said, hoisting his bag up, letting the stones rattle together loud enough for everyone to hear.

            “Takua!” Jaller ran up to him. For a microsecond, Takua was relieved to see his friend, but his expression was not friendly. He formally approached Takua and fixed him with a steely gaze, “You failed to report your departure to the Turaga.”

            “Look, Jaller, I just—,”

            “All departures from the village must be reported.”

            “Jaller, come on,” Takua pleaded, “Turaga Vakama gave me this job last night—,”

            “It’s been nearly a week,” Kalama corrected, folding his arms.

            “Whatever, look...”

            “Chronicler, how the Turaga puts up with your irresponsibility is beyond me,” Kalama continued, jabbing a finger in Takua’s direction.

            “Kalama. He meant no harm,” Jaller stepped in.

            “With all due respect, Captain, the Chronicler has wandered off countless times without ever consulting anyone! And to do what, exactly?”

            “This!” Takua exclaimed angrily, pulling papers out of his bag and shoving them in Kalama’s face, “This is my job! I’m doing my job!”

            “What’s that, a bird?” Kapura pointed out from the back of the crowd that had gathered to watch the confrontation.

            Takua looked at a paper in his left hand, and indeed it was the sketch of the flightless bird he was chasing a week ago. He couldn’t come up with a good enough excuse for it.

            “You’re the Chronicler, not a zoologist! Leave that to the Onu-matoran,” Kalama said, “Do Ta-Koro a favor, Takua,” the way Kalama said his name sounded like an insult, “And take your nonsense somewhere else.”

            “Kalama,” Jaller barked, “I’m the Captain, here. You have no authority to banish him.”

            “It’s fine,” Takua said. Jaller’s eyes snapped to him, his mouth agape.

            “Takua, no, you don’t need to—,”

            “—No, no. I get it. I’ll leave,” Takua sneered in Kalama’s direction, barely containing his anger.

            Takua turned away from them all and exited the village. He heard Jaller call his name, but he was too angry to look back or respond. He had an idea of where to find the last stone, but since he couldn’t take the more direct route through Ta-Koro, he had to make his way around it. He walked while resentment and frustration stewed in his mind.

            It was difficult getting around the back of Ta-Koro since the village was built right up against the steepest slopes of the volcano. Takua needed to do a fair amount of climbing, and he had to navigate around many small lava streams flowing from the volcano’s peak. The heat was suffocating, and Takua’s body was soaked head to toe in a slick film of ash and sweat in minutes. He pulled himself onto a ledge, panting heavily.

            From this vantage point, he could see a cave entrance shaped like a large, jagged mouth, glowing red from inside. It was far below him, on a cliffside opposite the one he stood on now. And between them was a lava river, too wide to jump over. Takua made his way down the cliff face to the bank of the river. A foothold broke under him, sending him tumbling down and nearly rolling into the flowing lava.

            Takua backed away from the scorching liquid, new sweat breaking out all over his body. He sighed heavily until a pile of rocks nearby caught his attention. He nudged the pile with his foot, and much to his delight the rocks were loose. And one of them was large enough to use as a lava board. He had no paddle, but Takua had to make do. He sprinted towards the lava river, tossing the rock across its surface and jumping on top of it. He stood with his arms out to the sides, trying to keep the rock steady as it carried him across the sweltering river.

            Once on the other side, Takua entered the cave. He could see runic carvings surrounding a pedestal upon which the last stone sat. It was bright red, like the lava itself. Takua took it in his hands, and upon stuffing it in his bag, felt the ground begin to shake. Takua ran from the cave back out to the bank of the lava river.

            The powerful stench of sulfur reached his nose, and Takua’s eyes began to water. The ground continued shaking, and the smoke grew thicker. Takua looked frantically for his makeshift lava board, but much to his dismay, it was a bio away from shore and half-sunken in the lava river. He tried to reach it with his hand, then his foot, to no avail. He looked around. A large crack formed on the cliff face behind him as the quakes increased in intensity.

            Panicking, Takua began climbing down the slopes of the volcano, just hoping it would lead him back to solid ground soon. A strong quake shocked the whole mountain, and he felt the rock beginning to crumble beneath him. Then came a familiar buzzing sound.

            Takua looked up to the smoky sky and saw the dark smudgy outlines of the insectoid nui-rama. As he slid down the slope with the crumbling rock, the flying rahi began swooping down on him, their insectoid claws catching his skin wherever they could reach. He swatted at them, while also trying to keep himself from tumbling off the mountain.

            Miraculously, he hit level ground, and Takua began to run. He would make it to Kini-Nui if Mata Nui allowed it.

            He ran through the charred forest, all the while being pursued by the nui-rama, which seemed to take more of an interest in him than before. They swarmed and swiped at him with their claws, screeching at him through frothing mandibles. Takua noticed that their large compound eyes glowed with a sinister red light. He’d never seen them look like that before.

            As Takua made his way out of Ta-Wahi, and sprinted in the direction of the Great Temple, thick storm clouds began to gather above him. The winds picked up, and rain began pelting him, soaking him in seconds. Even the storm didn’t seem to stop the nui-rama. They continued to buzz after and around Takua as he sloshed through mud and tripped over fallen tree branches. Takua’s foot caught a stone, and he crashed through a thicket of tropical tree branches and vines, tumbling head over heels into the grassy clearing upon which the Great Temple Kini-Nui stood.

            It was a large raised circular stone platform, surrounded by six thick stone pillars that tapered off at the top. In the center was a large dome called a suva, a shrine for the matoran to pay their respects to the Great Spirit. Takua raced towards it, even as more nui-rama buzzed around him. He scrambled all around its perimeter, looking for clues on what to do with the special stones he had found.

            It had six slots, about the size of the stones. Each slot was labeled with an elemental symbol. A nui-rama flew right in his face, and with a yelp, Takua swung his bag at it. He missed, but one of the stones flew out and began rolling down the stairs of the temple. Takua dove after it, causing the rest to tumble out as well.

            Lightning cracked the sky overhead. All the while Takua slipped and stumbled on the steps of the temple, gathering all the stones in his arms. His wet hair and clothes clung to his body, and he shivered. One by one he matched each colored stone with its elemental symbol on the suva. When he slid each one into place, a bright pillar of light shone from each stone up to the stormy sky.

            Takua stood back to admire his work. Six blinding shafts of light from the suva had now pierced a hole in the storm clouds, revealing a perfect circle of blue sky above Kini-Nui. This seemed to startle the nui-rama, who finally lost interest in attacking Takua and began buzzing around in panicked, jerky patterns to avoid the lights. Takua was about to leave when he noticed the area growing brighter. He watched as the six pillars of light spiraled together to form one massive column and soon became so brilliant that Takua had to shield his eyes.

            Then there was an ear-shattering explosion, a burst of intense heat, and Takua felt his feet leave the ground. He flew backward at breakneck speed before hitting the ground hard, and the world went dark.

Chapter Text

            First came the sounds of the waves rushing back and forth over the sands. Then a small blurry sliver of light. Takua bolted upwards, blinking away the blurriness to find he was sitting on a beach somewhere near Ga-Koro. His head throbbed painfully behind his eyes. His body was covered in scratches and bruises.

            He must have been out for a while because his hair and clothes had dried. Wait, out? Why did he pass out? What happened?

            Takua glanced blearily around, the sun a yellow smudge on the pale horizon. Was it morning? He held his head as another wave of pain crashed about inside it. Takua pushed himself to his feet, rubbing sand off his hands. When he looked around, he could see the contents of his bag were strewn all over the beach. Groaning, Takua trudged around in circles to pick up all his notes and tablets.

            Soon all that was left was the bird sketch, but it got caught in a light breeze as Takua reached for it. He chased it across the beach, snatching at empty air as the wind blew it about as if to tease him. Then a bright glint of silver flashed in his peripheral vision.

            Takua turned his head and stopped running, the sketch now lost and forgotten. Because on the beach, embedded in the sand, was a large silver capsule lying on its side. One end was open on the sand, the other end was hugged by the incoming tide. The open end smoked slightly, and Takua could feel its heat. What must have been the top of the capsule lay in the sand a few bio away.

            The opening to the capsule was about two bio in diameter, twice Takua’s height. Takua peered inside and saw a complicated array of machinery. The whole capsule was around four bios long. He ran a hand over the shiny outside surface of the capsule, staring at his reflection for a moment before getting out a blank piece of parchment and his charcoal.

            He sketched out the strange canister. A breeze blew through him, carrying a chill. Then he noticed the boot prints starting from the opening and leading away from the beach. He approached, observing their size and shape, sketching notes all the while. He placed his boot down next to one of the prints and marveled at how much larger it was than his own.

            Now, if this wasn’t an occurrence that needed recording, Takua didn’t know what was. He followed the prints away from the beach, and back towards the path leading through the charred forest. As usual, the sunlight was blocked out, and Takua’s throat was scratched by the smoke and ash of Mangai Volcano, but the air held a strange sense of danger. The large footprints began to fade as the ground hardened, and Takua lost the trail. But he kept going deeper into Ta-Wahi regardless.

            He found himself in a dense part of the charred forest. Somewhere through the blackened interwoven branches came a snapping sound. Takua’s hair stood on end, and he ducked behind a thicket of jagged charred tree stumps. Peering through the web of branches, he could see something moving. He saw a flash of red. Curious, he crept from his hiding place and shuffled through the dead foliage towards the heavy footsteps that his ears began to pick up.

            He peered through more branches, and he nearly gasped at the silhouette of a tall, armored figure, backlit by a nearby lava flow. Too late, Takua felt a twig snap under his boot, making a sound that echoed through all of Ta-Wahi. A pair of blazing orange eyes flashed in his direction, and Takua scrambled behind a nearby boulder. His rapid heartbeat made it difficult to keep his breathing quiet. He thought he heard the stranger’s heavy footsteps coming towards him, but they were cut short by the sound of the scraping of thick branches against each other.

            Takua peeked from behind the boulder to see the stranger stuck in a large cage of tree branches, a Ta-matoran trap usually reserved for rahi that wandered too close to the village. A modest group of Ta-matoran guards led by Jaller burst from nearby bushes and surrounded the cage, brandishing spears.

            “Who are you, and why are you here?” he heard Jaller demand.

            The tall stranger said nothing and withdrew a long sword with a blade shaped like leaping flames from his belt. The blade ignited. The jaws of all the Ta-Koro guards dropped, and the whole group including Jaller began backing away with fear in their eyes. With one swift cut of his fiery blade, the stranger freed himself from the cage. Every muscle in Takua’s body tensed up, watching as the stranger stared down the Ta-Koro guards, who all began shouting and brandishing their spears.

            Then as if he’d been waiting for this moment to arrive, Turaga Vakama appeared from the trees and walked straight up to the tall stranger. Takua’s fear grew. The stranger was much taller than the elder, and no doubt he’d be easily felled by a single strike from that flaming sword. But then Turaga Vakama got down on one knee and bowed his head towards the stranger. The Ta-Koro guards all gazed at the elder, confused and curious.

            Takua felt his feet leading him out from behind the boulder and approaching the scene, even as sweat broke out on his neck from the intense heat radiating from the stranger’s sword.

            “Welcome to Mata Nui, noble Toa. It is a great honor to see you have answered our call,” Turaga Vakama was saying to the stranger as Takua approached. He could see the newcomer more clearly now. He was wearing red armor. He had light skin and wavy reddish-brown hair. He had an intense face, accentuated by bright orange eyes. Those eyes swiveled towards Takua, and burned holes through him, stopping the Chronicler in his tracks. Takua felt relief when those eyes fixed back on Turaga Vakama.

            “You know who I am?” The armored stranger said to the elder.

            Takua’s interest was at its peak.

            “Yes. I am the one who arranged for your arrival.”

            Takua found himself at the elder’s side, his curiosity overwhelming his intimidation of the stranger.

            “When? How? Why did you send for him? Who is he?” Takua asked, brimming with excitement.

            Turaga Vakama smiled and chuckled, “Patience, Chronicler. Let’s return to the village and make the Toa comfortable.”

            So, the confused Ta-Koro guards and curious Chronicler followed the elder back to the walled village with the newcomer. Jaller fell in step with Takua, nudging him with his elbow.

            “Did you see...?” his friend whispered.

            “The thing with the sword? Yeah,” Takua whispered back, “How’d he do that?”

            “I don’t know, but it’s kinda terrifying.”

            “Turaga Vakama seems to trust him, though.”

            They entered the main gate. The guards stationed there stared up at the newcomer in awe as he walked by. Takua saw him looking around like he was seeing the world, and other people, for the first time. He had more questions forming by the minute.

            Turaga Vakama called for all Ta-matoran to gather in the village center at the amaja circle, a round pit of sand sitting on a pedestal used for storytelling. Once everyone was gathered, he began to speak. The newcomer next to him towered over the crowd, looking wary and uncomfortable.

            “Gathered friends,” the Turaga said, “As you may have guessed, I have an important announcement. The legendary Toa of Fire, Tahu, has arrived on our humble island!”

            The crowd whispered curiously, a ripple of excitement and confusion traveling in all directions.

            “You see, in the time before time, the Great Spirit Mata Nui created six mighty warriors, each wielding an elemental ability to defend us from the forces of darkness!"

            More whispers, more confused than before.

            “Excuse me, Turaga, but what ‘darkness’?” Kapura’s voice rose from the crowd.

            “Does it have to do with the swarms of rahi we’ve been seeing?” Another Ta-Koro guard spoke up.

            “There is more going on than what we’ve seen,” Turaga Vakama said. For a moment, a hint of weariness seemed to pass across the Turaga’s face. But then his expression brightened, and he continued to speak. “There is an old legend that describes the past and foretells the future of our people. It is time you all heard it.” Vakama placed a stone in the center of the circle. It was carved with the face of Mata Nui. He placed handfuls of pebbles in six clusters around the Mata Nui stone.

            “In the time before time, the Great Spirit Mata Nui descended from the heavens, carrying we the ones called the matoran to this paradise. We were separate and without purpose. So, the Great Spirit illuminated us with the three virtues: Unity, Duty, and Destiny. We embraced these gifts, and in gratitude, we named our island home Mata Nui, after the Great Spirit himself.” Vakama placed a jagged black stone next to the Mata Nui stone.

            “But our happiness was not to last. For Mata Nui’s brother, the Makuta, was jealous of these honors and betrayed him, casting a spell over Mata Nui, who fell into a deep slumber.” Vakama knocked the Mata Nui stone over. The elder reached into the sleeve of his robe and from it came a cloud of fine black powder which settled over the piles of stones as he continued to speak. “Now he roams free, free to unleash his shadows upon us. And soon I fear, he shall.”

            The Turaga paused for a moment. The village was deathly quiet. The newcomer, Toa Tahu, was fixated on the elder, his orange eyes still clouded with confusion. The Turaga smiled and gestured towards the tall armored stranger.

            "But all is not lost. For we have summoned six noble warriors to defend us.” Vakama placed six new stones around the Makuta stone. “With their great power, they are tasked with defending the matoran and destined to face Makuta and defeat him once and for all.” Turaga Vakama finished the legend by knocking over the Makuta stone. He moved the six stones representing the Toa warriors to surround the Mata Nui stone, which he then placed upright once again. “Only the Toa can destroy Makuta and awaken the Great Spirit!”

            Takua nudged Jaller with his elbow. They exchanged a look of wonder. Turaga Vakama stepped away from the Amaja circle and faced the newcomer.

            “Tahu, great Toa of Fire,” the Turaga said with fervor, “Will you defend us?”

            The stranger scanned the rows and rows of expectant and awestruck Ta-matoran that surrounded him. He held his sword aloft, and the blade ignited, bathing the village with a bright orange glow. He spoke with a voice that rumbled like the volcano that loomed above them all.

            “Though I have no memories and I don’t know this place or any of you,” the Toa said, “I promise that as long as I’m here, I’ll defend you from this ‘Makuta.’” He extinguished his sword, spun it, and sheathed it in his belt. And Ta-Koro erupted in cheers.

            The crowd, including Takua, surged towards the Toa of Fire, bombarding him with questions. Takua noticed with amusement that the noble Toa looked rather uncomfortable with all the attention he was getting. Turaga Vakama began waving the crowd away, an amused smile on his face.

            “Now, everyone. Please. I need to speak with Tahu alone in my hut. Return to your duties.”

            Though disappointed, the gathered Ta-matoran began to disperse. But Takua tip-toed after the Turaga and the Toa, crouching beside the entrance to the Turaga’s hut to pick up their conversation.

            “Toa Tahu. I know I said it before, but it is truly an honor.”

            “Thank you, Turaga, but... why is it I can’t remember anything?”

            “That is strange indeed.”

            “I know nothing of this Great Spirit or this Makuta. Let alone this island, these people...”

            “It must be overwhelming,” Turaga Vakama’s voice was kind, “But in time, you will learn all you need to know.”

            “You mentioned ‘six’ Toa. There are more like me?”

            “Yes. In time you will meet them. But for now, I’ll get you acquainted with Ta-Koro and its people.”

            Takua burned with curiosity. There were five more of these Toa, each with the power over an element. It dawned on him that the stones he’d placed in Kini Nui must have been the beacon that brought them to the island. He wanted to meet the others. Just as he stood, he nearly bumped into Toa Tahu, whose eyes burned through him once again.

            “Oh, hi!” Takua blurted, “I’m, uh, Takua. The Chronicler! It’s an honor to meet you! I’ve never heard of Toa before, but I saw the thing you did with your sword in the forest, and uh...” he trailed off, feeling small next to the Toa.

            “Takua, it’s nice to meet you too,” Toa Tahu said, nodding politely.

            “Chronicler,” Turaga Vakama appeared from behind the Toa, “May I see you for a moment?”

            Takua sat on a stool across from the elder. He kept glancing out the window at the Toa as he was swarmed once again by curious and excited Ta-matoran.

            “This marks the next chapter in our peoples’ history,” the elder was saying, “That means your role will become much more important in the months to come.”

            “Uh-huh,” Takua grunted, still staring through the window at Tahu, who seemed to be struggling to answer all the questions he was being asked.

            “Chronicler,” Turaga Vakama rapped the butt end of his staff on the floor, jolting Takua out of his distraction. “I need you to listen to me.”

            “Oh, yes, Turaga!” Takua said, stiffening.

            “I’m giving you the job to chronicle the exploits of the Toa. Are you up for it?”

            “Of course, Turaga! I do have a lot of questions, like how did you know those stones I found would summon them? And where did they come from? Who is Makuta, and where is he now? Is he coming here? Are we in danger? Do we—,”

            “—Chronicler, please,” Turaga Vakama said sharply, though his expression quickly softened to one of amusement, “This is important. I need you to focus.”

            “Yes, Turaga,” Takua’s gaze dropped to the floor.

            “In time, I’m sure you’ll find answers to all your questions. But for now, I need you to begin your mission by finding the other five Toa. Gather them at Kini Nui. There they may decide their next steps.”

            “Of course. Uh, yes, Turaga,” Takua bowed his head and took a step towards the exit.

            “Be warned, Chronicler,” Takua froze in his tracks, “The Sacred Fire has shown me that danger will be growing in the weeks to come. Please, be safe.”

            Takua met the elder’s eyes, his stern gaze also carrying a hint of genuine concern. He gave a more earnest bow.

            “Yes, Turaga Vakama. I’ll do my best.”

            The Turaga smiled. “I have no doubt you will. Go now. When you’ve found the others, guide them to Kini Nui.”

            “Yes, Turaga.”

            Takua left Ta-Koro, his adventuring bag slung across his shoulder, a sense of excitement carrying his feet forward.

Chapter Text

            “Chronicler! Oh, Thank Mata Nui I found someone!”

            The Ga-matoran attendant for Turaga Nokama suddenly appeared before Takua, who nearly jumped out of his skin.

            “Macku!” He exclaimed, “You scared me!”

            “No time to apologize, we need to hurry!” Macku grabbed Takua’s arm and soon he found himself sprinting alongside her towards Ga-Koro.

            “What’s going on?” Takua said.

            “There’s been an attack. Turaga Nokama and the whole village hid in her hut, but the pump mechanism failed, and they sank underwater!”

            “What attacked you?”

            “Tarakava. Two of them!”

            Tarakava were large amphibians, and Takua knew for a fact that they always avoided matoran when they could help it. He’d never heard of one directly attacking anyone unprovoked. Once he and Macku neared Ga-Koro, he could see disturbances in the water around the giant lilypads. Where the Turaga of Ga-Koro’s hut once stood was now empty. Macku pulled Takua’s arm, silently beckoning him into the water.

            They swam among the rocks, keeping an eye on the tarakava, who were circling the water-bound village. Takua could see their eyes glowing red, just like the nui-rama that had pursued him to Kini Nui. Macku nudged him and pointed downwards towards the water. She took a breath and plunged under the surface. Takua sucked in as much air as his lungs could hold and followed her.

            The salt stung his eyes as Takua scanned the seafloor near Ga-Koro. Macku stopped swimming and pointed in the distance. Takua swam closer and could make out Turaga Nokama’s hut sitting on the sand, small air bubbles escaping from the cracks.

            Macku pulled Takua towards an undersea cave just as Takua felt his lungs begin to strain. Once inside, the two could surface in a generous pocket of air, out of the eyesight of the prowling tarakava lizards.

            “The lever to the pumping mechanism broke off. It’s gotta be on the seafloor somewhere nearby the hut,” Macku quickly explained.

            “Okay, resurface here in a minute?” Takua gasped. Macku nodded, and the two took a synchronized breath in and dove under the water once again.

            Takua drifted across the seafloor, kicking up sand and scaring away small fish. Through his air bubbles, he caught a glint of metal jammed between two coral-encrusted rocks. He blurted Macku’s name, his mouth expelling more bubbles than sound. She was too far away from him. Takua swam forward and grasped the handle of the lever, pulling as hard as he could. He felt the mechanism shift a bit, but it was stuck.

            He sensed movement in his peripherals. His air-starved lungs contracted. He saw a long scaly tail slip across his field of vision. Panicking, he scrambled for the underwater cave. He surfaced in the air pocket, gasping desperately. Macku wasn’t there. It had been more than a minute, right? Where was she? Takua filled his lungs again and dove.

            Up ahead Takua’s question about Macku’s whereabouts was answered. She was swimming for her life from one of the tarakava. Takua pumped his arms and legs as hard as he could, picking up a small broken wooden pole from the ocean floor along the way. He managed to catch up with the Ga-matoran, waving the pole at the tarakava.

            The large amphibian lunged at him, and he panicked, waving the pole uselessly at empty water in front of the rahi’s face. Macku took the opportunity to kick the tarakava in the eye. The rahi recoiled in surprise and pain, and Macku pulled Takua away before it could strike again. The two swam for their lives. Takua was starting to feel a bit faint. He needed air. Being a Ga-matoran, Macku likely didn’t need to surface just yet, but it was only a matter of time before she needed air too.

            Takua spotted the lever stuck in the rocks and pulled Macku’s arm in its direction. The two yanked it out and swam for the Turaga’s submerged hut. They managed to lock the lever back in place, and there was an explosion of air bubbles that propelled the hut back to the surface. Takua followed it, desperate for air.

            His head burst through the surface, and he sucked in a much-needed breath. Macku followed a moment after. The two panted for a moment and even exchanged an amused chuckle. But in the next instant, Macku was dragged under the water. Takua yelped and dove after her, but he felt teeth clamp down on his leg, and he was dragged out of the water. He felt himself get flung across a lilypad, and he tumbled head over heels, colliding with a Ga-matoran hut. The tarakava that had thrown him slipped back into the water. Takua recovered quickly and leaped to his feet, spinning this way and that.

            “Macku! Macku!” He cried. The two tarakava were circling the village just under the ocean surface. He could just barely make out Macku’s wriggling form in the jaws of one of them.

            Just then, the doors to Turaga Nokama’s hut burst open, and out tumbled all of Ga-Koro, followed closely by the elder herself, flanked by two Ga-matoran. The elder’s blue eyes met Takua’s and she smiled gratefully.

            “Chronicler, thank you for helping us,” she sighed in relief.

            “But, Macku! She was with me...she got pulled under!” Takua was ready to dive back in after the lizard that held the Ga-matoran hostage, but the other one burst from the water and landed heavily on the lilypad, shaking the whole thing. Takua fell onto his backside, colliding with Nixie. He helped her stand up, then froze when he found himself caught under the shadow of the great amphibious rahi. It peered down at him with burning red eyes, poised in a position that told him the rahi was ready to strike with its powerful forelegs.

            A splash sounded behind him and the rest of the Ga-matoran. Takua spun to see a tall figure dressed in blue armor and carrying a pair of long hooked weapons, spring out of the water, leap in an impressive arc over all the villagers, and land between them and the hostile rahi.

            Takua was stunned. A tall stranger wearing armor, much like Toa Tahu. But this time the newcomer was female, with tan skin, white hair and bright blue eyes. She stood before the tarakava, her hooks poised for an attack.

            The rahi swiped for her, but she blocked its claws with her two hooked weapons. She ducked under another swipe, and landed a blow on the rahi, forcing it back a step. The stranger blocked two more blows, and leaped over another attack, landing herself on the rahi’s back. The rahi panicked, diving into the water and taking the newcomer with it.

            The whole of Ga-Koro watched with worry and intrigue as the surface of the water bubbled and boiled. Takua saw the other tarakava join in the fight, soon losing sight of it in the bubbles. There was a moment when all was quiet. Then suddenly a hand burst from the water and gripped the side of the lilypad.

            The newcomer pulled herself, and a coughing Macku, out of the water and onto the lilypad surface. The whole village began to cheer, Takua included. He allowed himself a sigh of relief. He ran up to Macku.

            “You okay?” he asked.

            Macku coughed up a mouthful of water and took in a shaky breath that quickly turned into a bout of laughter. “Yeah, I’m feeling great!”

            Takua laughed too, but his excitement gave way to awe as he looked up at the new Toa. She towered over them all, her eyes full of wisdom, as well as a touch of reproach. Turaga Nokama stepped forward, giving her a respectful bow.

            “Gali, Toa of Water,” the elder spoke, “You’ve arrived at last!”

            Gali smiled warmly, giving the Turaga a bow in return. “I’m glad to be of service. But forgive me, I don’t know much else besides my own name.”

            “But you sure know how to fight a tarakava!” Macku exclaimed. She and all the Ga-matoran gathered around the Toa of Water, babbling excitedly much like the Ta-matoran did with Tahu. Takua smiled, staring in stupid awe at the new Toa.

            “Show us your powers!” a cry came up from the crowd, and soon the whole village was chanting Gali’s name.

            The Toa of Water stood tall, holding her hooks aloft. The ocean behind her rose at least twenty bios high and hung in the air above them all. When she lowered her weapons, the waters settled back into the ocean. There were gasps of awe and more excited chattering. Nokama signaled for silence.

            “Welcome, Toa Gali, to Ga-Koro, and to the island of Mata Nui!” the Turaga said, and more cheers erupted.

            “Thank you,” Toa Gali said. She seemed to be much more graceful handling the excited matoran crowd than Tahu had been. Turaga Nokama led the Toa into her hut, and Takua followed close behind.

            “Turaga Nokama,” Takua said with a quick bow, “The Toa of Fire, Tahu, had just arrived in Ta-Koro earlier today. Turaga Vakama told me to meet and gather all the other Toa.”

            “Of course, Chronicler,” the elder said, “Before you do, allow me a few minutes to speak with Toa Gali.”

            “Yes, Turaga,” Takua said, and ducked out, but stayed nearby so he could pick up their conversation. Macku snuck up behind him, putting him in a headlock.

            “Hey there, Chronicler! Nice work earlier! We make a good team!”

            “Yeah,” Takua grunted as Macku released her grip on him, “We do! Hey, sorry you got pulled under.”

            Macku waved her hand at him, “Ah, don’t beat yourself up about it. Good thing Toa Gali showed up!” Someone caught her eye, and Macku pulled her into a hug. “Hahli!” she cried happily.

            “Macku,” the other Ga-matoran said in a quiet voice, “You had me worried.”

            “I’m fine! No harm done! Hey, Chronicler, you’ve met my friend Hahli?”

            “A long time ago, I think,” Takua said, “Remember?”

            “Oh yeah. You were with the Captain of the Ta-Koro guard,” Hahli said, her gaze dropping to the ground.

            “Jaller? Yeah, if I can get him off work, we like to hang out on the beach. You should join us sometime, both of you!”

            “Sounds great!” Macku chirped. Hahli smiled, her blue eyes meeting Takua’s for a moment before flitting away shyly.

            “Chronicler,” a voice from behind wrenched Takua away from the Ga-matoran. Toa Gali was emerging from Turaga Nokama’s hut, her hooked weapons attached to her belt. “You said you were looking for the other Toa?”

            “Oh, uh, yes! Uh, Toa Gali,” Takua felt himself beginning to babble excitedly like he had with Tahu, “Also, I was wondering, about your memories...did you lose them like Tahu did? And when did you land? Where’s your canister? How does it work?”

            “You ask a lot of questions I don’t know the answer to,” Toa Gali laughed gently, “Let’s walk. Show me the way to this ‘Kini Nui.’”

            So, after saying goodbye to the Ga-matoran and Turaga Nokama, Takua led Gali away from Ga-Koro and into the jungles of Le-Wahi. Takua started to ask another question, but suddenly he felt intimidated. Gali glanced sideways at him as they walked, smiling at him.

            “You can keep asking questions, I don’t mind.”

            “Oh, okay then!” Takua laughed, “Then, um... How is it that you don’t remember anything, yet you fight so well? Wouldn’t you have forgotten that too, along with your other memories?”

            “Well, I suppose,” Gali looked down at her own hands, “I was built to fight.”

            “I guess that makes sense,” Takua said.

            “I have a question for you,” Gali said.

            “Yes?”

            “What kind of matoran are you?”

            “I’m a Ta-matoran,” Takua said. Gali’s steps faltered for a moment.

            “Sorry,” she said, “I just thought of something else.”

            Takua continued walking with her in silence, aside from the screeching of rahi birds overhead.

            “What did you think of?”

            Gali stopped again and turned to face him. Under her blue gaze, Takua felt as though a great ocean wave was hovering in the air above him. But she crouched down to his level and reached her hands out to his face.

            “May I?” she asked.

            “Uh, what are...” Takua said.

            “I’m sensing something about you,” Gali said. She pressed her fingertips gently on his temples. A heartbeat passed. “I thought so.”

            “What is it?”

            “You have a special connection to Toa,” Gali said, rising to her full height once again. Takua stared at her, asking all the questions in his mind as words seemed to fail him. Gali continued, “Whenever you need any one of us, you’re capable of finding us. And if you’re in danger, you can call us no matter where we are.”

            “What...how...me? A connection? How do you know? Why me?”

            Gali simply shrugged. “I can’t explain it. I just knew it somehow.”

            They didn’t speak the rest of the way. Takua turned Gali’s words in his head over and over. He broke out of it when he saw the six spires of Kini Nui poking out of the jungle canopy.

            “We’re here!” Takua said as they entered the clearing where the great stone temple stood. Gali gazed at it in wonderment, her blue eyes scanning every inch of it. She ascended the stairs, walked around the suva, and stared at the matoran language carved into its surface. She ran her hand over the characters.

            “So, this is where you honor the Great Spirit?” She asked.

            “Yes. In fact, that suva is where I put the stones that sent the signal out to you Toa!”

            Gali circled the suva again, raised her head, and closed her eyes. “I’d like to meditate here for a time,” she said, turning back to Takua, “If you don’t mind.”

            “Not at all,” Takua said, “I guess I’ll go find the other Toa, then.”

            Gali nodded to him and turned back to the suva. Takua left her in peace.

            He began walking towards Le-Koro, planning to ask Turaga Matau and the Le-matoran if they’d met their Toa yet. But he froze in his tracks when he reached the main gate to Le-Koro and saw no one was guarding it.

            He ran into the village. All the leafy huts were abandoned. Turaga Matau’s hut was also empty. Panic rose in his throat. Takua climbed a tree, hoping to get a better vantage point. He scanned the jungle canopy. It was quiet. The birds had stopped singing.

            Then the buzzing began. Takua’s heart sank. And the cloud of furious nui-rama rose from the trees and crashed into him, picking him up in their insectoid claws and carrying him away.

Chapter Text

            Takua sat on his too-small perch, still jarred from his sudden capture by crazed nui-rama. He was stuck on a tiny precipice jutting from the earthen wall of a gigantic hole in the ground right in the heart of the jungle. Nui-rama buzzed about, flitting between the nests they had burrowed into the walls, snapping at all the Le-Matoran that were stuck in the same predicament as the Chronicler.

            Just to his left, Takua saw a Le-Matoran on a perch a mere bio from his. He was curled into a trembling ball.

            “H-hey,” Takua’s voice shook slightly, but he cleared his throat and gathered his confidence. No use comforting someone when he sounded terrified himself. “Hey. Are you okay?”

            The Le-Matoran lifted his head, his green eyes shone with fear. He met Takua’s gaze.

            “What’s your name? I’m Takua, the Chronicler,” Takua smiled.

            “Tamaru.”

            “Nice to meet you, Tamaru,” Takua said. The Le-Matoran was still curled up, his knees pulled up to his chest as his feet clutched the edge of his tiny stone perch. “So, is this where everyone wound up? I came to Le-Koro not long ago, and it was deserted.”

            Tamaru nodded.

            “Have you tried climbing out of here?”

            Tamaru shook his head. “Not so quick-easy,” he spoke in the Le-Koro slang known as treespeak. Takua ran his hand over the earthen wall, and his hand came away slimy.

            “Ugh,” he groaned, “What is this?”

            “Nui-rama. They slime-yuck all over the place. This is their nesting-ground, after all,” Tamaru said.

            “Mata Nui,” Takua cursed as he tried scraping the slime off his hands. Tamaru gave a soft laugh. Takua turned to him and smiled. “Well, guess I’m stuck here for now,” he mused, letting his feet swing idly off the edge of his perch. A look of fear struck across Tamaru’s face.

            “Be careful, story-keeper,” Tamaru said, “It’s a long way down.”

            “Weird,” Takua commented, “Never heard of a Le-Matoran that was afraid of heights.”

            Tamaru curled into a ball again.

            “What do you do? What’s your job?”

            “Forest navigator.”

            “When we get out of here, you should show me around Le-Wahi. I still get lost in it sometimes.”

            “If we get out of here.”

            There was a moment of silence between them.

            “I wanted to join the gukko force,” Tamaru admitted, still looking away from Takua, “But when I wind-fly, I get the spin-sickness.”

            “I’ve never flown on a gukko before,” Takua said, “I always thought it looked fun.”

            “Fun until you quick-look down. Then the spin-sickness starts. So, Turaga Matau gave me a job to keep me ground-footed.”

            Takua found he related to Tamaru. Among the Le-matoran, he must have been as strange to them as Takua was to the Ta-matoran.

            “I could never handle lava farming, I was never good at smelting, and I got bored during guard duty. That’s why I became Chronicler,” Takua said with a chuckle. Tamaru seemed to relax, and he even laughed in agreement.

            “Same-hearted, fire-brother,” he said. Takua nodded, half-sure he knew what that meant.

            His mind shifted gears to escaping the pit. Takua watched the nui-rama buzz in complicated patterns below his and Tamaru’s perches. Sometimes they paused for a few moments to hover before flitting about again. Takua tightened the strap of his bag around himself and shuffled carefully into a standing position.

            Tamaru must have guessed what he was about to do. “What are you mad-crazy? One slip and you’re smash-dashed at the bottom of this pit!”

            “Yeah, probably,” Takua said, his eyes following the closest nearby nui-rama.

            “Don’t!”

            Takua jumped, and his heart leaped into his throat. He landed on the nui-rama, which immediately began jerking violently about. Takua’s vision blurred, terrified that he was going to get thrown off any moment. He latched himself to the sinewy insect body as it buzzed in spirals all around the cavern.

            It was hard to navigate where he was in space, but Takua did catch a glimpse of a few other Le-Matoran trapped on their own perches and heard them shouting encouraging words at him.

            “Look, it’s the Chronicler!”

            “Way to go, story-keeper!”

            “Tame that buzzer-flier!”

            Takua pulled on the nui-rama’s antennae, trying to steer it out of the pit. The insect spiraled in tighter and tighter circles and violently changed directions out of nowhere to throw him off. Suddenly a burst of wind swept Takua and the nui-rama from below, tossing the two upwards. Takua lost his grip and after a moment of horrible realization, he was in free fall. He screamed.

            An arm scooped him out of midair and flew him upwards at a speed he’d never traveled in his life before. The wind blasted his face and hair, his eyes watered. And suddenly his feet drifted gently to the ground above the pit. Bewildered, he spun about, and came face to face with a new Toa.

            “Are you alright, little one?” this Toa was tall with tan skin, leafy-green eyes and dark wild windswept hair. He wore green armor and had a long-handled axe strapped to his back.

            “I—I’m fine, uh...”

            “Toa Lewa, at your service!” the Toa winked playfully, and he performed a perfect standing backflip into the pit once again, carrying a powerful gust of wind with him. Takua watched over the edge of the pit as Toa Lewa swept up all of Le-Koro in a tornado and carried them all to safety. But even with the Le-Matoran and Turaga Matau out of the pit, the nui-rama weren’t giving up so easily.

            A dense swarm of the insects rose from the pit, and the drone of their collective buzzing filled Takua’s skull. Toa Lewa turned to face them, withdrawing his long axe and spinning it in his hand. With a swift thrust of the weapon, the Toa created a long funnel of wind that swept up the nui-rama and scattered them in all directions. He turned back to a cheering crowd of Le-Matoran. Takua stood in awe, a grin on his face.

            Until a hissing sound reached his ears. Takua felt the hairs on the back of his neck stand up. He slowly craned his neck to see what was behind him. A massive nui-jaga scorpion hung over him, its tail poised to strike.

            “The Chronicler is in quick-danger!” he heard Tamaru call out. A blast of wind sent the nui-jaga into the thick jungle foliage. Takua looked up at Toa Lewa, and shared a wide grin with him.

            “Thank you, Toa,” he said.

            “You’re welcome, ah...”

            “Takua.”

            “You’re welcome, Takua! Brave insect-tamer!”

            Takua laughed with the Toa until the dark shapes of more nui-jaga appeared from the depths of the jungle. And behind them, the nui-rama had recovered and were swarming the Le-matoran from the other side. Toa Lewa brandished his axe, but it was clear he, Takua, and all of Le-Koro were surrounded.

            The earth beneath Takua’s feet began to shake. Just another disaster to add to the pile. The Le-matoran began running from the edge of the pit, as the earth had begun to crumble and fall into it. Takua found himself huddled with the Le-matoran and Turaga Matau, while Lewa tried sweeping away all their pursuers at once with his powerful winds.

            A nui-jaga was moments away from attacking Lewa from behind, but it was suddenly thrown into the air by a slab of earth erupting from the ground. As it was lost from sight, the earth leveled out again, and there stood yet another Toa. He was incredibly muscular, with pale skin, deep green eyes, and wavy black hair. He carried a pair of large digging claw weapons in his hands. He soon joined Lewa’s side, and together they warded off the angry swarms of rahi while Takua and the Le-matoran watched with slackened jaws.

            They fought as though they had been a team for years, with the new Toa throwing their opponents off balance as Lewa swept them away with wind. Before Takua knew it, the area was clear. And Le-Koro surged forward, cheering the two Toa. Turaga Matau parted the crowd and approached Lewa and the other Toa.

            “Toa Lewa, master of air,” the elder bowed to him, “and Toa Onua, master of earth. It’s a pleasure! And thank you for getting us out of the dark-pit!”

            “It was no trouble at all, wise one!” Toa Lewa chirped in his light and airy voice, spinning his axe around before sheathing it onto his back.

            Toa Onua bowed his head to Turaga Matau, “I’m glad I could help.” His voice was deep but soft, it carried a thoughtful quality, which is not what Takua expected from such a wall of muscle. Takua escaped the crowd and ended up next to Turaga Matau.

            “Hi, I’m Takua the Chronicler. Toa Lewa and Toa Onua, my job is to bring you and your fellow Toa to Kini-Nui.”

            “Yes, Turaga Whenua said there were others,” Onua said.

            “What is this ‘Kini-Nui’?” Lewa asked.

            “The temple of the Great Spirit Mata Nui,” Turaga Matau said, “Yes, the first lesson any Toa team needs to learn is Unity.”

            “Then let’s get going!” Toa Lewa said, nudging Onua, who smiled and nodded.

            So, they left Le-Koro behind and headed back to Kini-Nui.

            Toa Gali was already there, hovering a few inches off the top of the suva in deep mediation. As Takua, Lewa, and Onua arrived, her blue eyes opened, and she lowered herself back to the ground.

            “I’m guessing you two are my brother Toa,” she said pleasantly.

            “Your guess mirrors ours, Toa-sister!” Lewa offered an enthusiastic hand for Gali to shake. Onua nodded to her and she shook his hand as well.

            As the three Toa conducted polite conversation, Takua found himself staring in awe. He still hadn’t gotten used to how tall they all were, and he’d seen their powers. How incredible it must be to be able to command the elements themselves. Takua quickly jotted down notes about the three of them, and Tahu, in his Chronicler journal, including crude sketches.

            Lewa had just told a joke, and as Gali and Onua laughed, an unfamiliar voice called out.

            “Hello? You guys don’t mind if we join, do you?”

            Two new Toa were approaching Kini-Nui. One had dark skin, dark braided hair, and wore brown and orange armor. Close behind him was another Toa, one with white hair, tan skin, and white armor. His left eye was icy blue, his right eye was a complicated mechanical device embedded into his face. It made tiny clicking sounds as it swiveled about, seemingly observing every possible inch of the Toa’s surroundings.

            “It’s good to meet you, brother Toa!” Gali called to them, “What are your names?”

            “Pohatu,” the brown-armored one said affably, “And my icy friend here is Kopaka.”

            The white-armored Toa Kopaka said nothing, but his gaze swept over the whole group.

            They were in the middle of introductions when Tahu showed up. Takua ran up to him.

            “Hey, Toa Tahu! Nice to see you again! So, what did you think of Ta-Koro?”

            Tahu glanced at him, saying, “It’s nice,” and walked past him. Takua drooped a bit, but his interest perked up when he realized.

            “Hey, everyone’s here!” the Chronicler proclaimed.

            Pohatu clapped his hands and rubbed them together. “Great! So, what’s the first order of business?”

            Takua busied himself making more notes about the final two Toa and got so absorbed in sketching them that he hardly noticed when tension began thickening in the air around them.

            “We should go back to our villages,” Tahu was saying. Gali put her hand up to him in a gesture of silence.

            “Hold on,” she said, hardness creeping into her voice, “We were just brought together, and now you want to split up immediately?”

            “Well, why not? We only need to be together when we confront this Makuta, right?” Tahu said. Kopaka snorted in disbelief. “What’s your problem?” said the Toa of Fire, directed at the Toa of Ice.

            “Gali has a valid point,” Kopaka said in a cool voice.

            “Why? We’ll be more effective against rahi attacks at each village if each Toa is in a village, don’t you think?"

            “I for one think that the rahi is not the biggest problem on our hands,” Gali said, folding her arms, “We need to find out why they’re attacking and go after whatever is making them do it.”

            Tahu didn’t act like he heard her. “Who here thinks we should split up?”

            Much to Gali’s visible dismay, Lewa, Pohatu, and Onua all raised their hands.

            “Sorry, Gali, but I think we should go back to our villages,” Lewa said sheepishly, “What if the next rahi attack happens while we’re off seek-finding?”

            “That’s true,” Onua added, “remember Ga-Koro was attacked hours ago. It could happen to any village at any time.”

            “But if we find the source of the rahi’s savagery, we can prevent future attacks from happening,” Gali frowned. Takua almost spoke up but suddenly felt small among all these powerful beings and forgot what it was he wanted to say.

            “But for all we know, one or several of our villages could be under threat right now,” Pohatu said. He walked over to Gali and patted her on the shoulder. “Your plan is a good one, but I think we need to assess the situations in each village before we go for the ‘source’.”

            Annoyance faded slightly from Gali’s face. She did flash a glare in Tahu’s direction before saying, “Alright, I suppose that’s fair.”

            “Then it’s settled. We’ll build up a sufficient defense for our villages, and then we’ll go ahead with the Toa of Water’s plan,” Tahu declared, which coaxed a tiny smile from Gali. “Let’s move out!”

            As the Toa began to disperse, Takua readied himself to leave as well. Then he noticed Kopaka approach Tahu. Tension thickened the air between them as Kopaka leaned close to Tahu’s face, with an eye like a chip of ice.

            “Don’t ever order me around like that,” the Toa of Ice hissed. Tahu sniffed, rolling his eyes. Kopaka practically glided away, ruffling Tahu’s hair with a cold breeze. Takua shivered slightly and then ran up to Tahu’s side.

            “Chronicler,” Tahu said before Takua could open his mouth, “Your task here is done. We should return to Ta-Koro. I’ll escort you.”

            Takua nodded jerkily and bounded after the Toa of Fire, who had already headed into the jungles surrounding Kini-Nui. As they walked, Takua sorted through his notes he had already taken on the Toa, trying to keep them together with their corresponding sketches. Tahu looked over his shoulder at him.

            “What are those?” the Toa of Fire asked.

            Takua jumped, instinctively stuffing them into his bag.

            “Ah…uh…just Chronicler notes.”

            “May I see?”

            Takua swallowed. He took the notes and sketches back out of his bag and handed them to Tahu without meeting his eye. The seconds scraped by as Tahu looked over the scraps of paper.

            “Is this one me?”

            Tahu held up the paper on which Takua had sketched his face. Takua nodded, feeling flushed. The Toa of Fire looked down at it again, and a smile flashed on his face.

            “Nice work,” he said, handing the papers back to Takua, who felt a smile on his own face.

            “I wanted to make sure I could recreate your images on the Wall of History,” the Chronicler said.

            “You’ll have to show me this Wall sometime,” Tahu said, a smile still in his eyes. Takua nodded in agreement.

            When the two arrived back at Ta-Koro, they separated. Tahu headed towards Turaga Vakama’s hut and Takua went to look for Jaller. But his search was interrupted by Kapura appearing before him.

            “Chronicler!” his eyes sparkled with excitement, “Did you meet them? The other Toa? What are they like?”

            Takua was surprised for a moment, but he found himself grinning at the opportunity to tell a story. He relayed the trouble with the tarakava in Ga-Koro, and the nui-rama in Le-Koro. He showed Kapura the sketches, describing each Toa as he had perceived them. Kapura nodded along, enraptured. As Takua spoke, he noticed that more and more Ta-matoran were gathering around to hear what he had to say. Among them was Jaller, who looked rather proud of his friend. Takua flashed a grin at him and continued talking until the crowd began to break for the night.

            Takua sighed, tired from speaking for so long, but it felt good. For once his role as Chronicler was being appreciated by his peers. Jaller lingered behind, even as the village torches were being extinguished.

            “I hope I’ll get to meet these Toa sometime,” Jaller said, “If guard duty permits.”

            “You’re the one who never takes time off,” Takua teased. Jaller jabbed him with his elbow, an amused smirk on his face. “Hey, Jaller, I was wondering if I could come with you tomorrow to the northern outpost. I’m thinking of going up to Po-Koro, spread the word of the Toa and all that.”

            “Just ask the Turaga first,” Jaller reminded him. Takua rolled his eyes.

            “Yeah, yeah.”

            “I’m checking in for the night, see you bright and early?”

            “Sure, I’m going to add to the Wall of History right now,” Takua bounded for the back wall of the village.

            “Bright and early! I won’t wait for you!” Jaller called after him. Takua spun and made a face at his friend and continued his way to the Wall of History.

            On the far back wall of the village was an entrance to a long rectangular chamber, decorated in matoran writing. There was plenty of space to write, but there were already rows and rows of characters that told of vague histories from far before Takua could even remember. He couldn’t figure out what was behind that blank space in his memory. It made him wonder where he came from and what happened before he came to Mata Nui. Asking Turaga Vakama about it awarded Takua with a vague answer.

            “Perhaps in time the old histories will reveal themselves to you,” the elder had said. And more questions from Takua did nothing to sway Vakama into telling him more.

            Takua worked with a chiseling device with a rounded end for making the circular base of the matoran letters. It would drill into the stone, then he’d have to use a standard chisel to add on more strokes. Soon all his notes about the Toa were recorded, and he had carved their faces next to their descriptions. He placed his tools on the floor below his writings and rubbed the dust off his hands. He yawned widely and jogged off to his hut, intent on getting as much sleep as he could before the sun rose.

Chapter Text

            The recent excitement of the Toa’s arrival had tired out Takua more than he’d realized until he woke up to the midday light. He jolted off his cot and gathered up anything he could into his bag. He grabbed a thick coat for the trek towards the Northern March, a Ta-Koro guard post located right on the border of Ko-Wahi. He sprinted out the side entrance to Ta-Koro in the direction of Mount Ihu.

            Takua boarded the cable car that led straight to the Northern March. As he rose into the air, suspended by a sturdy metal cable, Takua watched as the stone ground slicked with ice, then soon was blanketed in deep snow. The cable car lowered close to the ground, and Takua dismounted from it, dashing through the drifts as thoughts of a future lecture from Jaller buzzed in his head.

            Soon Takua lost steam, and his sprint slowed. At the same time, the winds picked up and began blowing snow against him. He gathered his coat collar around his throat, letting out a large white puff of air. Squinting through the blizzard, he could make out the dark outline of the Northern March outpost, its bright red flags flapping in the wind.

            “Hello? Jaller?” Takua called out. Only the howling wind answered. He shuffled his way towards the outpost, growing reproach in the back of his mind. “Hellooo!” he shouted. Still nothing. His hands, feet, and face were getting numb. Takua shivered and continued forward.

            As he approached the outpost, a cold deeper than the blizzard seized his heart. The door to the outpost was ajar and the white snow in the entrance was stained bright red.

            “Jaller? Jaller!? Anybody!?” Takua ran through the open door and stopped short. A Ta-Matoran guard lay dead on the stone floor, his skin torn and limbs broken. Blood stained the floors, walls, and ceiling. Muaka attack, it had to be.

            “No…” he mumbled through trembling lips. He clutched his collar and shivered again. He glanced up the nearby stairway. There were more blood splatters on the walls on the second level. Swallowing hard, he ascended the stairs. The scene there was much like the first; a mangled Ta-matoran body left in a puddle of his own blood. Takua carefully rolled the body over to reveal his face. His breath caught.

            “Oh…Agni,” Takua said. Agni had been one of the nicer Ta-matoran guards, if not on the shy side. Takua solemnly slid his eyelids shut. Mata Nui grant him peace. Takua stood in silence for a moment before walking onto the open observation deck. The winds buffeted the sides of the outpost and further numbed his face. He could barely see through the swirling white.

            “ANYBODY OUT HERE? THERE ARE TWO GUARDSMEN DOWN!”

            Takua’s voice seemed to get eaten by the raging blizzard. And still, no matoran voice answered him. Turning back to the bloody scene inside, Takua scribbled out a quick in memoriam for the two fallen Ta-Koro guards. He spotted a small silver canister on the floor and picked it up. He unscrewed the top and a welcoming burst of heat came with it. It was a heat stone, a small glowing rock similar to a lightstone but less luminous and much hotter. Taking his new find with him, Takua left the outpost to search the perimeter. Panic grew with each step as the world around Takua became whiter and whiter. Soon he was unable to see his hands in front of his face, and the weak light of the heat stone was lost from view as well.

            “Hello?” he shouted again. Though the heat stone warmed him up, it did nothing for the dreaded silence that followed his calls. Suddenly he collided with something hard and fell onto his backside. Blinking, he could see the snow let up just enough to reveal a wall of ice right in front of him. And much to his surprise, there was a matoran frozen inside it. Takua sprang to his feet and peered through the crystalline surface.

            He could make out a head of white hair, light blue eyes frozen with a look of fear. There was an ice pick at his belt. He knew who it was: Kopeke, the famous Ko-Matoran ice carver. Takua wasted no time holding the heat stone up to the wall, watching as the ice slowly liquified, inch by inch, the steam soaking his face and hair. Soon he was face to face with Kopeke, and he carefully worked the heat stone around his head and limbs to avoid burning him. When at last he was thawed out, Kopeke collapsed into Takua’s arms, his breathing ragged.

            “Are you okay?” Takua asked. Kopeke rose to his feet, limply pushing Takua away.

            “Fine now, thanks,” he said, glancing at his surroundings. The Ko-matoran sighed, white mist curling from his mouth.

            “How did you get in there? And where is everyone? I was supposed to meet the Captain of the Guard and a small patrol here. What happened?”

            Kopeke didn’t look Takua in the eye. He simply adjusted the ice pick at his belt. “Muaka attack. Unprovoked. I got away but…” the light in his icy blue eyes faded and Takua dove forward and caught him on his shoulder before he collapsed.

            “Hey, hey, take a minute,” Takua said, lowering Kopeke to the ground. He handed the Ko-matoran his heat stone. “How did you get frozen in there? Did you see Jaller, or any others?”

            Kopeke looked up at Takua with an expression as cold as ice. “I didn’t see anything.” His gaze lowered to the heat stone in his hands. Takua sat silently with him for a moment, getting the sense that his questions annoyed Kopeke. He waited for the Ko-matoran carver to speak again. “The muaka had red eyes.”

            “Red eyes…I’ve been seeing a lot of red-eyed rahi lately,” Takua said. “What does it mean, what’s causing it?” He nearly got lost in thought but he snapped himself out quickly. “So, you haven’t seen Jaller?”

            Kopeke screwed the cap to the heat stone shut and handed it to the Chronicler. “No.” The Ko-matoran stood up and began walking away.

            “Wait! Hey, Kopeke!” Takua started after him but slipped on a patch of ice and fell. Annoyance flared in his chest. “Kopeke! There are two dead Ta-Koro guards in there!” He pointed back at the outpost.

            “I’ll send word to the Ko-Koro guards,” Kopeke said with his back still turned. He continued walking away, but Takua stood in a huff and began trudging after him.

            An indeterminate long time passed, and if Kopeke noticed Takua was following him, he didn’t say anything. Takua got out the heat stone again to warm his hands and face. Through the silent white fog, he began to make out the carved ice archway marking the entrance to the village of Ko-Koro. He saw Kopeke briefly talk with the guards stationed at the archway and enter the village. The two guards left the archway and marched in the direction of the outpost. Two new guards promptly took their place at the entrance to the village.

            Takua watched the first two guards leave, and decided he didn’t want to go back to that outpost and see the mutilated bodies of the Ta-Koro guards again. He resolved to find Jaller later as well. Takua walked up to the village entrance, and the two guards allowed him to pass without much in the way of a greeting, or even a glance in his direction.

            Once inside, he took a moment to marvel at Ko-Koro. It was built inside an icy canyon, which shielded it from the harsh winds and snow outside. All the rocky dwellings were decorated with intricate ice carvings, no doubt by Kopeke himself. Takua almost wanted to chase him down to compliment his work but didn’t want to deal with his cold attitude. So, he wandered towards the back of the village, where the Sanctum was.

            It was home to a wall much like the Wall of History in Ta-Koro, but the words were carved from ice, and they were said to foretell future events, hence the name “The Wall of Prophecy.”  Takua scanned the rows of carved letters and observed the star charts. He saw a depiction of a jagged shadowy figure surrounded by six figures bearing an elemental symbol on their chests. The caption under it was in an ancient dialect so he couldn’t read it.

            Out of the corner of his eye, Takua saw a white-robed figure standing in front of another section of the Wall of Prophecy, peering intently at a diagram of the movement of the stars.

            “Turaga Nuju!” Takua bounded up to him, giving him a bow. Nuju’s icy blue eyes peered into him curiously through a small pair of spectacles for a moment, then nodded his head in response. “I saw this one prophecy on here, I can’t read it—" 

            Turaga Nuju raised a hand to silence him, made a circular motion with his other hand, and clicked his tongue.

            “Oh, uh,” Takua felt a rush of embarrassment, “Sorry, I…is Matoro around?”

            Nuju shook his head. He whistled, clicked, and gestured towards a tunnel in the back of the Sanctum.

            “Is he uh…out? Where is he?”

            Nuju clicked impatiently.

            “Okay, um, I’ll go find him then,” Takua backed away awkwardly and trotted over to the tunnel entrance. He should have known better than to try to strike up a conversation with Turaga Nuju; he never spoke matoran, and Takua didn’t know if it was because he couldn’t, or because he refused to. Matoro was Nuju’s right hand and his interpreter, and if Matoro wasn’t by his side then talking to Nuju was unfruitful.

            As soon as the icy tunnel opened to the outside, Takua immediately regretted leaving Ko-Koro. The winds howled like a wounded rahi and bit twice as hard. Tiny ice crystals pelted Takua’s face, stung his eyes, and froze his hair. He fiddled in his pocket for his heat stone, then shuffled through his bag. Dammit! He lost it. Takua felt a deep shiver shake his whole body.

            Nevertheless, he trudged forward, pushing his boots through the deep snow. Matoro was a Ko-Matoran, naturally resistant to the cold, but even so…Takua was sure even he could succumb to the numbing temperatures at some point. He tried not to think about how long he himself would last as he pushed on through the raging blizzard.

            As time passed, and his steps slowed, Takua couldn’t feel any part of his body anymore. He wouldn’t have known if all his fingers were still attached if he hadn’t checked his hands. He stopped. All around him was pure white. All he could hear was wind. Then a voice came to him.

            Swarm…s…swarm…

            “What? Who?” Takua choked out of his nearly frozen throat.

            Be…ware…the…s…

            “I cannn…can’t…hearrr…you…” Takua’s words came out slurred.

            Beware…s…warm…

            The edges of Takua’s vision darkened and blurred. Suddenly he found himself on the ground, the sound of the howling blizzard winds fading away.

*          *          *

            Takua awoke on the floor of an icy cave. He felt warm, and soon realized he was wrapped in a thick rahi pelt. He pushed himself up to a sitting position and glanced about. It was a small cave, about the size of the average matoran dwelling. There was a cot with rahi pelts piled on it. The cave entrance was blocked by another pelt, and Takua could hear the wind howling outside it. In front of him sat a Ko-Matoran with white hair and deep blue eyes. He was warming a stone mug over a heat stone.

            “Matoro!” Takua breathed.

            “Chronicler,” Matoro said with a relieved smile, “Thank Mata Nui you’re awake.”

            “How long was I out?”

            “About a day. I found you on the mountain half dead.”

            Takua shivered. “Thank you.”

            “Of course,” Matoro said warmly, holding out the mug, “Here, this will help.”

            Takua sipped the hot herbal liquid, burning his tongue but not caring. He sighed, feeling his strength return.

            “I was looking for you,” Takua said as Matoro sorted through the pile of rahi pelts, “I wanted to talk to Turaga Nuju.”

            “Oh, yes,” Matoro replied, “I was supposed to be back by yesterday, but the storm…”

            “Guess we have to wait it out, huh?”

            Matoro nodded, when suddenly his head snapped over to the cave entrance.

            “What’s wrong?” Takua’s question was answered immediately when a low growl reached his ears. Matoro grabbed an ice pick from the floor and crept up to the entrance. He slowly turned back to Takua, raising a finger to his lips. Takua felt his blood ice over.

            Another growl. It had to be a muaka. Soon they both could hear its footsteps through the snow outside. The creature sniffed around for a moment, then continued shuffling about. Matoro pulled aside the pelt a mere centimeter and peered through the crack.

            “Still hard to see,” he commented, “but I think it’s leaving.”

            “I hope so,” Takua said with a slight laugh. The two sat motionless for a few moments, listening to the wind outside.

            “You were saying something in your sleep earlier,” Matoro spoke up, breaking the tense silence. “Something about a swarm?”

            “Swarm…” Takua mulled it over while sipping his hot drink. His memory was foggy, but he could have sworn he remembered hearing someone say that to him earlier… “Beware…swarm…”

            “What does it mean?” Matoro asked.

            “I dunno,” Takua said, “I was probably delirious.”

            “The blizzard can do that to you,” Matoro shrugged, and peeked out of the cave entrance once again. “Hey, it looks like it’s clearing up a bit.”

            Takua finished his drink, feeling warm and energized. “Let’s head back, then!” He helped Matoro gather the rahi pelts onto a sled and the two ventured back out into the snow. Thankfully the icy wind had died down, leaving the deep snow as the only obstacle in the way of their return to Ko-Koro. The two matoran shuffled through the white drifts in silence.

            Until a familiar and unwelcome growl reached both their ears. Takua and Matoro froze on the spot. Right over the snow drift ahead of them was the hunched form of a massive muaka cat. Takua felt Matoro’s hand gently grab his sleeve.

            “Don’t move,” the Ko-Matoran whispered through clenched teeth. Takua didn’t even consider arguing. As if he could move; every muscle was locked tight in abject terror. The matoran stared at the predator, and the predator stared back.

            “How long before it goes away?” Takua whispered.

            “Um…” Matoro’s voice faltered. The muaka lifted its head, stretching its neck as far as it could go, its unnaturally red eyes fixed on the matoran all the while. It snarled through its teeth. “I’m so sorry,” Matoro’s terrified whisper sent a chill through Takua’s veins, “We should have stayed in the cave.”

            The muaka reared up in preparation for a charge but stopped when a concentrated blast of snow and ice cut it off. When the air cleared Kopaka stood between the beast and the matoran. Takua sighed a long white puff of air from his mouth, his muscles relaxing. He felt Matoro step up beside him, still as tense as before.

            “Who is that?” the Ko-Matoran whispered.

            Kopaka unsheathed a long white blade from his belt. His white hair and cape fluttered in the cold breeze the sword stirred up. Takua felt a grin split his face.

            “Just watch,” he said, excitement rising in his throat.

            The muaka arched its back, baring its teeth and slowly circling the Toa of Ice. Kopaka stood his ground, his cybernetic eye locked on the angry rahi, sword pointed at the muaka’s face. The muaka lunged for him, but Kopaka swiftly ducked under its legs and spun to face it once again. The rahi twisted its body around to face the Toa again, but Kopaka had already sliced through one of its ears. The beast roared.

            Matoro grasped his hand and began leading him away from the scene, but Takua was transfixed on the fight. Kopaka spun and dodged every swipe of the muaka’s paws with quick graceful movements. Takua could see him creating patches of ice under his boots to glide over with ease. Kopaka dove under the muaka again, sending the rahi crashing into a rocky cliff face. The beast lay stunned, so Takua took the opportunity to run toward Kopaka despite Matoro’s panicked protests.

            “That was amazing!” Takua said. Kopaka stared at him expressionlessly.

            “T-Takua,” Matoro croaked, then his voice rose in intensity, “Takua! The muaka!”

            The beast stirred and was on its feet faster than Takua could turn around. He felt the rahi’s hot breath on his back one instant, in the next Kopaka swept him off his feet, carrying them both away from the muaka on an ice slide the Toa conjured. Kopaka placed Takua on the ground, giving him a slight shove towards Matoro.

            “Go!” Kopaka barked. Matoro wasted no time; he headed straight for the ice bridge that led back to Ko-Koro. Takua jogged in the same direction but kept looking over his shoulder to watch Kopaka fight.

            The Toa of Ice raised his sword, and a vortex of snow rose from the ground. A thick white cloud formed around himself and the muaka, and both were lost from Takua’s view. He could hear Kopaka’s sword clashing with the rahi’s claws and flesh, the beast’s enraged snarls. The cloud cleared, and Kopaka had the rahi backed up against the edge of a cliff. He stabbed his sword into the ground in front of him, and with a loud crack, the ground crumbled beneath the muaka and it fell.

            “Woah,” Takua said, forgetting that he’d stopped running. With the assistance of another ice slide, Kopaka was by his side in an instant.

            “I told you to run,” The Toa of Ice said. His expression was blank, but his voice was firm. Takua immediately obeyed, making his way to the ice bridge. Matoro was already halfway across.

            A second muaka appeared on the other end of the bridge, cutting Matoro off. The Ko-Matoran barely had time to scream when the ice bridge crumbled under the rahi’s weight, and they both fell. Kopaka shot past Takua and dove after Matoro. He spun in the air, conjuring an ice slide under his feet. He caught Matoro in his arms and carried them both to safety on the other side of the cliff.

            Kopaka set Matoro down on the ground. The Ko-Matoran stared up at him with newfound respect and awe. Kopaka pointed his sword, and fashioned a new ice bridge, thicker and more reinforced than the old one, across the chasm, allowing Takua to cross to their side. Takua trotted up to them both, grinning from ear to ear.

            “Matoro, meet Toa Kopaka,” said the Chronicler.

*          *          *

            Once they made it back to Ko-Koro, Kopaka parted ways with them, stating that he needed to patrol the perimeter of the village for more muaka. Takua could see the Ko-Matoran whispering excitedly amongst themselves as they watched the Toa of Ice leave, though nobody seemed to try and approach him. Takua wondered if it was out of respect, intimidation, or perhaps the Ko-Matoran penchant for not making a fuss of things.

            With Matoro by his side, Takua was finally able to ask Turaga Nuju about the prophecy he’d seen on the Wall. The elder stared at the carving of the one being surrounded by six, then began clicking and whistling. Matoro listened intently and nodded. Once Nuju was done speaking, he turned to Takua.

            “The Turaga says that the time will come when the Toa must face Makuta directly.”

            Takua looked back up at the carving. The six beings were each marked with an elemental symbol, which meant they were the Toa and that would make the being in the center Makuta.

            “So…does that mean Makuta’s here? On Mata Nui?”

            Turaga Nuju nodded. He whistled and made a circular gesture with his hands.

            “The Turaga says that he’s been hiding, biding his time. Somewhere deep underground.”

            Takua bounced on his heels. “So, when? When will they face him? And how will they find him?”

            Nuju clicked and gestured.

            “The Turaga says you’ll have to spread this message to them. Find them all and bring them to Kini Nui when the time is right.”

            “How will I know the time is right?”

            Nuju gestured furiously, fixing Takua with a hard stare. Matoro swallowed hard. “Um, he just said, ‘you’ll know.’”

            Takua sighed heavily.

            Nuju gestured again and clicked his tongue. Matoro said, “He says you should go now, head up to Po-Koro. I’m sorry, he doesn’t mean to be rude…” Turaga Nuju rapped the floor with the butt end of his Turaga staff.

            “Got it, I’ll go, uh…” Takua backed up a pace and gave Nuju a bow, “Thank you, Turaga. And thank you, Matoro, again.”

            Matoro nodded politely, “Of course. Be safe, Chronicler. I can send for an escort for you.”

            “I’ll go,” a voice cut in. Takua turned to see Kopeke approaching, a hand on the ice pick hooked to his belt. “I owe you one, anyway.” 

            Takua smiled. “Thanks!” Kopeke gave what appeared to be a tiny smile, but it was gone as quickly as it came. He turned on his heel to leave, jerking his head in the direction of the village exit.

            “Let’s get going.”

Chapter Text

            Takua was grateful for Kopeke’s company at first but quickly realized that he wasn’t much for conversation. The two matoran trekked north from Ko-Koro, watching as the snow and ice were slowly replaced by stone and sand. Takua shed his winter coat, quickly replacing it with a thinner cloak to shield himself from the desert sun. Kopeke did the same. The silence between them stretched on, and Takua was getting antsy.

            “So, uh,” he said. Kopeke didn’t react. “I admire your carvings. Great attention to detail!”

            Kopeke grunted, and Takua wasn’t sure if it was a thank you or not.

            “Have you met Toa Kopaka? He doesn’t talk much, but he can really fight a muaka!”

            Kopeke remained silent.

            Takua clamped his mouth shut, feeling annoyance stirring in his chest. And so, the silence continued, only broken up by the hot desert winds blowing sand across the Po-Wahi dunes. Takua passed the time observing their surroundings.

            Though many matoran on Mata Nui seemed to think there wasn’t much to look at in the  Po-Wahi desert, Takua never agreed with the sentiment. The sands were a striking warm orange color, beautifully contrasted with the clear blue sky overhead. Impressive rocky mountains and formations jutted from the smooth rolling sand dunes like fish jumping out of water. The sun was bright and hot, baking the earth and causing objects in the far distance to wobble like the waves on the ocean. Takua scratched out a quick sketch of the scenery, then filled in his notes about the prophecy from Nuju and the deeds of Kopaka in the snow drifts. He thought he saw Kopeke glance over at his notebook, but the Ko-Matoran looked away just as quickly.

            In the distance, Takua could hear the steady clinking of a tool on stone. Up ahead, the sandy path he and Kopeke were traveling on branched in two, and it was marked by an array of stone statues, which he recognized as symbolic depictions of the Great Spirit Mata Nui. One of them was being worked on by a solitary Po-Matoran wielding a hammer and chisel.

            “Hello?” Takua approached him just as the Po-Matoran struck the statue one last time, and with a flourish returned the hammer and chisel to the pouch on his belt and wiped the sweat from his brow.

            “Ah, now just look at that!” The Po-Matoran said, gesturing to the statue, “This is my finest work yet!” Takua looked it up and down, noticing the small details and the overall smooth polished finish.

            “That is impressive!” he said. Out of the corner of his eye, Kopeke was staring at the Po-Matoran’s work, frowning and cocking his head to the side. Takua almost laughed; was Kopeke jealous of the carving? He didn’t dare ask and instead changed the subject.

            “I’m Takua the Chronicler. This is Kopeke, Ko-Matoran ice carver. Which road leads to Po-Koro?”

            The Po-Matoran held out a dusty-gloved hand and Takua gladly shook it. “I’m Hafu, stone carver! You’ll want to take a right. Follow the path straight to the village!”

            Takua thanked him and as he and Kopeke left, he could hear Hafu begin chipping away at another stone with his chisel. They made it to the expertly carved entrance of Po-Koro in no time. It was flanked by more stone statues, carved with more elaborate designs, and left no doubt in Takua’s mind that Hafu had carved them as well. The Po-Matoran guards at the entrance stood in the gateway, blocking them.

            “We’re sorry,” one of them said, “But we can’t let any visitors in at the moment.”

            “Why?” Takua said, expecting a warm welcome from the friendly Po-Matoran.

            “Several Po-matoran in the village have fallen ill. We don’t want it to spread further.”

            “We came a long way,” Kopeke huffed, “Your concern is appreciated, but he’s the Chronicler," Kopeke waved a hand towards Takua, “And you’re preventing him from doing his job.”

            “Uh, Kopeke…” Takua started.

            “He needs to relay an important message to your Toa,” Kopeke insisted. The Po-Matoran guards exchanged a glance, and stepped aside, allowing them passage.

            “Be careful where you step,” the second guard said as the Chronicler and the Ko-Matoran entered the village, “and please don’t get sick.”

            “Uh, thanks, we’ll try,” Takua chuckled, then whirled on Kopeke, “You didn’t have to be so rude.” Kopeke sniffed and didn’t reply. Takua’s annoyance dissolved once he glanced about. Inside the stone village was bustling with panicked villagers jogging in and out of tents, carrying water, cloths, and herbs back and forth. There were strange grey patches on the ground which were surrounded by ropes to prevent anyone from stepping on them. Kopeke nudged Takua and gestured towards a nearby tent, from which Turaga Onewa had just emerged. Takua ran up to him, with Kopeke following right behind.

            “Turaga!” Takua said with a quick bow, “What’s going on, the guards said there were matoran getting sick?”

            The elder’s forehead was creased with worry. “Yes, there’s a plague spreading. It’s not one we’ve encountered before. Even the herbs from Le-Koro don’t help.”

            “Is there anything we can do? And where’s Toa Pohatu?” Takua asked.

            “He’s been on patrol for a day or two. And I’m not sure there is anything you two can do, besides, you’re taking an unnecessary risk by being here at all.” Takua could see the tight grip the Turaga had on his staff.

            “We can try and find him for you, maybe we can find the source of the plague?” Takua offered. Movement caught his eye, and he could see another Po-Matoran being carried by on a stretcher. He was moaning in agony and his dark brown skin was slowly being overtaken by a sickly grey infection. Takua recognized him immediately as Hewkii, the most famous athlete on Mata Nui. He excelled at the popular matoran sport of kohlii and was well-liked by most. Right now, he looked small and weak, and it flooded Takua’s mind with urgency.

            “We’ll go now, we’ll get Pohatu!” Takua sprinted before Turaga Onewa could object. He could hear Kopeke’s footsteps following him as he exited Po-Koro and ventured back into the desert. As soon as they exited Takua whirled on his heel with a new surge of panic.

            “Oh, wait! We have to warn Hafu! Ah, but Toa Pohatu!”

            “Relax, Takua,” Kopeke said, and the sound of his name made Takua snap his gaze back to the Ko-Matoran. “I’ll go find and warn Hafu, you find Toa Pohatu. We’ll meet back here in an hour.” Despite his blunt attitude, Kopeke seemed genuinely willing to help, and he was good at keeping a level head. Takua smiled at him and nodded.

            “Right, thanks. I’ll see you later!”

            The two matoran parted ways. Takua began making his way around Po-Koro’s perimeter, searching for more of the greyish rot he saw plaguing the village. It didn’t take long for smatterings of the rot to appear on the boulders that rose from the desert sands. The spots on the rocks formed a trail deeper into the mountains, and Takua followed it, careful not to step on or touch any of the grey.

            He speculated in his Chronicler journal about what kind of plague infects stone as well as living things as he walked. His mind wandered to the prophecy Turaga Vakama spoke of back in Ta-Koro after Toa Tahu’s arrival, the one about Makuta spreading his darkness. He froze as his mind arrived at a chilling question: was this plague the beginning of Makuta’s attack on the matoran? He shoved his journal and charcoal into his traveling bag and picked up the pace, soon breaking into a run. The grey spots grew and spread until Takua found himself in a canyon that was all grey. Only some of the sand on the ground was unaffected, and he had to slow his pace to avoid the infected areas. He found a small boulder unaffected by the plague to sit on and catch his breath.

            As his breathing quieted, his ears picked up the subtle scuttling noises of nui-jaga scorpions echoing in the canyon. His heart sank as he realized he just walked down into a massive nest. He quickly crept away from the boulder and pressed himself against the stone wall of the canyon as several large nui-jaga came into view, snapping their pincers. He wished with every fiber of his being that Toa Pohatu would simply show up so he could get out of here. As the nui-jaga came closer to his hiding spot, he decided it was time to run.

            Takua didn’t look back as he sprinted back the way he came. The nui-jaga were pursuing, he could tell by the rapid scuttling growing closer behind him. Then as if Mata Nui himself granted Takua’s wish, Toa Pohatu sprinted around a corner and ran past Takua to face the incoming nui-jaga. He turned to flash a grin at Takua.

            “Stand back, Chronicler!” he said, spinning and kicking hard at the surrounding canyon walls, sending cracks up the stone and collapsing boulders on the nui-jaga in seconds. Unfortunately, as the dust settled, two new nui-jaga came scuttling over the fallen debris. Now that Takua had a clear view of the creatures, he noticed that the grey rot nearly covered their entire bodies, and their many eyes glowed a sinister red.

            “Toa Pohatu,” Takua said, “That’s the plague spreading in Po-Koro right now!”

            Pohatu frowned at the pair of scorpions. “Well. I can’t have you two taking another step forward!” He cracked his knuckles, and slammed his fists into the walls, sending a stronger shockwave through the canyon. More boulders fell and piled on top of the nui-jaga. Soon the canyon was completely blocked off on the ground. But snarls and shrieks sounded above their heads, and Takua and Pohatu looked up to see more nui jaga crawling down the canyon walls toward them. Each one was carrying some degree of plague on their bodies, and they all peered at the Toa and matoran with their angry red eyes.

            Takua let out a gasp of terror, but Pohatu gestured for him to back away. Takua obeyed, and he watched as Pohatu reared back his foot and kicked a stray boulder with his heavy boot. The boulder shot upwards and collided with a nui jaga on the wall. It fell with a shriek. The boulder ricocheted and hit another nui-jaga, and continued smashing into the scorpions until it landed back on the ground in front of the Toa of Stone.

            Even after the spectacular stunt, more nui-jaga emerged from higher canyon walls, and they gained in numbers faster than Takua could count them. Toa Pohatu grabbed him and slung him over his shoulder.

            “Hold on tight!” the Toa said as his body began to move faster than Takua thought possible. Soon everything was an orange blur, and Takua began to feel dizzy. Pohatu’s supersonic run lasted far longer than was comfortable for the matoran to handle, and suddenly it was over. Takua reeled for a moment, and as his vision cleared, he noticed a rough breeze blowing across the sand. And up ahead, he saw the result of Pohatu’s speed: a massive sand vortex surrounded the nui-jaga nest. Takua could see several dozen scorpions being thrown about in the strong winds.

            “I wonder how jealous Lewa would be if he saw this,” Pohatu smirked. Takua laughed. The vortex died down, and the ground shook as the entire canyon crumbled and imploded. All that was left was rubble and a massive orange cloud drifting into the blue sky. Takua sighed in relief, collapsing onto his backside on the sand.

            “Only trouble is,” Pohatu’s suddenly serious tone brought Takua to attention, “That probably won’t stop the plague.” Takua nodded solemnly. Then he remembered why he came to find Pohatu in the first place.

            “I heard a Prophecy from Turaga Nuju in Ko-Koro. He said the Toa will need to face the Makuta directly, and soon! He’s underground…somewhere. I’m supposed to bring all of you back to Kini Nui.”

            Pohatu seemed to consider this for a moment, then cracked his neck and grunted. “Well, then. We’ll need to spread the word.”

            “I can head to Onu-Koro from here, warn them about the plague.”

            “Then I’ll head south and grab Kopaka. We can meet up with the others along the way.”

            Takua nodded to the Toa of Stone, and the two headed back to the entrance of Po-Koro where Kopeke and Hafu were waiting. The Ko-Matoran looked anxious to get moving, and the Po-Matoran was wringing his hands, his brown eyes wide with worry.

            With one last friendly nod, Pohatu left them all and sprinted in the direction of Mount Ihu, disappearing into the distance in seconds. The three matoran began the trek to the Onu-Koro tunnels. The sandy dunes were soon replaced by hard rocky terrain with treacherous cliffs, marked by cave entrances of all sizes and shapes.

            Takua led Kopeke and Hafu up a grey stone path into one entrance marked by a carved stone sign that read “To Onu-Koro.” Right inside the entrance it was so dark that Takua’s daylight-stained vision rendered him completely blind for a few moments. In the next, a bright yellow light lit up the jagged walls of the tunnel. Takua nodded to Hafu, who had been wise enough to bring a lightstone. The three matoran didn’t have long to walk before they reached a large archway marked by more lightstones, flanked by two Onu-Matoran guards. They nodded to the three travelers and allowed them inside.

            Takua breathed a sigh of wonder at the sight of Onu-Koro. He’d been here plenty of times, but he was always awestruck at the architecture, the beautifully carved lightstone lanterns, the long airshafts stretching up to the impressively high ceiling to ventilate the whole village. It was also inviting and warm, thanks to the village’s large supply of heatstones mounted in clusters in every dwelling and along the carved pathways weaving through them all. An underground stream ran through the whole thing, ending in a large fountain in the village center.

            Takua tapped a passing Onu-matoran on the shoulder.

            “Excuse me, we’re looking for Turaga Whenua.”

            The Onu-Matoran pointed towards a large hut where a group of Onu-Matoran were gathered, talking over one another. Takua could see Turaga Whenua among them, looking slightly haggard. He thanked the Onu-Matoran and led Kopeke and Hafu towards the group.

            “Turaga Whenua!” Takua called out but was lost in the din of frustrated Onu-matoran voices.

            “We can’t get past it—,” one was saying.

            “None of the tools put a dent in—,” another added but was cut off.

            “—progress has been slow enough as is!”

            “We could dig somewhere else…!”

            Kopeke whistled so loud and suddenly that every Onu-matoran fell silent. The Ko-Matoran nodded to Takua, who did a double-take then switched his attention to the elder of Onu-Koro.

            “Turaga Whenua,” Takua said to the Onu-Koro elder with a bow, “We’ve come with grave news. There’s some kind of plague spreading in Po-Koro. It came from some nearby rahi, it infects the stone too. We don’t know if it’s spread to other villages yet, but we wanted to warn you all before that happens.”

            The Onu-matoran crowd was frozen and silent. Turaga Whenua surveyed them all, then raised his hands.

            “My friends, please take a few moments to rest from your labors. We’ll address this issue first.” At the elder’s command, the crowd dispersed.

            Turaga Whenua gave Takua a tired smile, “Thank you for your message. Sorry about the noise, just a slight problem facing the mining teams, but clearly not as important as what you just told me.” His voice turned grave and he gripped his Turaga staff with both hands, “Makuta is returning.”

            Takua gave another bow. “Thank you for hearing us. We’ll be on our way to Le-Koro to spread the word now.”

            “You can take the highway straight there, just down that way and to the right,” Turaga Whenua pointed towards a tunnel entrance deeper inside the village.

            The three traveling matoran bowed to the elder one last time and made their way into the tunnel entrance. It was a straight path for a while, then the tunnel opened into a massive cavern where the whir of drills echoed incessantly. Onu-matoran were stationed around and inside a large crater where they were trying to drill through what looked like smoothly polished stone, but their tools didn’t leave a dent. Takua leaned over the guardrails in curiosity.

            Hafu placed a hand on his shoulder. “Come on, Takua, the Le-Koro highway is this way.’ The Po-matoran gestured towards a tunnel entrance to the right marked with the words “Le-Koro Highway.” Kopeke was nearly there, but he stopped and tapped his foot impatiently at his companions.

            “Wait, I just want to see something.” Takua climbed over the railing and slid down the crater to the bottom. The Onu-matoran miner named Taipu stopped him short.

            “Stand back, Chronicler. It’s not safe to wander in with the equipment running.”

            “Oh, sorry. I just wanted to see what was going on.”

            The Onu-matoran sighed, placing his hands on his hips and glancing down at the polished dome under their feet. He tapped it with his boot.

            “Well, this is our problem. We’re trying to get down to a lightstone deposit, but we can’t break through. Funny thing is, it’s not the first time we hit something like this.”

            “Wait. There are more of these?” Takua said.

            “Yeah, all over the island. We’ve marked them on this map,” Taipu said, pulling a roll of parchment from his pack. Takua stared at it for a moment then poked at the map with his finger.

            “This one is right under Kini-Nui!” he exclaimed. Taipu nodded, his brow furrowed.

            “I wonder if it means something…oh, who’re your friends?”

          Takua was suddenly aware of Hafu and Kopeke being right behind him.

            “These are my companions, Hafu and Kopeke.”

            “Nice to meet you both,” the Onu-matoran said. “Name’s Taipu.”

            “Stone you can’t break? That’s new,” Hafu crouched down and felt the surface of the dome with his hand. “It doesn’t feel like metal either…”

            “Takua,” Kopeke tapped his shoulder, “This has nothing to do with us. We need to go.”

            “Don’t let us keep you! We’ll figure this out,” Taipu grinned, returning the map to his pack.

            Before Takua could protest, the ground began to shake. The guardrails and mining equipment rattled and Onu-matoran voices rose up in a panic.

            “Get back to the village! Salvage what you can!”

            “Watch your heads!”

            “Move!”

            Taipu grabbed Takua’s hand and the two ran as the cavern shook and rattled harder. Chunks of earth began breaking off the ceiling. Takua could see Onu-matoran clamoring for their drills and lightstones and running for the safety of Onu-Koro. Taipu stopped short and Takua crashed into him. He bolted up and saw the reason for Taipu’s sudden halt.

            The tunnel leading back to Onu-Koro had collapsed. The earthquake quieted, and everything lay still for a moment. Takua could hear matoran all around him slowly rising to their feet, brushing themselves off, and asking their friends if they were okay. He craned his neck behind him and with relief could see Kopeke helping Hafu up to his feet.

            “Great.” He sighed at the cave-in. But Taipu cracked his knuckles and grabbed a nearby pickaxe. And he sprinted away in the opposite direction.

            “Uh, Taipu?” Takua called. “The cave-in’s this way!”

            But Taipu began calling out orders. “Team One, work on the village entrance! Team Two, over here with me!”

            After some scrambling, the Onu-matoran grouped themselves accordingly and got straight to work. The sound of drilling filled the cluttered cavern in no time. Takua could see Taipu leading a group of miners to the Le-Koro highway, which had also collapsed in the earthquake.

            “Here, Chronicler!” Takua was broken out of his thoughts as a heavy rock was placed in his arms and he grunted with the sudden strain. Taipu winked at him.

            “Think you can handle a real job?”

            Despite himself Takua smirked at him and began carrying rocks back and forth, placing them in wheelbarrows. Kopeke was doing the same, while Hafu had grabbed another pickaxe and began helping with the digging.

            It was back-breaking labor, and Takua felt himself sweating from every pore. His hands were coated with dust. His whole body hurt. A real job, huh? He thought to himself. I’d rather be the Chronicler, that’s for sure.

            Before long, the mining team by the village entrance declared the tunnel clear. A cheer rose up among the miners and many of them filed into Onu-Koro. A few of them remained behind to reinforce the tunnel with metal beams. The Le-Koro highway was nearly there, according to Taipu, but there were still rocks to move, so Takua kept at it. Once the team finally broke through, they traversed the tunnel to check for any more blockages. Sure enough, they ran into a second cave-in, and the work continued.

            “You know,” Hafu said to Takua while they were working, “This really makes me appreciate home more. With the open sky..." he trailed off, looking worried. He continued chipping away at the earth with his pickaxe. Takua felt a pang for him, no doubt he was thinking about the plague and his fellow Po-matoran. He couldn’t muster up some clever encouragement, so he didn’t bother and picked up another heavy rock.

            He underestimated the rock’s weight, and his fingers slipped. The rock landed on his foot, and he fell back, groaning in pain. Even worse, his foot was caught under it.

            Taipu appeared by his side and lifted off the rock and tossed it aside like it was nothing.

            “You alright?” the Onu-Matoran said.

            “With some luck I think I’ll live. Thanks!” Takua grinned despite the pain. He limped over to another rock and carefully weighed it in his hands before lifting it. Out of the corner of his eye, he saw Taipu striking the debris blockage with his pickaxe with broad, smooth motions. One last hit, and debris fell away and opened a hole from which bright sunlight streamed through. Taipu let out a grunt, shielding his sensitive green eyes to the daylight. Takua blinked, a surge of joy bringing him forward despite the pain in his foot.

            “We’re almost through!” Takua called out to the rest of the team. Everyone began clearing away the rocks and hard-packed clods of earth until the tunnel was open again. Everyone cheered, Takua jumped about excitedly with Hafu, even Kopeke looked happy to see the sun again. He shook Taipu’s hand with overflowing enthusiasm. 

            “Thank you, thank you! Taipu, you’re the best!”

            “Ah, I was just doing my job,” the Onu-matoran smiled bashfully.

            “Now,” Takua placed his hands on his hips, facing Hafu and Kopeke, “We can get going.”

            The three walked on through the tunnel. But Takua stopped. Looking back, he could see all the Onu-matoran had retreated underground except Taipu. Takua jogged back to him.

            “Hey,” he said, “You wanna join us?”

            Taipu looked slightly embarrassed.

            “Well, it’s just…I’ve heard Le-Koro’s beautiful. And the Le-matoran play great music.”

            Takua beckoned to him. Taipu’s green eyes widened, and he grinned and ran to Takua’s side.

Chapter Text

            The air of the Le-Wahi jungle was thick and wet. Water droplets fell from the leaves and branches of the surrounding foliage. Takua guessed that he and his companions had just missed a rainstorm. The sun blazed through the thick canopy, bringing out the bright green in the leaves and vines and moss, making the dewdrops sparkle like gemstones. Flowering plants added extra splashes of yellow, red, orange, and pink to the scenery.

            Takua allowed himself a moment to enjoy the beauty of the jungle, and snuck a glance at Taipu, who was surveying the area in utter delight. He blinked as his green eyes adjusted to the bright light of the surface, his grin widening by the minute. Taipu’s excitement was contagious; Takua could see a skip in Hafu’s step and Kopeke’s gaze captivated by colorful butterflies fluttering between the leaves.

            The tranquility didn’t last long. Soon buzzing reached Takua’s ears, then one by one each of his companions noticed too. The sun dimmed as a swarm of nui-rama passed above. The four matoran dove under some large palm leaves and waited for the rahi to leave. Takua peeked through a gap in the leaves and could make out the red glow of the rahi-insects’ eyes and the greyish rot on their bodies.

            A tap on his shoulder nearly made him jump out of his skin, but he clamped a hand over his mouth to avoid making a sound. He whirled to see Tamaru with a finger to his lips. The Le-Matoran tugged at his arm.

            Takua alerted the others as quietly as possible, gesturing for them all to follow Tamaru. They crawled after the Le-Matoran through the leaves and ferns, catching their clothes and skin on bristles and thorns along the way.

            Tamaru led them up a steeply slanted tree trunk with notches carved into the wood for foot and handholds. The group found themselves on a wooden platform high in the branches before long. As soon as they arrived, Takua could see Le-Matoran heads popping out from behind nearby branches, Le-Matoran sliding down vines from higher above, staring curiously at the newcomers.

            After some quick introductions, Hafu stepped forward to address Tamaru.

            “Those nui-rama…they had—,” he started, but a new Le-Matoran dropped down from a vine above them, landing lightly on his feet. He had wild dark hair and sharp green eyes. Takua recognized him instantly: Kongu, the captain of the Gukko Squadron, a small army of Le-Matoran mounted on the backs of gukko birds.

            “—the Dark-Plague. That’s what we’re name-calling it, anyhow,” Kongu said.

            “So, it’s started here, too…” Hafu said worriedly.

            “Not only that, but the worst bad-news,” Tamaru added, his brow furrowed. He nearly spoke again, but his voice seemed to fail him. Takua felt a chill flow through his veins.

            “It’s got Toa Lewa,” Kongu finished for his fellow Le-Matoran. “A whole lot of our leaf-brothers and the Turaga too. Toa Lewa makes sure they don’t leave the nui-ramas’ dark-nest.”

            There was a grave silence among the assembled matoran. Even the Le-Matoran still hanging from vines looked crestfallen. Tamaru cracked a wide grin, much to Takua’s confusion.

            “I’ve got a think-plan!” Tamaru said cheerfully. Kongu ran his fingers through his hair eyeing Tamaru with incredulity.

            “A ground-runner think-plan?” The Captain mumbled under his breath.

            “But Captain, deep-wood has come friend-help!” Tamaru gestured to Takua and his companions, “I’m sure it’ll work!”

            Kongu still looked unsure. Taipu stepped forward.

            “We’re glad to offer the friend-help!” he said with a smile. Takua snickered at the Onu-Matoran’s use of tree-speak but also agreed.

            “Tell us the plan, Tamaru,” Takua encouraged.

            Tamaru gave him an enthusiastic nod and soon began his explanation, mapping out his strategy by carving into the wooden platform under their feet. Takua and his company listened and nodded along. After Tamaru’s whole strategy was laid out, Takua could see Kongu’s skepticism fade away. He clapped Tamaru on the back, then gave a loud whistle to assemble what was left of the Gukko Force.

            It wasn’t long before Takua found himself being offered by Kongu to be his Second aboard his gukko bird.

            The Chronicler hesitated for a moment. He examined the massive feathered rahi, its aerodynamic shape, its sharp beak and talons, and its impressive wingspan. He’d always wanted to try it out, but now that the opportunity presented itself, he was suddenly intimidated. There was also a lot at stake, he thought of the captive Le-Matoran and Turaga Matau. He thought of Toa Lewa, infected by the plague. What if the plan didn’t work? What if he fell off?

            “Takua,” Tamaru’s voice sounded behind him, and Takua turned to face him. “Remember, in the cliff-nest? You jump-mounted the buzzer-flier without head-thinking.” The Le-Matoran ran a hand along the gukko’s feathered flank. “This won’t be that kind of wind-flight. You can trust the bird-beast. And Kongu.”

            Takua could see Kongu beaming at the words, and he couldn’t help feeling heartened as well. He smiled at Tamaru. He offered a hand, and Tamaru shook it. Takua approached Kongu’s gukko and lifted himself onto the saddle on its feathered back.

            “Hold on, story-teller!” Kongu said, tugging the bird rahi’s reins. As the gukko reared back with a piercing screech, Takua wrapped his arms around the Le-Matoran. He could see Kopeke and Hafu also mounting other gukkos as Seconds, while Taipu and Tamaru waved up at them from the wooden platform.

            A steady drumbeat started from a group of Le-Matoran down below. The gukko birds began to flap their giant wings. The drums pounded harder, and the gukko birds kicked off the platform in unison. Takua felt his heart drop as he was lifted into the air. He clung desperately to Kongu, who let out a shriek, a signal to the others to get into formation. The jungle below shrank and became a blur.

            “Ready the disc-flier!” Kongu shouted above the winds. With blurred vision Takua fumbled with his fingers along the edge of the saddle. His hand hit metal and grasped the disc launcher attached to it. He still clung to Kongu with his other arm.

            “Chronicler!” Kongu said as he angled his gukko downwards, “Fast-cling to the bird-beast with your legs! You need both hands!” Takua swallowed hard, his throat was dry. He clenched his thighs as hard as he could to the saddle, and with shaking hands he hoisted the disc launcher onto his shoulder. As Kongu’s gukko began spiraling downwards, Takua took aim at a cluster of fast-approaching nui-rama. His first shot missed but scattered the infected rahi insects. A disc from another mounted Le-Matoran struck one in the head.

            The gukko reared, and Takua felt his legs beginning to slip. He dropped the disc launcher in his lap as he gripped the saddle in a panic.

            “We’re going too fast!” He cried over the wind screaming in his face.

            “We’re going as ever-quick as we need!” Kongu said, directing the gukko upwards into the sky. They slowed and lingered above the clouds for a moment. Takua took the opportunity for a deep calming breath.

            “You okay?” Kongu asked, looking back at him. Takua steeled himself, setting the disc launcher onto his shoulder again. He nodded. With a grin, Kongu directed the rahi bird back downwards.

            This time Takua felt more ready. As the jungle canopy quickly approached, he spotted some nui-rama circling above the trees. He took aim and fired, a disc clipped one nui-rama’s leg, sending it spinning. He aimed again and struck another on the head. It plummeted below the canopy.

            “Nice shot, fire-brother!” Kongu said over his shoulder.

            Takua lost track of time during the battle. As he grew more accustomed to the gukko’s movements, he felt his leg muscles relax a bit, and his aim with the disc launcher improved. He hit one nui-rama after another, keeping the angry swarm at bay. He could see other Le-Matoran on their gukko mounts doing the same. He even caught a flash of Kopeke on the back of another gukko, his white hair fluttering in the wind.

            Up ahead nui-rama swarmed in tighter clusters. They seemed to be protecting a series of small openings in the ground, which no doubt led to their hive. The rocks and trees in the surrounding area were stained with the grey rot of Makuta’s plague.

            “We’re going in!” Kongu called to Takua over his shoulder, “Keep in-tight!” Takua reattached the disc launcher to the saddle and flattened himself onto the gukko’s back. The rahi bird tucked its wings close to its body and dove straight into one of the openings, and the light of day vanished.

            Inside the hive was the drone of nui-rama wings, and the stale smell of sickness. Both Takua and Kongu coughed at the stench. There was a flash of green, a powerful wind, and Takua and Kongu and the gukko bird spun head over heels over and over and collided with the slimy hive floor. They lay in a dazed heap.

            Takua was the first to sit up. He shivered, wrinkled his nose at the smell, and surveyed his surroundings. The inside wall of the hive was a hexagonal pattern of cells where nui-rama would perch before buzzing away. Takua could see Le-Matoran stuck inside some of the cells, and the plague was spreading over their bodies and even on their clothes. He could see Turaga Matau in his own cell, unconscious and completely taken over by the rot. Takua jumped to his feet in a sudden panic.

            He could see smatterings of the rot all over the walls and floor, and he was mere inches from a patch of it. He flew over to Kongu, who was dazed and stuck half-under his unconscious gukko’s wing. He gripped the Le-Matoran under his arms and pulled him out.

            But as he pulled Kongu free, he could see the plague beginning to spread up the Le-Matoran’s legs. Takua let him go, jumping back a step.

            “Intruder,” a voice hissed from the darkness behind him. Takua’s skin crawled with cold dread. He knew that voice. But it was wrong; too harsh, too quiet. He forced himself to face the voice, though sweat prickled the back of his neck.

            Out of the shadows stepped Toa Lewa, his tan skin nearly completely greyed out with the rot. His green eyes now blazed with an angry scarlet light. He stood with an animalistic hunch, his axe in a death grip in his fist. His grin opened wider than natural, and he hissed again.

            “Intruder…”

            Takua’s throat constricted, but he managed to whisper out, “Toa Lewa…”

            Toa Lewa gripped his axe in both hands and raised it above his head. Takua shrank under the gleaming blade.

            Somebody, please, he pleaded in his panic-stricken mind, Mata Nui please send another Toa…!

            The axe blade came down, and Takua dove aside just in time. 

            “Toa Lewa!” Takua shouted, his voice bolder now, “It’s me! The Chronicler!”

            The infected Toa of Air didn’t seem to hear him. He readied his axe again and swung horizontally, throwing a blade of air that hit Takua square in the chest. He hit a wall, and his breath was knocked from his lungs. As he panted, Lewa approached, creeping toward him like a curious predator. He extended an infected hand.

            The slimy earth under Lewa’s feet shot upwards and threw him into the ceiling of the hive. Takua leaped to his feet and nearly cheered at the sight of Toa Onua, digging claws clenched in his hands. Lewa plummeted to the floor and lay still for a few moments. He stirred and twitched, rising to his feet once again and facing his brother Toa.

            “Intruder…” he whispered. Onua planted his feet, digging claws at the ready.

            “Lewa,” Onua said in his deep calm voice. Lewa began circling Onua like a muaka on the prowl, occasionally stumbling and twitching. Takua felt himself frozen solid on the spot with equal parts fear and anticipation. He watched the Toa, comparing Onua’s solid stance with the infected Lewa’s staggered spastic movements.

            Lewa made the first move, swinging his axe and sending blades of air at his fellow Toa. Onua crossed his arms in front of his face and blocked the gale-force winds. He stomped one of his feet into the hive floor, sending cracks towards Lewa. Just as the earth beneath the Toa of Air began to crumble, he leaped backwards in a graceful arc and landed on the wall above Onua. Lewa jumped back down on top of him, leading with his axe.

            Onua blocked the blow with his interlocked digging claws, spun, and threw Lewa full force into the wall. Lewa lay twitching for a moment before leaping back to his feet with a blast of air. He stepped towards Onua, baring his teeth and hissing like a rahi. Then he stopped and blinked. Onua watched him carefully, still in a guarded stance. Lewa’s head twitched to the side, and back up. He blinked, and his red eyes suddenly returned to their natural green color.

            “O—Onua?” Lewa spoke in his normal voice. Onua let his guard down and took a step towards him.

            “Lewa, is that you this time?” Onua reached out a hand, but with another violent spasm, Lewa hunched down and his eyes blazed red. He snarled and jumped at Onua, knocking him backward. The Toa of Earth landed flat on his back on the hive floor, Lewa attempting to pin down his neck under the handle of his axe. Onua kicked Lewa in the torso, sending him across the hive floor. The two Toa recovered quickly and began clashing their weapons together, lighting up the inside of the hive with sparks.

            After a few more exchanged blows, Onua threw Lewa backward a few steps and the Toa of Air stopped again. His eyes blinked back to green.

            “What—what is this?” Lewa hissed. His eyes blinked red, then back to green again. He grunted, dropping his axe. He clutched the sides of his head and groaned in agony.

            “Brother!” Onua stepped towards him, but Lewa threw up his hand.

            “Don’t! D—don’t come closer!” Lewa cried while doubled over. His hand dropped and he slowly raised his head. His eyes were red again, burning like the lava flows of Mangai Volcano. He thrust his arms out to the sides, stirring up a vortex of wind around himself. Onua stumbled but re-planted his feet on the hive floor. Lewa’s feet left the floor and the winds grew in intensity. Takua remembered himself again and gripped the uneven wall of the hive to keep from being sucked into Lewa’s vortex. Soon the howling wind was all he could hear. Le-Matoran and nui-rama alike were swept up, screaming as they were tossed in circles in the air.

            Takua could see that Onua was now rising into the air as well. Lewa’s discarded axe flew past his head, and the Toa of Earth managed to snatch it before it got away from him. In the heart of the vortex, Lewa was laughing a harsh maniacal laugh that wasn’t his own, the red glow of his eyes intensifying to the point of being nearly blinding.

            Onua twisted his body around, and his feet hit the wall of the hive. He bent his knees and launched himself off the wall towards Lewa, brandishing the Toa of Air’s axe. Lewa caught Onua’s hand before he could swing the weapon. However, as soon as their hands made contact, a bright white light emitted from Lewa’s axe, and a shockwave rippled out from it. Lewa’s vortex halted, and cracks formed on the walls of the hive.

            Takua blinked in disbelief. The plague on the walls had cleared as well. The two Toa plummeted. Onua caught Lewa’s limp form in midair and twisted so his own body absorbed the shock when they landed on the floor. All was still for a moment. Takua let out a breath he just realized he’d been holding for a long while. Dazed Le-Matoran began emerging from the hive cells, the plague was no longer infecting their skin. Turaga Matau rose to his feet using his Turaga staff, and he too was no longer infected.

            Takua dashed towards the spot where Toa Onua and Toa Lewa lay, in a shallow crater that cracked the hive floor when they had fallen. Lewa, looking like his normal self again, sprung up first, kneeling next to his brother Toa.

            “Onua! Earth-brother!” Lewa said, patting the Toa of Earth’s face to wake him. Onua lay still. Lewa put an ear to his chest. He gripped Onua’s shoulders and shook them hard. “Earth-brother! Quick-wake already!”

            Onua groaned and opened his eyes. Takua let out a cheer, and quickly the Le-Matoran joined in, filling the hive with jovial sound. The nui-rama above were no longer afflicted with the Makuta plague and buzzed about completely apathetic to the celebration below. Toa Lewa helped Toa Onua to his feet, but he barely had a moment before being surrounded by excited Le-Matoran. Takua was soon joined by Kopeke, Hafu, Taipu, Tamaru, and Kongu, and they all jumped and cheered and embraced one another.

            “Little one,” Lewa’s voice cut in, and Takua turned to face him. The Toa of Air looked somber. “I am ever-sorry for the axe-attack,” he placed a hand on his own chest, “It won’t happen again, heart-promise.”

            Takua smiled. “It’s okay, Toa. I knew it wasn’t really you.” Toa Lewa returned the smile, evidently reassured. Onua approached his brother Toa, resting a large hand on Lewa’s slender shoulder.

            “We should regroup with the others. We should spread the word about the cure for the plague: opposing elements.”

            “Oh, I should mention,” Takua said, bringing both Lewa and Onua’s attention, “Turaga Nuju told me that you Toa need to confront Makuta directly. His lair is underground somewhere.”

            “Then we’ll seek-find our brothers and sister,” Lewa exchanged a nod with Onua, and leapt into the air with a strong wind. Onua stared after him for a moment, then climbed out of the nui-rama nest with his digging claws in a matter of seconds.

            Takua’s matoran companions rejoined him and they all climbed their way out of the nui-rama hive with the rest of the Le-matoran. They regrouped on the outskirts of Le-Koro with the intent to determine their next steps. Taipu was the first to speak.

            “I have a hunch,” the Onu-Matoran said, “That the domes in the mines we couldn’t break through…I was just wondering if they had something to do with Makuta’s lair.”

            “Something that unnatural,” Hafu added, “It’s gotta be Makuta-related, right?”

            “It’s worth checking into, I think,” Takua said. He addressed them all, “Taipu should go back to Onu-Koro and get the mining teams to uncover more of those unbreakable domes. And send word to the Ussalry, we’ll need some mounted fighters. Tamaru, think you can convince Kongu and the Gukko Force to join us at Kini-Nui?” The Le-matoran navigator nodded excitedly. “I’ll go to Ta-Koro and see if I can recruit some guards and gather weapons. And Kopeke—,”

            “Takua!” a familiar feminine voice reached Takua’s ears. Macku dashed through a thicket of jungle ferns, a disc launcher strapped to her back. She deftly leaped over a mossy boulder and landed and skidded to a stop right in front of the startled Chronicler. “Turaga Nokama said you might need some help, so here I am! What’re we doing, what’s the plan?”

            Takua smiled and filled her in. Soon the whole company of matoran split ways; Tamaru left to talk to Kongu, Taipu retreated into the tunnels near Le-Wahi, Hafu and Kopeke began making plans for traps, and Macku joined Takua on his return trip to Ta-Koro.

            His mind flashed back to what seemed like forever ago when Jaller asked him to meet him and his patrol at the Northern March early in the morning. Takua felt guilt surging inside him like a flooding tide pool. Jaller was going to be furious when he saw Takua, he probably wouldn’t want to talk to him ever again. He must have looked troubled because Macku slapped him lightly on the back.

            “You don’t have to worry, Takua! You’ve united the whole island, basically. Makuta won’t know what hit him!”

            Takua smiled weakly, “Thanks…”

            “Something else bothering you?”

            “It’s…nothing,” he said. He knew his tone was unconvincing, but she didn’t press him. So, the two walked in silence until they reached the charred forest. Much to both Takua and Macku’s surprise, Toa Tahu was walking towards them on the pathway.

            “Toa Tahu!” Takua called and waved. The Toa of Fire looked his way and nodded, his face stern. Takua swallowed. Was he angry with him? Tahu approached him and Macku and stood towering over them.

            “Your Captain of the Guard asked me to go find you. Looks like I didn’t need to,” Tahu cracked a small smile, which made Takua nearly melt in a puddle of relief.

            “Thanks, Toa,” Takua laughed nervously.

            “Are you headed to Kini-Nui?” Macku asked, bouncing on her heels.

            “Yes, ah…”

            “Macku, Turaga Nokama’s right hand!” Macku introduced herself with a wave of her hand for emphasis. Tahu chuckled.

            “I’m glad to meet you, Macku. Now if you two will excuse me,” he walked past them, continuing down the path leading out of the charred forest. Macku bounced again and nudged Takua in the ribs.

            “He’s so cool!” she said, skipping ahead towards the main Ta-Koro gates. Takua’s smile appeared and retreated just as quickly. Jaller had asked Toa Tahu to find him, that definitely meant he was worried, but how angry was he? Takua knew he was mere minutes from finding out, and he hated the anticipation. The Ta-Koro guards let Macku and Takua in, and sure enough who awaited but Jaller himself, arms folded across his chest. Takua approached his friend and stood in front of him.

            “I know what you’re going to say—,”

            “—that you were so late that you vanished for more than a week? That I haven’t slept in three straight days?”

            Now that he mentioned it, Jaller did have dark circles under his eyes, and his hair was slightly disheveled. Fresh waves of guilt washed over him.

            “Look, a lot happened, the guards at the Northern March were dead, I got caught in a blizzard, attacked by nui-jaga in the desert, stuck in the mines—,” Takua stopped when Jaller trapped him in a tight embrace.

            “You are the most irresponsible matoran I know,” his friend chuckled. Takua returned the hug and the two broke apart. Jaller placed his hands on his hips. “Word is you’ve formed an alliance with matoran all over the island.”

            Takua shrugged, “It just kinda happened. We’ve got to prepare for—,”

            “—For the Toa’s confrontation with Makuta,” Jaller finished for him, “Toa Pohatu and Toa Kopaka delivered the news not long ago.”

            “Right. So…am I forgiven?” Takua punched Jaller’s arm. His friend punched back, twice as hard.

            “Depends on how well you lead the defense of Kini-Nui,” Jaller chuckled. “Speaking of which, I’m sending Kapura along with some Ta-Koro guards to join you.”

            “What about you?”

            Jaller sighed. “I have to stay here, guard the village just in case.” Takua nodded in understanding. He grinned at his friend again.

            “After this is over, you need a vacation,” he joked. 

            Jaller chuckled. “And you need a bath.” It dawned on Takua that he was probably covered in layers of dirt and sweat and suddenly felt self-conscious. He heard laughter behind him.

            “Then let’s hang out on the beach after this whole Makuta thing is done,” Macku joined in. Takua had nearly forgotten she was there. “I’ll be sure to invite Hahli, too.”

            “Sounds good,” Jaller said, then gave the Ga-Matoran a stiff salute. He strode towards the Ta-Koro barracks to continue his duties.

            In front of Turaga Vakama’s hut was gathered a small group of Ta-Koro guards, armed with disc launchers strapped to their backs like Macku. Kapura was the first to acknowledge Takua.

            “We’ve been hearing about your travels,” Kapura said, a hint of admiration in his voice, “You have to add it to the Wall.” Takua felt his face flush.

            “Eventually,” he said, chuckling with embarrassment, “But right now, we have to go.”

            So, Takua and Macku led the team of Ta-Koro guards from the village and started in the direction of Kini-Nui. Takua had no idea what to expect from the coming days, but every fiber of his being tingled with excitement. He was going to have a lot to write about when this was all over.

Chapter Text

            Kini-Nui was quiet, much like the silence before a thunderstorm. There were no chirps or trills or buzzes from any living thing on the island. Takua could feel himself beginning to itch.

            Tahu, Kopaka, Lewa, and Onua stood at the bottom of the Kini-Nui steps, waiting for Pohatu and Gali to join them. After Onua had told them of the cure for the Makuta plague, they took off north to Po-Koro to clear up the infection. They all acknowledged that it was a temporary fix, that only defeating Makuta himself would end the plague for good. But still, Po-koro was hit the hardest, with the most matoran infected.

            Takua watched the rest of the matoran he’d gathered on his journey around the island. Taipu was helping Kopeke and Hafu put the finishing touches on their various rahi traps. Macku and Kapura and the small crew of Ta-Koro guards were loading up as many disc launchers as possible and distributing them among those gathered. And Tamaru was nearly finished setting up the flares he would be using to signal the Le-Koro Gukko Force when the time was right. Macku bounded up to Takua and placed a disc launcher in his hands. She winked at him and gave him a pat on the shoulder before moving on to the next matoran. Takua hefted the weapon, feeling the weight of it, and felt his spine tingle.

            Before he got lost in his own thoughts, Takua spotted a blur rush across his field of vision, and felt a strong wind blow past him. He blinked and saw Pohatu carrying Gali on his back. The Toa of Stone allowed the Toa of Water to place her feet back on the ground. Gali bent over and panted for a moment.

            “Next time,” she gasped, mustering up an amused smirk, “We’re swimming back.” Potahu laughed heartily.

            “I’ll consider that a challenge, sister!” he said with a playful pat on the shoulder.

            Macku scampered over to Pohatu and Gali, a look of panic on her face. “Toa Pohatu, did you see Hewkii? Is he okay?”

            Toa Pohatu smiled gently, “Don’t worry, little one. He’s recovered now.”

            Macku bounced on her heels, smiling widely. “Thank you, Toa Pohatu, Toa Gali!”

            “Now that we’re all here,” Tahu cut in, “It’s time we got a move on.”

            As the Toa turned to ascend the stairs of Kini Nui, Gali lingered behind to give a smile and nod to Takua. She joined her brothers soon after. Takua watched as the six Toa gathered around the suva. He could see each Toa place their hand over their respective elemental symbols, the same slots where he had placed the stones that summoned them to the island.

            And one by one the Toa fell.

            With a gasp, Takua rushed towards the temple. He reached the suva in a matter of seconds, but with a start realized that whatever the Toa fell through was sealed up again. The temple looked as if it had been untouched. Dread and anticipation swirled inside him. He felt a hand grasp his arm and pull him gently away from the suva.

            “Takua, we need to be ready,” Macku said firmly, coaxing him back towards the gathered matoran army he’d assembled. He followed but kept glancing back at Kini Nui. The Toa didn’t reappear. He sighed but turned to face his fellow matoran. All of them seemed to be looking at him expectantly. Did they want him to say something? Rile them up for the battle ahead? He felt a twinge of self-consciousness. He drew in a long breath and coughed to clear his throat.

            “Thank you all for gathering here!” He started. The crowd was intent on his every word. “As we speak the Toa are descending into the depths to face the elusive Makuta. We don’t know what lies in store for them, but it’s our duty to protect Kini-Nui in the meantime. Tamaru will be on standby with the flares, and Taipu will signal the Ussal force when the time is right. Everyone else, arm yourselves!” The crowd all nodded in agreement. In that moment, Takua surveyed them all and felt a swell of pride. Here were all kinds of matoran from all over Mata Nui, perfectly implementing the first virtue of unity. He could have sworn the sun had begun to shine a bit brighter. He felt his voice rising with excitement. “My friends, from this day forth, you will be known as the Chronicler’s Company!” There were some cheers and whoops from the crowd. “On this day, we will make our first stand against Makuta. On this day, we will stare his darkness in the face and say, you cannot break us!” He hefted his disc launcher above his head. “We and the Toa will prevail!” The crowd cheered, and the sound filled Takua. He could feel a smile on his face.

            Without needing any direction, the crowd dispersed and every matoran in the Company took their positions. Matoran hid in trees, crouched in the tall grass surrounding Kini-Nui. A gentle breeze rippled through the clearing, the calm before the storm of battle. Takua was side by side with Macku, both readying their disc launchers for firing. She nudged him with her elbow.

            “Can’t wait to tell Hahli about this when I get home. She really wanted to come,” the Ga-Matoran was bouncing excitedly on her heels.

            “I’ll be sure to invite her next time,” Takua said.

            Then the tell-tale buzzing started. It seemed to fill the air itself with a charge, like the tingling before the lightning strike. A thick swarm of angry nui-rama blotted out the midday sun, heading towards the six spires of the Kini Nui temple.

            “Aim!” Kapura called out, and all the Chronicler’s Company readied their disc launchers in unison. They waited as the cloud of massive insects thickened further. Takua aimed his launcher at one of the larger nui-rama circling closest to Kini Nui.

            “FIRE!” At Kapura’s command, the disc flew, and nui-rama were knocked out of the sky. The insects that escaped harm began turning their attention away from the temple and towards the army of matoran on the ground. They buzzed erratically, their red eyes burning. More discs flew, and more insects dropped. But it wasn’t enough, the swarm was growing thicker by the second. 

            Takua took aim at a new target: a modestly tall wooden tower with a panel at the top painted like a target. He fired a disc, and it hit the panel, which rang with a piercing metallic sound that cut through the droning of nui-rama. At the signal, Tamaru lit up a row of flares which quickly blasted dozens of feet into the air and exploded.

            Kongu and his Gukko Force burst from the treetops and cut through the nui ramas’ ranks, scattering them in all directions. The gukko birds bit and snapped and clawed at the insects while the Le-matoran fired more discs. Takua turned his attention to the ground, where he could see tarakava and nui-jaga alike emerging from the jungle undergrowth. He aimed his launcher at a second tower. The panel was struck, and the signal alerted Taipu, who quickly activated a contraption that dropped a large boulder from a pulley, which struck the ground with such force the entire clearing shook.

            From large dirt holes on the outer edges of the clearing, Onu-Matoran mounted on Ussal crabs clamored to the surface and cut off the advances of the rahi on the ground. The sturdy Ussal crabs snapped their claws at the nui-jaga and tarakava while their riders jabbed at the rahi with long spears. 

            “SQUAD TWO, FOCUS ON THE GROUND!” Kapura called out. Half the matoran using disc launchers switched from firing at the nui-rama in the air to the nui-jaga and tarakava. Takua ducked under the swipe of a nui-jaga that had gotten too close. He backed up a few paces and fired at the rahi. The disc clipped its flank but didn’t deter the scorpion creature’s advance. He spun and ran in the other direction. He passed Macku who was facing another nui-jaga; she’d given up on her disc launcher and switched to a Ga-Koro guard spear, much better for close combat. Inspired, Takua took out his own Ta-Koro guard staff and swung it backwards at his pursuer. The nui-jaga shrieked as the tip of his spear sliced a gash in its forearm. Its red eyes blazed and its segmented legs skittered faster in Takua’s direction.

            Takua quickly side-stepped to avoid the nui-jaga’s claws. His foot caught on a rock, and he tripped and landed on his side. Another claw came down towards him, and before he could react, a shadow passed over him. A large Ussal crab without a rider leapt over him and slammed itself into the nui-jaga. The two creatures clashed, snapping at each other. The nui-jaga’s stinger flicked downwards, and the Ussal scuttled away from it just in time. Takua jumped to his feet, whipped out his disc launcher again, and took swift aim at the nui-jaga’s stinger. Just as it was about to come down on the Ussal again, Takua launched a disc, and it severed the stinger from the tail. The nui-jaga shrieked in agony.

            As if taking advantage of its opponent’s pain, the Ussal swung one of its claws and knocked the scorpion aside. The nui-jaga scrambled away and was lost in the cacophony of the battle. The Ussal turned at looked at Takua with bright beady eyes. Takua cracked a smile and ran up to the creature, jumping up onto its hard-shelled back. Once mounted, Takua began firing his disc launcher while the Ussal battered and snapped incoming rahi with its large claws.

            Suddenly in the midst of the battle, the edges of Takua’s vision began to darken. He blinked, confused. He wasn’t tired out yet, in fact he felt like he could run a mile. But when he tried aiming his launcher again, he couldn’t focus his eyes at all. Was he going blind? Why was he going blind? What was happening—?

            All around him was dark. Only a faint orange glow ahead allowed him to make out the earthen tunnel walls around him. Takua blinked as the scene came into focus. Straight ahead the six Toa traversed the tunnel, weapons held at the ready. Tahu’s fire sword was what provided the group with light. Was this a dream?

            He drifted behind the Toa as they came upon a circular chamber filled with rows of thick cylindrical stone towers. In between the towers were large smooth domes. There was a clear path that cut through the center of it all to the other side of the chamber. Kopaka lingered behind the group, scanning the area with his bionic eye.

            “Stop,” the Toa of Ice said. His cold voice sliced through the silence and halted the other Toa’s advances.

            “What is it?” Pohatu asked. Kopaka continued his scan.

            “Is there a problem?” Tahu demanded. Kopaka fixed his bionic eye on the Toa of Fire.

            “These domes—,” he started, but Tahu cut him off.

            “We’re not here for sightseeing. Let’s keep moving.”

            “Kopaka’s right,” Onua cut in. He was kneeling on the floor, a hand pressed down on the earth. “Something is stirring.”

            “What is? I don’t see anything.” Lewa said with a nervous edge, his fingers grazing the handle of his axe.

            There was one click, then a second, and soon the whole chamber was filled with the din of clicking. On each dome a pair of glowing white circles opened. Then one by one, each dome unfolded itself, revealing a set of snapping mandibles and two large claws. Each rose up on three pairs of segmented legs. They each clicked and whirred, and turned to face the six Toa.

            “What are th—,” Gali asked, brandishing her hooks.

            “—Just the first of Makuta’s challenges! Let’s go!” Tahu rushed forward, his blade fully ignited.

            “Tahu, wait!” Gali cried, but he had already taken the first swing at one of the strange mechanical creatures. Tahu’s sword bounced off the creature’s shell without leaving a scratch. His flames didn’t seem to affect it either. One swipe of its claw, and the Toa of Fire was flying across the room. His back hit one of the stone towers and he sank to the floor.

            “Idiot,” Kopaka hissed. He unsheathed his sword and planted his feet as three of the crablike machines surrounded him. The Toa of Ice swung his blade, carrying a blast of arctic frost with it. The frost coated the creatures for about a second before they shook it off like powdered snow. Kopaka created an ice slide for himself and skated away before the creatures could strike him.

            Tahu recovered and sprang to his feet. He swung his sword wildly, throwing tongues of flame in its wake. The creatures were barely affected. Meanwhile, Pohatu was kicking chunks of broken stone that harmlessly bounced off the shells of the creatures. Onua was tossing them about with slabs of earth, but the creatures righted themselves in seconds and continued their advance. Gali was blocking blows from the creatures with her hooks. Lewa was using blasts of air to leap over the creatures, and each time he hit one with his axe it bounced off harmlessly.

            One of Tahu’s fire blasts flew past Gali’s head.

            “Tahu, be careful!” she shouted over the din of clicking mechanical mandibles. Another blaze came straight for her face, and she released a jet spray of water from her hooks to extinguish it. Her water jet hit Lewa who spun in the air and tumbled across the floor.

            “Hey, what’s the deal, water-sister?!” Lewa cried, scrambling to his feet. He glared at her, dripping wet.

            “Sorry, Lewa,” Gali said.

            “This is getting us nowhere!” Onua called from a few feet away. In silent agreement, the Toa regrouped in the center of the chamber, while the mechanical creatures surrounded them, almost as if they were waiting. The Toa formed a circle, each of them pointing their weapons outwards.

            “Does anyone have any ideas?” Pohatu said.

            “Less fireworks would help,” Kopaka sneered at Tahu.

            “I didn’t see you do any better!” Tahu shot back.

            “At least none of his ice hit any of us,” Lewa said with a sulking tone.

            “I said I was sorry!” Gali snapped, then took a deep breath to calm herself. “Look, brothers. Clearly, none of us alone is enough to fight these things. But if we work together, become one…”

            “Literally?” Pohatu said.

            “No, obviously she meant it figuratively,” said Kopaka.

            “Actually, Pohatu’s right,” Gali interjected, “Turaga Nokama told me about this technique Toa can use to merge together. We can literally become one. It’s called a kaita form.”

            “Is this really the best time to think-try this technique? What about all the click-snappers?” Lewa glanced nervously around the chamber, where the creatures still sat waiting.

            Onua stepped forward, raised his fists, and slammed them into the earthen floor, erecting walls of earth from the floor to the ceiling around the six of them. All the creatures were blocked from view.

            Gali nodded to the Toa of Earth, who nodded back. From there, she directed Tahu, Pohatu, and Onua to stand in a circle together. Then she had Lewa and Kopaka stand by her.

            “Now join hands.” Gali said. “Close your eyes. And merge.”

            A moment passed. The other Toa did as she said. As each closed their eyes, their forms began to shift and fade. The earthen pocket Onua had created for them cracked and leaked blinding white light. The creatures outside waited.

            The cracks multiplied and more pure white light flooded through. The walls blasted apart, and from the debris emerged two armored giants.

            Takua’s vision returned. He blinked and the battle at Kini Nui reformed in front of him. The buzzing and snapping and shrieking and yelling filled his ears once more. Matoran fired discs and swung spears. Rahi charged and clawed at them. Ussals clicked their claws and gukkos flapped their massive wings. Takua regained the awareness that he was still mounted on the Ussal and repositioned himself. He hefted his disc launcher onto his shoulder.

            With each passing minute, worry grew in his mind. Takua could see that the rahi’s numbers were increasing despite the Chronicler’s Company’s best efforts. He ducked under a nui-jaga’s stinger as it whistled towards him. Nearby Taipu was stuck on top of a large boulder while a group of nui-jaga surrounded him. He waved a spear in their faces, but the rahi were not deterred. Takua managed to hit a few of them with discs, relieving the Onu-Matoran ever so slightly. Kapura and a group of Ta-Matoran guards were forcing back a couple of tarakava with Macku’s help. Tamaru was being chased by a low-flying nui-rama. Before Takua could aim at it, he was knocked off his Ussal mount. He tumbled head over heels and his back hit a tree, knocking a bit of wind out of him. Another tarakava slithered towards him, flicking its long tongue. It reared up on its haunches, readying its front limbs for an attack.

            He didn’t have time to make it to his feet. The first blow was already approaching. Takua closed his eyes and braced himself for impact. But he heard the sound of two solid objects colliding. His eyes snapped open and he saw that the Ussal had blocked the tarakava’s blow with its own claw. The two rahi sparred for a moment, but the tarakava landed a solid blow on the Ussal’s side, and it tumbled sideways. Takua managed to get his hands on his disc launcher and fired four discs at the giant reptile. Two hit its chest, one missed, and one struck it between the eyes. The creature stumbled away.

            Takua ran up to the Ussal, examining its shell for damage. The creature chittered woozily at him, its shiny black eyes staring into his own. He felt a rush of affection for it, this brave crab that saved his life more than once already. He gently petted its shell.

            The tender moment dissipated as a thick swarm of nui-rama descended on him and his Ussal companion. Takua ducked under the snapping claws, and with a push, helped the Ussal back onto its feet. He mounted the creature and steered it towards the trees, hoping to lose their pursuers.

            As the Ussal ran, his vision began darkening again.

            The two Toa Kaitas stood back-to-back. Each one looked like the perfect blend of the three united Toa that made up their forms. The first was slender, tan-skinned, with long brown hair streaked with white. They had blue-green eyes, one of which had a mechanical pupil that expanded and contracted as it took in information. They wore a thoughtful expression as they observed their surroundings. They carried a long bladed spear that ended in a hook. The second kaita was muscular, also tan-skinned, and had wavy dark hair from which a few braids had been tied. He carried a double-bladed sword with long sharp claws extending from the hilt. His mossy brown eyes had a burning ring of orange around the pupils. He was poised for an attack, his smile brimming with excitement.

            The two giants were surrounded by countless pairs of unblinking glowing white eyes. The muscular giant stepped forward and swung his sword over his head. The mechanical creature in front of him activated, and it sprung surprisingly high from the ground straight for his face. The giant brought down his sword, denting the top of the creature’s hard metal shell, and spiking it to the floor. Soon the other creatures began to stir.

            “It seems you’ve provoked them,” the slender giant said, their tone disapproving.

            “Come, Wairuha,” the muscular giant said with a grin, “Now things will get interesting.” He readied his sword as more of the mechanical creatures began launching themselves into the air.

            Wairuha smiled at their brother’s enthusiasm as he cut down two more creatures. “Akamai,” they said with a chuckle, “Things are always interesting when you’re around.” They raised their spear. Their eyes scanned the creatures. As one leapt in their face, Wairuha could see delicate mechanisms on the underside. They thrust their spear upwards, piercing through the cogs and gears. Bolts and springs broke off, and sparks flew. The creature crashed to the floor and jittered and smoked.

            “Akamai! Aim for the underside!”

            The muscular kaita heeded his brother’s words. When another creature leapt towards him, he swung in an upward arc above his head, slicing the underside. The creature crashed to the floor in a smoking ruined heap.

            The two kaita continued their strategy, destroying the creatures one by one. But as more and more creatures activated and launched themselves at the giants, the harder the fight became. Even some of the damaged ones managed to throw off electric charges from their cracked sparking shells. Akamai’s sword connected with one, and the shock travelled up his arm and paralyzed him for a crucial moment, which allowed another creature to leap on him and slash his face with its metal claws.

            As Akamai stumbled, Wairuha leapt to his aid. Their spear cut through three creatures at once, but they too were shocked by the electric discharges. They dropped their spear and it clattered noisily on the floor. More creatures flew through the air, and soon the giants found themselves bombarded from all sides. Both of them were slashed and cut in every gap in their armor. Blood dripped onto the earthen floor.

            Akamai adjusted the grip on his sword and swung upward. One of the mechanical creatures was caught on the broad side of his blade and flew across the room behind him. The creature crashed into one of the stone towers, which broke open and threw sparks to the ceiling. Wairuha’s bionic eye caught one of the creatures shutting down immediately after the tower was destroyed. They dove and grabbed their spear under the onslaught of flying mechanical crabs. They skidded across the floor and slashed another nearby tower open. It sparked and smoked, and at the same moment one of the crabs advancing on Akamai shut down.

            The two kaita met each other’s eyes, and both gave each other knowing smiles. The two dove and dodged the remaining creatures while they focused their energies on breaking every tower in the chamber. Soon the glowing eyes of their opponents fizzled out, and the clicking of their mandibles ceased. The giants stood for a moment, their breathing the only sound remaining in the chamber. Wairuha lowered their spear.

            “Our path is cleared,” they said. Akamai nodded in acknowledgment, and he rested the blade of his sword on his shoulder.

            “Now that was fun,” he said with a grin. The two of them followed the path to the other side of the chamber, wading through piles of broken machinery. The door on the other side was large enough for the giants to walk through easily.

            As soon as they crossed the threshold, Akamai stopped in his tracks and Wairuha fell to their knees. Each kaita clutched the sides of their heads.

            “What’s…happening?!” Akamai cried.

            “I…don’t…” Wairuha groaned in agony. Their bodies began to glow white, and after a bright flash, the six Toa appeared on the floor where the two giants had been. Dazed, each of them rose to their feet.

            “That was something else,” Pohatu chuckled.

            “Why the swift-split? What did we do wrong?” Lewa said. Gali and Kopaka scanned the area. They were in a smaller chamber than the first, lit by sparse lightstones jutting from the jagged rock walls. Stalactites hung from the ceiling. From an opening on the other side of the chamber, a thick black fog filtered into the room.

            “It wasn’t us,” Kopaka said simply.

            “It looks like Akamai and Wairuha can’t exist here. We must be getting close to Makuta,” Gali theorized.

            “Great, let’s keep going,” Tahu gripped his sword and crossed the chamber. He stopped short. From the thick fog, six tall figures coalesced. They ghosted towards the six Toa, their feet making no sound on the rock floor. The one taking the lead stopped right in front of Tahu, its features solidified into a perfect mirror image of the Toa of Fire.

            One by one, the other five shadows took the form of the other Toa as well. The Toa stared into the dark eyes of their shadow-doubles. Tahu ignited his blade and thrust it towards his double, who deftly twisted away, and then pulled its own flaming sword from seemingly nowhere.

            Gali barely managed to cross her hooks in front of her chest as her own double swung down on her. Kopaka and his double circled each other. Lewa backflipped away from his double’s axe. Pohatu was already locked in a hand-to-hand duel with his double, neither one gaining the upper hand. Onua’s digging claws were locked with his double’s, and each of them strained against the other’s strength.

            Chaos broke out inside the chamber. Gali was slinging blades of water at her double, who flipped and dodged with ease. The double began firing water of its own, catching Gali by surprise. She was struck in the torso and tossed backward. With a frustrated grunt, she leaped to her feet and continued her onslaught. Kopaka froze the ground under his shadow double’s feet, but the double glided over it as easily as he did. Kopaka pointed his sword, and flash froze his double solid. Within seconds, his double broke through and shook off the ice like it was nothing.

            Lewa’s double was tossing whirlwinds at him, and he dove and spun and jumped up and off the walls, countering with his own whirlwinds whenever he could. Pohatu tossed boulders at his double, but his double sprinted past each one at the same supersonic speed as the real Toa of Stone. It kicked a stray boulder towards Pohatu, who slipped to the side just in time. Tahu and his double were clashing their flaming swords together. Tahu began absorbing his double’s fire through his own sword until his body began to glow with heat. He released a powerful blast, engulfing his double. But his double did the same thing, absorbing the flames and releasing them in a concentrated blast.

            Onua panted, surveying the fighting all around him. He was broken out of his thoughts when his shadow-double threw him off-balance by breaking up the earth under his feet. Onua righted himself, and thrust his hands into the wall, sending shockwaves up to the ceiling. Slabs of earth and rock crumbled and buried his shadow-double for a brief moment before the double simply punched its way out of the rubble.

            Gali spun away from another water jet fired by her double. She stopped for a moment to catch her breath. Her shadow-double crossed its hooks in front of itself, waiting for her next strike. Before Gali could make her next move, a stray boulder from Pohatu struck Gali’s double in the side of the head. Gali’s double toppled to the floor, and its form fizzled out into a wisp of black smoke. Pohatu stopped his own fight with his shadow double as his eye caught what just happened.

            The Toa of Stone and Toa of Water smiled and nodded to one another. Gali rushed towards Pohatu’s double, bombarding it with jets of water. The double staggered and tumbled with each strike, until its form broke apart and eroded. Soon it was nothing but a wisp of smoke.

            Onua saw what happened from across the chamber and glanced about for Lewa’s shadow double. He found the double in pursuit of the real Lewa, who was still fruitlessly tossing whirlwinds at it. He watched the double’s movements, predicting where it would go next. At just the right moment, Onua gathered his energies in his hands, and sent shockwaves through the air and up to the ceiling right above the double. A slab of earth broke off the ceiling and fell, taking Lewa’s double with it. It slammed to the floor under a pile of earth. From the debris, its shadow form dissipated.

            “Lewa, over here!” Onua called up to the Toa of Air. He gestured to his own shadow-double, who was preparing to strike the floor with its digging claws. Lewa grinned, and front-flipped, tossing a blade of air downwards in the double’s direction. It crumpled under the force of Lewa’s wind, but rose to its feet again. Still airborne, Lewa spun his long-handled axe and sent a large vortex towards the double, which got caught in the gale-force winds and was tossed across the chamber. It hit the wall and slid to the floor as its form dissolved away. Lewa landed lightly on his feet by Onua’s side, and the two exchanged a fist-bump.

            Kopaka hadn’t seen any of this happen, but as he waited for his shadow double to make a move, he saw Tahu’s double sending a large fireball in Tahu’s direction. The Toa of Fire dodge-rolled out of the way and the fireball quickly approached Kopaka’s double from behind. The double seemed to sense the heat because it black flipped just before it struck. Kopaka coated the ground under his feet in ice and glided over to Tahu, whose breathing was ragged. The Toa of Fire staggered to his feet, then caught sight of Kopaka’s approach.

            “You take mine, I’ll take yours,” Kopaka said, gliding past Tahu and readying his sword to strike at Tahu’s double.

            Tahu understood immediately and sprinted after Kopaka’s double as it attempted to skate away from him. Kopaka froze the ground under Tahu’s double’s feet, and it slipped and stumbled. Then Kopaka blasted it with ice, coating it head to toe in a fraction of a second. He sliced his sword through the ice coating, and the whole thing shattered to pieces. Tahu’s double fizzled out. Meanwhile Tahu caught up to Kopaka’s double, clashing his sword with the double’s. Tahu’s body glowed with heat, surrounding and suffocating Kopaka’s double. As the double began slowing down, Tahu stabbed his sword into the floor and melted the earth under its feet into molten lava. Kopaka’s double sank into it and melted into nothing.

            The Toa gathered, all panting, but all in high spirits. Pohatu laughed, resting an arm around Onua’s shoulders. Lewa back flipped and landed in a perfect handstand. Kopaka said nothing as Pohatu slapped him roughly on the back. Gali nodded to Tahu, who nodded in turn. The celebration ended, and the six of them faced the door on the other side of the chamber.

            “This is it,” Gali said quietly, “I can feel it.”

            Takua jerked out of the vision, back to the battlefield. Still reeling from what he saw, he barely realized that his Ussal mount was running for its life, weaving through the swarms of rahi and clusters of desperate fighting matoran. He could see some of the injured being hauled away from the fighting by other matoran while the rahi snarled and snapped at them. Takua reached for his disc launcher, only to find it was no longer attached to his back. In a panic, he looked around but couldn’t see it anywhere on the ground. He sighed. He must have dropped it while in his trance.

            He did manage to grab a spear that was buried in the shell of a nearby nui-jaga. It screeched in pain as he wrenched it out. As Takua’s Ussal scrambled over the fallen rahi that littered the area, Takua swung and jabbed his spear at anything that came too close. As he fought, he wondered why the visions stopped. Where were the Toa now? Were they face to face with Makuta at this moment? He felt himself torn between continuing the fight with his fellow matoran and witnessing the Toa’s battle.

            A faint voice touched the back of his mind.

            Find us.

            Takua glanced behind him.

            Chronicler…find us…

            Was he really going mad, or was that Toa Gali’s voice? Find us… He steeled himself and grabbed the outer edges of his Ussal’s shell. He steered it towards the nearest matoran, which happened to be Tamaru.

            “Tamaru!” He called over the chaos of battle. The Le-Matoran looked up at him.

            “Chronicler!” Tamaru replied, his voice coming out as a tired gasp.

            “I need to get underground. I have to find the Toa!”

            “What’s bad-wrong?”

            “I can’t explain now, but I need cover! Do you have any extra flares?”

            Tamaru nodded.

            “Great, I’ll head towards the temple, and you keep the rahi from following!”

            Tamaru nodded again, and Takua tapped the Ussal’s shell, steering it towards Kini Nui. The explosions of Tamaru’s flares followed. Encouraged, he coaxed the Ussal to run faster and soon he was right in front of the suva. 

            He scrambled around the outside of it, pressing on the elemental symbols, feeling in every nook and cranny, but nothing activated and no doors opened. He let out a grunt of frustration, and mounted the Ussal. They sprinted back to Tamaru’s side.

            “No good,” he told the Le-Matoran, “I can’t go in the way they went.”

            Tamaru thought for a moment. “Well, then, what about the Onu-Koro hard-dome? Taipu said it might have a Makuta-purpose.”

            “It’s worth a try,” Takua said, tapping the Ussal’s shell, “I’m heading there now. Good luck!”

            “You too!” Tamaru smiled, then turned his attention back to the battle, disc launcher in hand. Takua led the Ussal into the jungle, straight towards the mouth of the Le-Koro Highway. Takua realized just how fast the Ussal was as the light of day vanished within minutes and the darkness of the Onu-Koro caves enveloped them. Why didn’t I get an Ussal sooner? He thought.

            Next thing he knew, he was in front of the large smooth dome outside the entrance to Onu-Koro. No miners were around. Takua jumped the railing and approached the dome. He circled it, wondering what to do next. Suddenly, his foot sank a couple of inches. He glanced down to see a small square panel under his boot. There was a sound of the grinding of stone against stone, and the dome split apart into six triangular panels that retreated and revealed a staircase winding deeper into the earth. Takua grabbed a stray lightstone from the floor. Before he could step onto the first stair, the Ussal chittered. He turned to look at it.

            The large crab chittered again, snapping its claws in an agitated manner. Takua smiled.

            “You worried?” he asked. The Ussal made a clicking sound with its mandibles. Takua pet its shell, and it closed its eyes. “I’ll be fine. You wait here, okay?” He stepped towards the stairs. The Ussal took a step towards him. Takua held up a hand. “No. Stay. I’ll be back.” The Ussal trilled and folded its claws and legs into its body and sat still. Takua began his descent.

Chapter Text

            The deeper into the earth he went, the more Takua could feel the darkness pressing on him from all sides. With growing fear he realized that the yellow glow of his lightstone was fading with each step down the stairs he took. The temperature had dropped as well. It was as if he were descending into a cold dark dead sea. The silence was so prevalent that he could hear his own heart beating.

            The steps ended. Takua shone his dim lightstone all around him. He was in a large tunnel through which cold black waves of darkness seemed to flow past and around his light like a deathly silent river of smoke. A shiver shook his body, but he pressed on. Takua couldn’t tell how long he had been walking. He occupied his mind with thoughts of the battle on the surface around Kini-nui, of the battle the Toa were fighting somewhere at the end of this flowing stream of darkness.

            Find us…

            Toa Gali’s words echoed in his mind. They carried his feet forward despite the dread coating his insides like ice.

            The tunnel twisted and turned. His lightstone thankfully kept the dark stream at bay. Soon Takua found himself entering a large round chamber held up by earthen pillars. Here his dread was at its strongest, and he could see the source of it: a large winding pillar made of a swirling vortex of pure shadow. Ribbons of darkness flowed off it around the chamber, eventually exiting into the tunnel from which Takua had just come.

            A spark of relief broke him out of his thoughts when Takua made out the silhouettes of the six Toa surrounding the shadow pillar in the center of the chamber. Tahu stepped forward, his sword ignited.

            The Toa of Fire’s steps faltered when a small globular figure emerged from the pillar. Its form coalesced into that of a matoran villager, but one made of pure shadow. It opened a pair of glowing red eyes.

            “I’ve been waiting for you,” the matoran said with an unnaturally cold and deep voice.

            The Toa all stood frozen, hands gripping weapons, muscles tensed.

            “You…you can’t be…” Tahu’s whisper echoed through the chamber.

            The matoran laughed. “I am what you have sworn to protect.”

            “This is a trick,” Kopaka said, readying his sword for a strike.

            “And what will you do, destroy me?” the matoran’s voice took a mocking tone, “You can’t. Not any more than you could destroy the sea, or the wind. Or the void.”

            Kopaka’s sword lowered. Gali stepped forward, her head held high.

            “The sea bears life. The sea bore us.”

            The matoran smiled a cold empty smile. “I bore you. For I am nothing. From nothing you came. And it’s into nothing you will go.”

            The six Toa silently stationed themselves around the matoran and settled into fighting stances. Takua held his breath, thanking Mata Nui he wasn’t in their place. He felt himself trembling like a leaf in a windstorm.

            “I stand side by side with Mata Nui. I am his brother. The people of this world are builders. But look into their hearts, and you’ll find they also have the power to destroy. I am that power.”

            “But, you’re a matoran!” Tahu said with disbelief.

            The matoran’s cold smile broke into a wide grin and its eyes blazed brighter, bathing the chamber in crimson light. Its form split open and thick ribbons of shadow shot in all directions. Chaos ruled the chamber as all six Toa ducked and dove for cover from the attack. Kopaka immediately spread a sheet of ice under his feet and skated around the shadowy tendrils for a few hopeful moments before they wrapped him into a dark cocoon. Pohatu sprinted full speed around the chamber and even up the walls but the tendrils caught him too. Onua had put up thick earthen walls around himself, but the darkness pierced through and devoured him. While Lewa tried fruitlessly to blow away the tendrils with gale-force winds, Gali and Tahu both tried slicing through the shadows with their weapons, to no avail. They were all smothered.

            Takua stopped himself from crying out. He didn’t want Makuta to find him too. So, he watched and waited with bated breath as the shadows swirled about the chamber and cold laughter echoed off the earthen walls.

            A bright orange light suddenly burst through it all, carrying the smell of smoke. Tahu shook off the tendrils of darkness, swinging his flaming sword in a circle above his head. A funnel of fire swirled above him and lit up the chamber almost as brightly as daylight. The other five Toa broke free from their dark imprisonment, and each prepared a sample of their own elements.

            The form of the shadowy matoran appeared in the air above them, laughing as more dark tendrils burst from its body and bore down on the Toa. Gali blasted the matoran with water, knocking him further away from them. The shadowy matoran recovered and hovered closer once again. Kopaka flash froze it inside a thick column of ice. As it began to wriggle, and cracks began forming on the ice’s surface, Tahu trapped in inside a fiery vortex, fueled by winds from Lewa’s axe. Onua gathered shockwave energy in his hands and punched the earthen floor, sending cracks up the walls and covering the ceiling. As rocks came loose, Potahu harnessed control of them and send them hurtling towards the shadow matoran. As soon as all the elements made contact with each other, a new substance began to form.

            It was translucent like ice but had a silvery sheen. It coated the shadow matoran from head to toe, effectively freezing it in place. Soon a jagged glassy pillar stood in the center of the chamber, the Toa’s opponent trapped inside. All six of them relaxed and dropped their weapons.

            Pohatu breathed a loud sigh of relief. “That wasn’t nearly as hard as those crab things from earlier,” he said. Onua rested a hand on his shoulder.

            “So, that’s what the combination of all our powers makes,” the Toa of Earth mused.

            “Then…we did it? We won the shadow-battle?” Lewa bounced on his heels.

            From inside the silver pillar the form of the shadow matoran dissolved. The flowing darkness seemed to retreat from the chamber into an unseen exit. The Toa gasped in unison.

            You cannot destroy me, A cold voice reverberated, For I am Nothing.

            Takua shivered. He was about to reveal himself to the Toa when suddenly a blinding white light surrounded the six of them. The next moment it was gone, and the six Toa with it. Takua stood alone in perfect darkness. All he could hear was his own panicked breathing.

            He fumbled for his lightstone inside his bag. It shone a bit brighter now, and it flooded Takua with a brief moment of comfort. That comfort evaporated when he realized the tunnel entrance he had come through was closed up. Sighing, he began making his way around the circular chamber, trying to find any cracks or crevices, anything he could squeeze through to get out. 

            The sound of grinding stone made him nearly jump out of his skin. On the far side of the chamber from where he stood, Takua could see a large circular door had opened. A faint green light emanated from it. He could see well enough, so he stashed his lightstone back into his travel bag and walked into the green light.

            He soon came face to face with an immense wall covered in spherical green pods. There were too many to count, covering the wall from floor to ceiling. Takua pushed down the sense of foreboding growing in the back of his mind and strode towards one of the pods.

            It was slick and shiny, and smelled like a heavy revolting combination of dead plant matter and sulfur. Takua coughed and pinched his nose closed. He peered into the pod in front of him, seeing through its translucent skin that there was something inside it. It was curled into a tight ball. And it seemed to be breathing.

            Takua blinked, readjusting his eyes. He could make out a smooth shell, a pair of pincer-like claws…

            Then its eyes opened.

            Takua’s brain went into full flight mode. He sprinted away from the wall, further into the sickly green chamber, hoping to find an exit to the surface. Behind him he could hear a crunching sound, the clicking of mandibles, and a soft and chilling hiss. He glanced behind him as he ran. One of the pods burst open with another loud crunch. A creature tumbled out and unfolded itself from its ball-like shape. Takua faced forward again, pumping his legs harder than ever before. His breathing came out in shorter and louder gasps as more and more pods burst open behind him, and the trilling and hissing of the horrible insectoid creatures filled his ears.

            Up ahead Takua could see a small opening in the wall on the other side of the chamber. With the newly hatched terrors hot on his trail, Takua sprinted and dove through the opening. Before he could catch his breath, the floor beneath him rose, picking up speed each second that went by. Takua was pinned to his knees due to the force.

            With a lungful of ocean air and a burst of orange sunlight, Takua realized he’d been launched to the surface, and he landed face-first onto sand. He scrambled to his feet, glancing back at the cave entrance he’d been spat out of. He huffed loudly, finally catching his breath. He rubbed the sand out of his hair and off the front of his clothes, exhaustion suddenly weighing him down. He trudged towards the sound of waves.

            Through slightly blurred vision, he could make out the orange and blue smudges that made up the sunset on the distant horizon. It glittered on the surface of the ocean. And silhouetted against the landscape was Turaga Vakama, standing just a few inches shy of the breaking waves on the sandy shore. The elder stared out into the distance, staff in one hand, the other hand behind his back. As Takua approached him, he could make out the serenity on the Turaga’s face.

            The two stood side by side for a long moment.

            “You surprised everyone today, Chronicler.”

            Takua looked up at the elder.

            “I had feared your courage brought you to your final adventure. But it seems you have many more in the future.”

            Takua looked away, struck with the fresh memories of the shadowy matoran, and worse, the horrible creatures hatching deep underground. A cool ocean breeze blew through him, and it carried a bit of the unnatural chill he began to recognize as Makuta’s power. He could feel his hands shaking.

            “Are you alright?” the elder said. Takua could feel his warm yellow eyes on him. “There’s no shame in being afraid. Great danger looms ahead.”

            Takua met his gaze. He found himself unable to ask any of the questions that churned in his mind. Turaga Vakama smiled.

            “I understand things haven’t been easy for you in Ta-Koro. The other matoran see your travels as a waste. Some might say you are irresponsible, too-easily distracted.” He placed a hand gently on Takua’s shoulder. “But for all you’ve done in the past weeks, you stand with the Toa among Mata Nui’s greatest heroes.”

            Takua could feel his face heating up. He reflected on all he’d done recently and felt himself beginning to swell. His fears from earlier were banished from his mind, and he could feel a smile widening on his face. Turaga Vakama patted his shoulder and turned his back to the beach, heading for the jungle further inland.

            A small explosion lit up the darkening sky. Takua looked up to see fireworks shooting up into the air and bursting into showers of colorful sparks.

            “Come, Takua,” Turaga Vakama beckoned, “Let’s join in the celebration of our first great victory!” Surprised and delighted by the elder’s use of his name, Takua trotted up to his side and the two of them entered the Le-Wahi jungle where the sounds of cheering and music permeated the fresh evening air.

            The village of Le-Koro was alight with lanterns and music. Le-Matoran played lively tunes on flutes and hanging xylophones and beat drums in complex patterns that made it impossible not to dance. A circle of every kind of matoran had formed around Turaga Matau, who was dancing the most enthusiastically. Takua clapped with amusement with the crowd, until he felt a solid punch on his arm.

            “Ow!” he cried, though the music drowned out his voice. He whirled to face Jaller, who was grinning at him. Takua grinned back, punching his friend back. He caught a glimpse of the six Toa joining in the festivities; Lewa and Gali performed acrobatics to the rhythm of the music while matoran cheered, Tahu lit a whole row of fireworks at once and released them into the sky, Pohatu joined the Le-Matoran on the drums, and Onua clapped cheerfully while Kopaka folded his arms and leaned against a tree, watching the celebration in silence.

            “There’s our fearless Chronicler!” Takua felt a hand clap on his back, and Macku’s face appeared next to him. Takua laughed and clapped a hand on her shoulder.

            “I don’t know about ‘fearless,’” he joked.

            Then Taipu ran up to the group, arm-in-arm with Kongu. Both matoran were laughing and sweating from all the dancing. “Hey, everyone!” the Onu-Matoran shouted, “Let’s give a cheer for the Chronicler!”

            The whole island erupted in shouts of approval. Takua rose to his full height and raised his arms. The noise quieted.

            “Thank you all!” he addressed the crowd, “But I’m not the only one you should be cheering for.” He pointed across the clearing, where Matoro stood next to Turaga Nuju. “Matoro saved my life when I was stranded on Mount Ihu in a blizzard!” He grabbed Kopeke’s hand and held it high. “Kopeke was the first to join my company! His level-headedness kept me on track!” One by one, Takua pointed to a member of the Chronciler’s Company.

            “And thank Hafu, Taipu, Tamaru, Macku, and Kapura! And Kongu, Captain of the Gukko Force, and Jaller, Captain of the Ta-Koro guard, and Onepu, Captain of the Ussalry! And all the brave matoran that fought to protect Kini-nui!”

            The crowd was abuzz with jovial noise. Takua waited for it to quiet.

            “But most of all, we should be thanking the Toa, for winning their first battle against Makuta’s darkness!” All the matoran of Mata Nui turned their attention to the six Toa, smothering them in a fresh wave of cheers. Takua could tell they were all pleased, even Kopaka. He then took the opportunity to tell the story of the Toa’s journey underground, their fusion into Wairuha and Akamai, and their fights with their shadow-doubles and with Makuta. Everyone listened with rapt attention. As he spoke, Takua felt more like the Chronicler than ever before.

            He finished his tale and after one last round of applause, the crowd dispersed. Everyone returned to their villages, including the Toa. Takua flopped onto his tiny cot in his small dwelling in Ta-Koro. He fell asleep within minutes.

Chapter Text

            “So, this is where you saw the creatures hatch?” Taipu pointed at a stone map of the tunnel systems under Mata Nui, carved into a flat stone table in the Onu-Koro mining headquarters. Takua nodded. Taipu stared at the map for a moment before scratching in a few new lines. “If we block the tunnels here and here,” he said, “We might be able to slow their advances."

            "But there might be other nests," Takua tapped his finger against the stone map, feeling antsy.

            "True, but until we find them all, this is all we can do.”

            Takua sighed, “You’re right,” he mustered a smile, “Keep it up, Taipu! I’ll be heading out now.”

            “Of course,” Taipu returned, “Be careful out there, Takua.”

            Takua nodded to him and left the mining headquarters. He walked past the Ussalry, where all the Ussal crabs were kept in pens. He could smell the fresh grass the Onu-Matoran provided for the large crustaceans to build comfortable nests. He watched the Ussals mill about in their pens for a moment. Then he heard one begin trilling loudly.

            Takua turned his head and saw one Ussal waving its pinchers about, chirping excitedly. Joy surged within him. It was the Ussal from the battle at Kini-nui! He ran up to the fence, petting its shell, laughing at the delighted clicking of its mandibles.

            “Told you I’d come back!” he said.

            “Look at that, you really brought her out of her slump!” Takua turned and saw Onepu, Captain of the Ussalry. The Onu-Matoran had paused loading a wheelbarrow with fresh grass for a nearby pen to observe the reunion. “She’s been rather depressed since the battle.”

            “Really?” Takua said, feeling pity as the creature nudged her head into his hand.

            “Would you like to keep her?”

            Takua could feel his eyes light up. “Yes! I—I’d love that!”

            Onepu nodded, “Then she’s yours.” The Onu-Matoran unlocked the gate to her pen, and the Ussal was atop Takua in a heartbeat, trilling and bouncing and nudging him with her head. Takua laughed, gently pushing her an arm’s length away.

            “Now what to call you…” Takua mused. “How about Pewku?”

            His new Ussal clicked her mandibles and snapped her pinchers as if in enthusiastic response. Takua laughed and climbed onto her hard-shelled back. As he left the Ussalry with his new pet, he heard Onepu call, “Take good care of the Chronicler, girl!”

            Takua led Pewku in the direction of the Le-Koro Highway. He figured he should check each village to ensure they were all prepared for what was to come. Not knowing what those creatures had in store for them worried him the most. He didn’t have much time to worry, since the tunnels began to shake. Pewku halted, her eyestalks scanning the area. She snapped her claws and began scuttling in the opposite direction, back towards Onu-Koro.

            A new sound accompanied the quake: a quiet rushing sound that grew closer with every second. Takua clung to Pewku’s shell as she scurried faster. Rocks broke from the ceiling and crashed to the floor. The rushing sound became a roar. In the next moment, Takua and Pewku were submerged in water.

            He released a flurry of air bubbles from his mouth as he tightened his grip on Pewku. As he struggled to stay on her shell, several large spherical shapes swam by his head. He nearly inhaled a lungful of water when he realized they were the creatures he’d seen hatch not long ago. Pewku seemed frozen for a moment, but with a little nudge, she trudged along the cave wall. Takua managed to elongate his neck and suck in a sliver of air from the tunnel ceiling before dipping back underwater.

            Pewku stopped again and began chipping away at the tunnel wall with her claws. Takua went up to the ceiling for a breath now and again while she worked. Though he was anxious, Takua remembered that Ussals had good navigational instincts, so he put trust in his pet to know where to take them for safety. Before he knew it, Pewku had broken through the tunnel wall, and the water rushed through the opening, carrying them both with it.

            All sense of up and down was lost as Takua was thrown with the deluge into complete darkness. His fingers lost all grip, and he was tossed away from Pewku. He felt his back hit a rock wall, he bumped his head, and he could feel his shoulder and arm get scraped. He hit open air, and the floor shortly afterwards. He coughed up a mouthful of water and sat back to catch his breath.

            “Pewku? Pewku?!” he cried, but only his own voice echoed back. He panted and blinked. He still couldn’t see a thing. He fumbled for his travel bag. It was soaked, no doubt his notes were ruined. But he was more concerned with finding a lightstone.

            A hand grasped his shoulder, and he jumped several feet in alarm.

            “Who’s there?” Takua croaked, doubling over in a coughing fit.

            A bright golden glow seared his eyelids, and glancing up he could see an Onu-matoran gripping a lightstone in his hand. He had pale skin, wild black hair, and a wide grin despite their situation. He had a wide variety of tools strapped to his belt.

            “Ah, you’re the Chronicler! I’ve heard your stories,” he said.

            “Oh, thanks, umm…”

            “Nuparu!”

            “Thanks, Nuparu,” Takua blinked to adjust his eyes to the sudden brightness.

            He heard loose rocks shifting behind him and saw the eyestalks then the broad shell of Pewku’s back emerge from a pile of earth.

            “Pewku!” Takua rushed forward and embraced his pet Ussal. Pewku chittered softly, sounding like she was dazed. He patted her shell. More rocks shifted, and two more matoran emerged from the piles of rubble. Taipu and Onepu, both wet and smudged with mud.

            “Oh, good,” Onepu sighed, “You’re all safe.”

            The whole tunnel shifted as if to prove Onepu wrong. The ceiling cracked and began to dip slightly. Without a word, Takua, Pewku, and Nuparu followed the other two into a small opening in the wall, moving as swiftly as they could in the enclosed space. Nuparu passed his lightstone up to Taipu, who was in the front.

            The four matoran and one Ussal passed into a wider tunnel, quickening their pace at every minor sound. Up ahead, Taipu yelped and stopped in his tracks. Onepu ran into his back, Nuparu ran into his, and Takua skidded to a stop before he hit Nuparu. 

            “Mata Nui, Taipu! What’s the—,” Onepu fell silent. Nuparu gasped, more out of awe than fear. By the yellow glow of the lightstone Takua could see the large insectoid creature, sinewy limbs spread wide, its shell fused into the earthen wall. It had a sleek domelike head and a sturdy body. Its exoskeleton reflected a shiny blue sheen.

            Nuparu pushed past his fellow Onu-matoran, reaching up his hand. Onepu grabbed his arm.

            “What are you doing?!”

            “No worries, captain,” Nuparu grinned, “It looks pretty dead to me.” Onepu gripped Nuparu’s arm for a moment longer before releasing him. Nuparu ran his hand over the exoskeleton, tugging at its limbs, and soon managed to pull open its headplate.

            “Oh, interesting!” Nuparu said.

            “What? What is it?” Takua scampered forward. Nuparu cracked a grin and gestured to the creature.

            “No brain! So, we don’t have to worry!”

            “Okay, but what about the ones that still have their brains?” Onepu frowned.

            “Never mind that, we should focus on getting back to the village,” Taipu said, readying his pickaxe.

            As Taipu and Onepu set to work digging them out, Takua watched as Nuparu examined every inch of the creature, used a knife to cut the limbs at the joints and slowly pull it apart piece by piece. Takua knelt next to a discarded claw. It had a smooth blue surface and felt as hard as metal. He ran a finger along the pincer. It was large enough to fit around a matoran’s head, and the edges were serrated. Not something anyone would want to get caught in.

            A wrench clattered across the floor, startling Takua out of his thoughts.

            “Sorry, could you hand that to me, please?” Nuparu said from inside the creature’s body. Takua placed the tool in Nuparu’s waiting hand. He watched as Nuparu built a metal frame from scraps that littered the floor and began welding pieces of the creature back onto it.

            “You two, let’s get a move on!” Onepu called from the tunnel he and Taipu had been working on.

            “Almost ready!” Nuparu welded the last piece in place and climbed into the creature’s hollowed-out body. He worked some cranks and soon the contraption stood up on two legs and brandished two long arms sporting the creature’s massive claws.

            “What in Mata Nui’s name…?” Taipu breathed as Nuparu’s invention lurched forward, its heavy metal limbs making loud clanking sounds. Onepu folded his arms and let out an amused grunt of approval.

            Nuparu worked a series of cranks and levers that drove his machine towards the spot Taipu and Onepu had been digging. He brought one of the mechanical arms back and swung it forward, punching a hole several feet deep in the earthen wall. Taipu and Onepu wasted no time clearing the rubble Nuparu’s machine knocked aside. Takua jumped to help after a few moments.

            Nuparu’s machine broke through one last layer of earth, and the four matoran found themselves in a natural cave. Stalactites hung from the ceiling above them. Not far away was a cluster of four insectoid creatures digging on the opposite wall. With each strike of their shiny blue claws, water leaked through the cracks. Before Takua, Taipu, or Onepu could make a move, Nuparu drove his machine towards the creatures.

            “Hey, you big ugly bugs!” the Onu-matoran engineer worked a crank, standing the machine up tall, brandishing its long arms and snapping its claws. The creatures stopped their work and turned to face him. “I made this out of one of your buddies!” Nuparu set the arms into a fighting stance. “I call it: Boxor!”

            The creatures hissed, poising themselves on their hind legs. Nuparu rushed forward, striking one creature and knocking it back into the wall. The other three creatures rolled into balls and leaped at him. As Nuparu batted them away, Taipu handed Takua his pickaxe. Before Takua could ask why, Taipu began lifting a boulder over his head. With a loud grunt, he tossed it at one of the creatures, who swiftly dodged it.

            That creature turned to Taipu and began rolling towards him. Taipu rushed to lift another boulder. Onepu was struck by another creature and tossed aside. Pewku trilled and began snapping at yet another. Takua clumsily swung Taipu’s pickaxe at the creature. The sharpened tip pierced the creature’s side but didn’t go deep enough. The creature shrugged it off, and threw the tool away, leaving Takua with empty hands. He swallowed hard and backed away as the creature hissed at him. But with a loud clank, Nuparu’s Boxor landed right in front of Takua and Pewku, facing the creature. The machine swiped the creature’s legs out from under itself. As the dazed creature tried rolling into a ball, the machine’s other arm came down on it, cracking its exoskeleton. The creature shrieked and convulsed, barely managing to flip itself back onto unsteady feet.

            As Nuparu fought the creature, Takua dove to retrieve Taipu’s pickaxe. Just as it was back in his hands, he felt a blow to his back that knocked him to the floor. He rolled just in time to see another creature standing over him, drawing its claws back to strike him. Then a rock the size of a matoran’s head cracked its headplate. Takua could see Onepu with another rock in his hand, ready to throw. Taipu lifted a much bigger rock over his head and tossed it with all his strength. It smashed the creature’s headplate open, and that’s when Takua saw it.

            It was a bright orange fleshy pulsing mass that looked strangely like a face. Takua thought back to the dead one Nuparu had made the Boxor out of. It didn’t have one of these inside its headplate.

            Takua jumped on top of the disoriented creature, grabbing at the fleshy mass without thinking. It was unpleasantly warm and slimy, and he could feel it wriggle in his hands. He pulled it free and quickly tossed it away from the creature and jumped back. Immediately the creature stopped moving and fell in a limp heap on the floor. The creature’s discarded brain faded from orange to a dark purple color. Takua panted for a moment and regrouped with Taipu and Onepu. Pewku scuttled to his side.

            “Good thinking, Chronicler!” Onepu complimented. Takua smiled in response. He glanced back at Nuparu, who was fighting three creatures at once.

            “Nuparu!” Takua called, “Their brains! Get their brains!” Nuparu nodded at him and focused on striking the creatures’ headplates. He managed to knock one down and used the machine’s claws to wrench it open. He grabbed the pulsing orange mass from the creature’s head. It went limp and its orange brain turned purple.

            The four of them kept up the fight until all the creatures’ brains were removed, disabling their insectoid bodies. There was a moment of silence, then Nuparu climbed out of his Boxor and jumped to the floor. He clapped his hands together, gazing upon his creation with satisfaction. He then surveyed the bodies of the dead creatures.

            “Looks like I’ve got more materials!” He grinned. Taipu clapped his shoulder, laughing. A scuttling sound interrupted the moment. Takua glaced at Pewku, but she hadn’t moved a muscle. The scuttling started again, and a new creature came into view. It was small and bipedal, with two sinewy clawlike hands. It had a shiny exoskeleton the same color as the creatures they had just fought. It grabbed one of the discarded brains and disappeared into the darkness. Onepu rushed forward to gather the other three brains.

            “Who knows what that was, or what it wants these for,” the Ussal captain winced at the slimy purple things in his hands. “But Turaga Whenua would probably like to study these.”

            Thankfully Nuparu’s Boxor made the return trip to Onu-Koro much faster, and even Pewku helped. Once they arrived back at the village, they all found themselves wading through at least a foot of water. All the structures in Onu-Koro were damaged. Onu-matoran rushed about, treating injuries and salvaging waterlogged mining equipment. Everyone looked up at Nuparu, sitting inside his large, impressive contraption. His Boxor unceremoniously dropped the bodies of the three disabled creatures on the flooded floor in front of him. Soon a large group had gathered around them.

            “How’s the lab?” Nuparu asked a fellow Onu-matoran engineer.

            “Water damage to the foundation, partial roof collapse, and broken equipment,” the Onu-matoran said.

            “We’ll have to make do,” Nuparu said, a wild spark in his green eyes. He led the engineers back to his laboratory, the Boxor clanking loudly and shaking the ground with its heavy footfalls. A few other Onu-matoran followed, dragging the insectoid carcasses behind themselves. Takua put his hands on his hips and faced Onepu and Taipu.

            “I suppose I should be off,” he said, “I need to check up on Le-Koro.”

            “Hopefully it’s not as big a mess as this,” Taipu said, surveying the damage around them.

            Takua said his goodbyes and once again mounted Pewku to leave the underground village. The two of them left the waterlogged tunnels through the Le-Koro highway and entered the thick jungle undergrowth. The sun was already down, and a few stars peeked out from behind gathering clouds. Takua felt a twinge of unease. Aside from the scraping of Pewku’s footsteps, the jungle was quiet.

            Takua gripped the edges of Pewku’s shell, clicking his tongue. His trusty Ussal stopped walking. They both stayed still. No trilling insects, no rustle of leaves, nothing. Then a new sound started. There was a sharp crack, then a creak, then the impact of a large object hitting the ground. Several rahi birds flew squawking into the night. Then it happened again. Out in the distance, Takua could see an orange glow, carrying the scent of smoke.

            “Oh no,” he croaked.

            He had no time to react as two Le-Matoran burst out from the bushes and nearly crashed into Pewku. The Ussal started, squeaking in surprise.

            “Kongu, Tamaru!” Takua gasped. He jumped off Pewku’s back and grasped the hands of both his Le-Matoran friends. “What’s going on?”

            Tamaru was trembling and out of breath. Kongu’s jaw was clenched hard.

            Takua squeezed their hands. “Tell me what happened.”

            Neither of the Le-Matoran said a word. Another violent crack sounded in the distance, and Takua could now see the trees falling. The orange glow brightened, and he could see flames climbing over piles of splintered wood and bark. 

            “We’re…the last ones without the krana…” Tamaru whimpered. Takua looked to Kongu for further explanation, but the Captain of the Gukko Force was silent, his eyes distant.

            “What…?” Before Takua could formulate the question, a gale ripped through the clearing and felled all the surrounding trees. One tree above the three matoran began to teeter, and Takua pulled both Tamaru and Kongu away before it crashed to the ground. Then a familiar figure soared over the clearing, bringing another forceful gale in his wake. 

            Toa Lewa landed in front of another tree, and he readied his axe for a swing at its trunk. Tamaru backed up a step, and a branch snapped under his foot. He, Takua, and Kongu all flinched, and Toa Lewa whirled in their direction. Over his face was one of the creatures’ brains, a hideous pulsating mask. The green eyes behind it were distant. Instead of pursuing them, Lewa returned to the tree he’d begun cutting.

            “That? That’s the krana?” Takua whispered. Tamaru nodded.

            “The dark-beasts that hold the krana are called borok,” the Le-Matoran navigator added, “Turaga Matau spoke of them before…”

            “Before the village got mind-snatched,” Kongu finished. Takua’s eyes snapped onto him, then back to Lewa. His axe cut through the last inch of trunk, and the tree creaked loudly as it fell. Then the smooth rounded shapes of several borok rose from behind the debris. Their claws glowed orange and smothered the wood and bark with flames. A small group of Le-Matoran emerged, torches in hand, and set the surrounding foliage on fire. Each of them wore a krana like Lewa.

            “Take the highway to Onu-Koro,” Takua told his Le-Matoran friends, “Chief engineer Nuparu is building a new weapon to fight those things.”

            “But…but it’s past-late,” Tamaru said, eyes crestfallen, “They got…everyone.”

            “You’ll be safer there than here,” Takua gave Tamaru and Kongu a nudge towards the Le-Koro highway. Another tree crashed to the ground mere feet away. Takua pushed them harder. “Go! Hurry!” The Le-Matoran vanished from sight as branches and leaves broke from the collapsing trees. Takua found himself alone surrounded by debris.

            A series of tremors shook the ground, growing closer and stronger by the second. Takua began climbing up the thick trunk of a fallen tree. As he reached the top and readied himself to jump, he jolted at the sight of a large cluster of red-shelled borok pointing their claws straight at him.

            Before he could react, Takua felt himself get scooped up, and a massive earthquake rocked the area. Earth pockets opened underneath the creatures, and they fell from sight.

            “Are you alright, Chronicler?” Toa Onua asked in his deep voice. Takua nodded, suddenly aware he was slung under the Toa of Earth’s arm. Onua gently placed him on the jungle floor.

            A branch snapped loudly, startling the two of them. Their sights fell upon the masked Toa Lewa who was holding his axe at the ready. Onua held out a hand.

            “Lewa,” he said calmly, taking a slow step in the Toa of Air’s direction, “Easy, brother.”

            Lewa’s green eyes were dead behind the krana.

            “You don’t want to do this,” Onua continued, “You’re not one of them, remember?”

            Lewa surged forward, leading with a swing of his axe. Onua ducked his head just in time, and Lewa’s axe buried itself in the thick trunk of a nearby tree. Onua rose to his full height, holding out his hand again.

            “Lewa,” he urged, “This isn’t you. You’re a guardian, not a destroyer.”

            Lewa wrenched his axe free of the trunk and swung again, too fast for Onua to react. Lewa’s powerful gust of wind knocked Onua backward into a pile of broken tree branches. Lewa swung again, creating a sharp blade of air that Onua managed to block with a thick earthen wall he summoned from the ground. Onua rose both his fists above his head and brought them down with great force, sending cracks through the ground towards Lewa, who backflipped free from the rising slabs of earth his Toa brother created under his feet.

            Lewa landed, perched like a rahi on the hunt. Takua swallowed hard. He crouched behind a mossy boulder, praying to Mata Nui all the while. Lewa began stalking back to where Onua stood. The Toa of Earth raised his hands, showing that his digging claws were on his belt.

            “I’m not going to fight you,” Onua assured. Lewa stopped a foot away from him, and raised his axe above his head. Takua felt every muscle in his body tense. But Onua kept his green eyes fixed on Lewa’s, a calm expression on his face.

            “You’re better than those creatures, Lewa,” Onua said, reaching for one of Lewa’s hands, “You’re better than that parasite that controls your body.”

            Lewa’s green eyes blazed with sudden fury, leaping back away from his fellow Toa. “You are an obstacle,” he said in a harsh voice, “You must be removed.” Lewa rushed forward and brandished his axe once again. But Onua didn’t move a muscle. Lewa took a swing and stopped his axe an inch away from Onua’s throat. The Toa of Earth’s gaze remained steady.

            “We…we must clean!” Lewa snarled. He withdrew his axe and swung again. And once more he stopped himself from cleaving into Onua’s neck. “All obstacles…must be…” Lewa let out a cry of pain and stumbled backward. His axe landed on the jungle floor with a thump.

            Takua watched, trembling, as Lewa convulsed and screamed. A look of concern crossed Onua’s face, and the Toa of Earth stepped towards Lewa.

            “Brother!” Onua cried.

            Lewa spasmed. He grabbed the krana on his face with both his hands and began to pull. He gasped in pain but kept pulling. The parasite clung to his skin, but Lewa kept pulling. For a moment, he faltered. Onua took another step forward, reaching out to him. But with one final scream, Lewa ripped the krana free, and threw it aside. The Toa of Air panted for a moment as blood ran from a few gashes on his cheeks. Onua crossed the distance between them and caught his brother Toa as he collapsed.

            Onua held Lewa until the Toa of Air’s bleary green eyes opened again.

            “Earth-brother,” he gasped, “I…I didn’t hurt you, did I?”

            “No, I’m fine,” Onua said with a smile, “You did it, Lewa! You beat it all on your own!”

            “Ah, well,” Lewa grinned weakly, “I won’t fall for any more mind-snatching. Heart-promise.”

            “If it does happen a third time,” Onua grunted as he slung an arm around Lewa and lifted him to his feet, “I’ll be there to bring you back.” The Toa of Earth put a fist to his chest. “Heart-promise.” The Toa exchanged a nod and a fond smile. Takua felt himself relax and he scampered over the mossy boulders to join them. Lewa’s smile vanished and he turned to the burning jungle behind them.

            “Now…how to free my leaf-brothers…” Lewa whispered, barely audible over the crackling of the fires. Onua grabbed his shoulder and glanced about, his green eyes scanning the area. “What is it?” The Toa of Air asked.

            “Something’s coming from underground…” Onua said.

            “And the borok are coming this way!” Takua alerted the two Toa as a sizable horde of red-shelled borok approached, their claws glowing orange with heat. Takua shrunk behind Lewa and Onua who brandished their respective weapons. Just as Lewa began stirring up a windstorm and Onua gathered shockwave energy between his hands, mounds of earth rose around them and several suits of Boxor armor burst from the ground, driven by Onu-matoran.

            One Boxor ran ahead of the others, sprinting towards the nearest borok. Its driver—an enraged Kongu—yelled, “For my leaf-brothers, you foul tree-burners!” and knocked one of the red-shelled creatures across the burning clearing.

            As the boxors engaged the borok, Takua looked past the skirmish to see smaller figures emerging from the blazing jungle. As they drew closer, he realized with revulsion that they were Le-Matoran, their faces covered with the hideous krana, and they were led by Turaga Matau who also wore one. Lewa stepped forward, attaching his axe to his back armor.

            “Onua,” the Toa of Air said with uncharacteristic seriousness, “Earth-shield this whole area. Aid the fighter-machines. I’ll take care of my villagers.”

            Onua looked puzzled for a fleeting moment, then nodded in understanding. He leapt from Lewa’s side and sent shockwaves through the ground. Earthen walls rose and surrounded the possessed Le-Matoran, cutting them off from the fight between the boxors and the borok. None of them reacted as Lewa strode forward, his hands on his hips.

            “Dear leaf-friends,” he greeted. Takua backed slowly from the scene; the dead look in the Le-Matorans’ eyes making him uneasy.

            Turaga Matau stood at the forefront of the group. He raised his staff and pointed it in Lewa’s direction. “You are an obstacle,” the elder said in a deadpan voice, “You must be removed.”

            “Turaga Matau,” Lewa said, “What kind of example are you setting for our leaf-brothers, letting those creatures mind-snatch you?”

            “You are an obstacle,” Turaga Matau repeated.

            “You must be removed,” the Le-Matoran echoed in an eerie chorus.

            Lewa sighed and sat on the trunk of a fallen tree.

            “Very well then,” he said, resting his hands on his knees, “If you truly don’t remember yourselves, you can quick-strike me and be done with it.” All of Le-Koro stepped forward, holding weapons at the ready. Lewa didn’t move.

            Takua wanted to help, somehow, but was frozen in fear.

            Turaga Matau now stood before Toa Lewa. The Toa held the dead-eyed stare of his Turaga. The elder raised his staff and struck Lewa across the face. The Toa’s head snapped to the side, but he turned back to the elder and smiled.

            “Come now, wise one,” Lewa said, “I know you’re better than this. Better than those things on your faces.”

            The Turaga raised his staff again. The Le-Matoran advanced.

            “Go ahead,” Lewa’s voice rang out in the clearing, “After all, the Dark One did say the little ones could both create and destroy. If you want to be borok, then go ahead and smash-dash me and the whole island!”

            The whole village halted. Weapons were frozen in the air. Turaga Matau stared at Toa Lewa for a moment before letting his staff drop to the ground. Then he grabbed the krana on his face and began to pull. Before the elder could remove the krana completely, the voices of the Le-Matoran rose above the sounds of battle beyond the earthen wall.

            “Clean it all! It must be cleaned!”

            Takua felt his heart sink, and the feeling seemed reflected in the eyes of Toa Lewa. Turaga Matau ceased in his effort to free himself and brandished his staff once again. Lewa wasted no time backflipping away from the advancing mob. He landed next to Takua.

            “Let’s quick-group with Onua,” Lewa whispered, and scooped up Takua before he could agree. A blast of air carried them both over the earthen wall where Toa Onua and the matoran driving boxors were fighting back the swarm of red borok. Lewa landed lightly on his feet, placed Takua on the ground, and slung massive blades of air that knocked back three borok surrounding Onua. The Toa of Earth whirled to face his brother, a look of astonishment on his face.

            “Lewa! Did you—?”

            Lewa shook his head. “My leaf-brothers are still borok-minded. We need a new plan.”

            Kongu, still inside his boxor, fell back from the battle and approached the two Toa.

            “Toa Onua, Toa Lewa!” he gasped, “We drove the creatures deep-wood, but the fires are spreading!”

            “I’ll take care of that,” Onua said, and rushed off. Takua watched him disappear into the thick smoking foliage, when a sudden thought struck him.

            “Kongu, where’s Tamaru?” he asked, and panic flashed in the Le-Matoran’s eyes.

            “I don’t know…I thought he was with the rest of us…” He glanced around, then up. Takua followed his gaze and saw dark shapes moving above the trees. And the faint calls of gukko reached his ears.

            With a surge of joy Takua saw the Le-Matoran navigator mounted on a gukko, with a whole flock of the birds following suit. He was clinging on for dear life, but his voice called out loud and strong.

            “For Le-Koro!”

            The gukko swooped down low, dipping behind the earthen wall. When they came back into view, the birds had the krana-wearing matoran clutched in their talons. Takua let out a wild excited laugh, and Kongu joined as well. Toa Lewa looked on with pride. Tamaru called for the flock to halt, and he guided his own gukko to land in front of the three of them. The rest stayed in the air, flapping their wings while the possessed Le-matoran wriggled in their talons.

            Tamaru shakily dismounted his gukko, nearly collapsing into Takua’s arms. Takua supported him while the Le-matoran navigator caught his breath. Kongu leapt out of his boxor and joined them.

            “That was impressive, seek-finder!” Kongu said, slapping Tamaru slightly on the back.

            “Thanks,” Tamaru said with a small grin. His green eyes glazed over for a moment, and Takua held onto him as his body went limp.

            “Tamaru!” Takua cried. The Le-Matoran navigator regained consciousness and leaned on Takua for support as he steadied himself back onto his feet. He gave Takua a bleary smile.

            “No worries, story-teller,” he said, “Just a bit of spin-sickness…” Tamaru took a few deeps breaths, and his expression brightened. “Now to finish the krana-rescue!”

            “What’s the plan?” Lewa asked eagerly, “Where will you take them?”

            “There’s a bog not far north from here,” Tamaru said, “It’s shallow, enough for them to be stuck-foot, but not mud-drowned. Then we can get those foul mask-creatures off them.”

            The group wasted no time. Kongu whistled to one of the other gukko, calling it down to him. Once he was mounted, Kongu let out a yelp and the whole flock carried them and their fellow Le-matoran away. Lewa crouched to the ground and offered Takua a ride on his back. Soon they were following on a powerful wind conjured by the Toa. Tamaru waved up at them from the ground.

            The process went smoothly. The Le-matoran were dropped one by one into the bog, where their feet were stuck in the mud. Kongu and Lewa with Takua on his back, took turns swooping down and snatching the krana off the faces of the Le-Matoran. At last, all the villagers and their Turaga were back to their old selves.

            As Takua brushed himself off, and as all of Le-Koro celebrated, the glow of the fires faded, and soon all that was left was the plumes of grey smoke drifting into the sky above the jungle canopy. A large portion of the jungle had been levelled and splintered, but the Le-matoran seemed in high spirits, optimistic that they could rebuild, and that the jungle would regrow from the ashes.

Chapter Text

            With Le-Koro liberated, Takua decided to travel to Ga-Koro. It was closest, and he wanted to make sure there had been no major borok attacks. Just to be safe, he told Nuparu to meet him there with his boxor squad after they finished helping clean up Le-Koro. When he arrived at the sandy shore, however, he could make out the smooth-shelled silhouettes of more borok up on the cliffs surrounding the seaside village. The whole beach was barricaded. He climbed over the barricades and swam to the center village lilypad where Turaga Nokama’s hut stood. He climbed onto the lilypad and joined the crowd of worried Ga-Matoran.

            “Takua?” A familiar voice said. Takua whirled and saw Jaller approaching, a small squad of Ta-Koro guards behind him. Takua’s face broke into a grin. He sprinted full speed at his friend, trapping him in a hug that knocked some wind out of him.

            “Mata Nui, Takua,” Jaller grunted, which made Takua squeeze him tighter. “Takua! I can’t breathe!” Takua let him go, failing to suppress an excited laugh.

            “What’re you doing here?”

            Jaller took a breath, composing himself. “Turaga Vakama sent us to aid Ga-Koro. We just finished the barricades.”

            Takua’s smile faded and he and Jaller both glanced up at the borok lying in wait at the cliffs, staring down at the seaside village with their narrow insectoid eyes. The two of them shuffled off to Turaga Nokama’s hut.

            Once inside, Jaller updated the elder on the situation. Turaga Nokama nodded gratefully, though her blue eyes were clouded with worry.

            “We’re glad for any help we can get,” Nokama said.

            “We’re at your service,” Jaller saluted.

            “Nuparu the engineer built a weapon matoran can use to fight the borok,” Takua piped up, “He—,”

            “Turaga Nokama!” a Ga-matoran burst into the hut, nearly knocking Takua and Jaller over.

            “I’m in conference with these good matoran, Kotu,” Turaga Nokama said calmly.

            “Sorry, it’s just—you—have to see this!” Kotu gasped, gesturing to the open doorway. Takua, Jaller, and Nokama glanced outside to see the unmistakable shapes of boats approaching the village from the grey horizon. As they grew closer, Takua could see the boat at the forefront of the group carried Turaga Onewa, Hewkii, and Hafu. The other boats carried the rest of the Po-matoran population.

            “Is that…the whole village?” Jaller asked. Takua swallowed again. He had a guess as to why an entire village would arrive at the doorstep of another.

            The boats were docked one by one, and Turaga Onewa stepped forward to greet Turaga Nokama. They exchanged a slight bow.

            “Nokama, sorry for the unannounced visit, but we come in desperation,” the Turaga of Po-Koro’s brow was furrowed. “We were hoping to find sanctuary here. But it seems your village will soon meet the fate of ours.” Turaga Nokama placed a hand on his shoulder.

            Takua noticed Hafu standing at Turaga Onewa’s left hand, his eyes clouded and downcast. Hewkii had an arm around the carver, seemingly consoling him. Before Takua could ask, Hewkii gave him an answer to his question.

            “Hafu knocked down all his statues to stop the borok advance,” the Po-matoran athlete explained.

            “…it didn’t even slow them down,” Hafu said in a shaking voice, “All my creations…destroyed for nothing…”

            “My people may be exhausted from the journey,” Turaga Onewa was saying to Turaga Nokama, “And they may not be fond of water, but they can still fight.”

            “My people will gladly accept yours fighting alongside them,” Turaga Nokama said. Takua noticed Macku wave happily at Hewkii, who gave an equally enthusiastic wave back. From the gathered crowd of Ga and Po-Matoran, Hahli burst through and stumbled to Turaga Nokama’s side.

            “Turaga!” she panted, “The borok are moving to the beach!”

            Jaller stepped in. “The barricades might buy us some time, but we don’t know for how long.”

Macku sprang forward. “We should dismantle the causeway that leads from the beach to the village!”

            Turaga Nokama nodded to them. “Hahli, Macku, Kotu, take all willing matoran and destroy the causeway.”

            Takua followed the Ga-matoran, with Jaller close behind him. They were each given a long-handled tool with a sharpened serrated edge and set to work sawing through the ropes and knots that kept the floating driftwood causeway together. Macku was at the front of the group and was nearly finished detaching a section of the causeway from the rest.

            The sharp cracking of stone made every matoran on the causeway jump. Takua could see a whole line of the brown-shelled borok chipping away the barricades with their claws. The sight spurred the matoran to work faster, including Takua. He hooked the tool through a particularly tight knot and pulled as hard as he could, working up a significant sweat. Just when he thought it was loosening, an explosion shook the causeway and caused him to stumble.

            “Macku, look out!” he heard Hahli scream, and his blood ran cold when he saw a large boulder hurtling through the air in Macku’s direction.

            Hewkii blew past him, hopped across the scattered pieces of the causeway, and used the hammer end of his tool to bat the boulder away. Macku looked up at him in admiration. But the two of them became aware of the borok poised on the beach, staring at the matoran through the shattered gap they had made in the stone barricade. Macku had luckily created a wide enough gap in the causeway that the creatures could not advance further.

            Hewkii and Macku backed away, and soon all the matoran on the dismantled causeway were back on the main village lilypad. The swarm of brown-shelled borok stalked back and forth on the beach, no doubt trying to puzzle a way to get to them. Turaga Nokama approached, keeping an eye on the creatures in the distance.

            “This breed doesn’t seem to be fond of water either. We’re safe for the moment, but possibly not long. Take a moment to rest, but be prepared to fight soon.” The Turaga said. She retired to her hut, joined by Turaga Onewa, and the matoran of Po and Ga-Koro mingled in groups, settling around firepits as the sky faded to a shade of dark blue.

            Takua watched as the borok slowly retreated from the beach.

            “Looks like Hewkii scared them away,” Macku said, leaning on the Po-matoran’s shoulder, “Nice shot, by the way.” Hewkii laughed, putting an arm around her. Jaller folded his arms and frowned.

            “I don’t think they’ll stay away long. If there’s anything we’ve seen of the borok, it’s that they don’t give up easily.”

            “Then—!” Hahli spoke up but quickly shrank away from the gazes of the surrounding group. Her voice dropped to a near whisper, “Then, why did they retreat?”

            “It doesn’t matter,” he said in his stiff Captain of the Guard voice, “We’ll be ready when they attack again.” Hahli smiled but shied away from Jaller’s glance. Takua caught the tiny smile that crossed his best friend’s face.

            After a while the whole of Ga-Koro fell silent. All that lit the area were a few sparse firepits. Matoran slept inside huts, outside on the lilypads, and some like Takua paced restlessly, glancing towards the beach and up towards the cliffs, waiting for a sign of the boroks’ return.

            Takua saw Nixie sitting on a nearby lilypad, surveying the area with a small handheld telescope. He sat next to her.

            “Despite everything, the stars still shine,” the astronomer said with a wistful air. She turned her glassy eyes towards Takua. “Have you seen the new stars, Chronicler?”

            Takua gave her a puzzled look. “New stars?”

            She handed him the telescope, and guided his hand until he could see a constellation of six stars directly above the horizon.

            “Where did they come from?” Takua asked, handing the telescope back to Nixie, “What does it mean?”

            “They appeared when the Toa arrived,” Nixie said. She pointed to each one. “Tahu, Kopaka, Gali, Lewa, Pohatu, Onua. See, each Toa has a star!”

            Takua gazed at the sparkling dots in the sky. He felt a sense of calm wash over him. For a fleeting moment, he wondered if there would be more stars one day.

            “Even as he sleeps, the Great Spirit watches over us,” Nixie said. The two sat in peaceful contemplation together. Soon Takua could feel sleep coming on. Just as he was about to lie down, an explosion reverberated through the air, and the water beneath the village was disturbed; the undulating lilypad forced Takua and Nixie to their feet. Jaller was at his side in an instant.

            “What was that?” The Captain of the Guard said. The many matoran in the village were scrambling, grabbing any weapon they could find. Takua’s eyes snapped to the cliffs, where a large section was blown away. The resulting debris was scattered in the ocean near the lilypads and had formed a makeshift bridge. At last, the brown-shelled borok were free to enter the village.

            Jaller led the squad of Ta-Koro guards to the front, guardstaff at the ready.

            “Whatever you do, do not let them advance!” he barked to his squad.

            “Yes, captain!” they answered.

            “Ga-Koro guard, protect the Turaga’s hut!” Macku ordered, picking up her own guardstaff, “Everyone else, guard every entryway, any place the borok can get in!” As matoran scattered and armed themselves, the borok were nearly upon the main village. Takua heard a familiar clanking sound coming from the beach. He turned to see with great relief that Nuparu and his boxor squadron had arrived.

            “What’s all this?” Macku asked, examining the strange new machines.

            “Just what we need to fight those things!” Takua proclaimed, exchanging a grin with Nuparu.

            Macku nodded, seemingly satisfied. “Great, I’ll grab a boat and get them over here. You can assist the Ta-Koro guards, stop the main advance. The rest of you will cover all other entry points!” After giving her commands, Macku took a boat to the shore to transport Nuparu and his Boxor squadron to the village center.

            Within moments of all matoran finding their places, the borok were upon them. The creatures smashed through huts, broke matoran weapons swung at them, and crumbled the lilypads beneath their feet. One borok barreled towards Takua, but Nixie jumped in front of him and shot a rock at its head with a makeshift slingshot. The creature paused for a moment but shrugged off the attack. Nixie then leapt onto its head, gripping its headplate. Takua swung his guardstaff at the creature’s legs, causing it to stumble. As it toppled to the side, Nixie kept her grip on its headplate, and by pushing with her legs she managed to wrench it open.

            “Hello, there!” She exclaimed, grabbing the krana and tossing it into the ocean. Takua nodded to her and readied an attack on another approaching borok. He swung and missed, the borok rolled away and bounced, breaking through a nearby hut. Another borok was facing Nuparu and Onepu’s boxors nearby. It raised its claws and brought them down on the lilypad, which gave out under the weight of the machines. The two boxors sank into the water, carrying the Onu-matoran with them.

            Macku and Kotu dove in after them. Losing interest, the borok turned away and scurried towards Takua and Nixie. A spear buried itself into the back of the borok’s head, and it turned towards Hewkii, who had thrown it. The Po-matoran braced himself as the creature rolled towards him.

            “Hewkii!” Macku’s voice cut through the chaos of battle, and a spear landed in Hewkii’s hands.

            “Thanks!” Hewkii called to her as he prepared another throw.

            Takua ran up to the borok from behind and he stabbed at it with his guardstaff. The creature shrieked and swatted him aside. Takua tumbled over the side of the lilypad and splashed into the ocean. He coughed the salty water from his lungs as he struggled to tread water. As soon as he pulled himself back onto the lilypad he was forced to dive under the legs of a borok before it struck him with its claws.

            The battle raged through the night, and as Takua was blocking a blow from a borok he noticed that the sky was lightening. He felt exhaustion weighing down his limbs, the sweat pouring down his neck. There was also an open gash in his side that stung as it leaked blood.

            The matoran around him fared no better. Hewkii’s forehead was dripping blood into one of his eyes, and his attacks were getting sloppier with each swing. Macku had brought one borok down with a well-placed stab of her spear, but another borok knocked her off her feet. She lay still as she landed on a heap of discarded krana. Nixie was on the ground as well, bleeding profusely, her glassy eyes glazing over. Takua tried running to her side but was blocked by yet another borok.

            He panted hard, attempting to raise his guardstaff on time, but felt another blow from the borok’s claws send him crashing through the wall of a Ga-matoran hut. He lay stunned for a moment, feeling a cold chill deep in the core of his being. That feeling he was getting to know well. Makuta. Pure dark despair.

            The battle raged on around him, but the matoran’s battle cries were giving way to moans of pain and shouts of desperation. Ga-Koro was crumbling around him, and he couldn’t do anything.

            Suddenly he felt someone grab him under his arms and pull him from the ruined hut. He looked up and saw Jaller, battered and bloodied like him, but somehow still standing strong.

            “Takua, come on! I’m not letting you die on me!” his friend said as he hoisted Takua to his feet. Takua stood upright for a moment before he felt his legs give out again. Jaller caught him by the waist and pulled him up again.

            “I don’t know if we can…keep this up,” Takua croaked, weakness weighing him down. Jaller shook him, forcing him back on his feet.

            “Everything depends on us not giving up,” Jaller’s voice was harsh but had a tired edge to it. Takua wanted to be encouraged, but the cold feeling in his chest was overwhelming. He glanced about, noticing that their portion of the lilypad had floated away from the main village. In fact, the whole village was in pieces all drifting away from each other. Most matoran still standing were trapped on the main lilypad, and they stood guard around Turaga Nokama and Onewa, while groups of borok were stuck on their own lilypads. The whole battle was at an impasse, but probably not for long.

            “What are we supposed to do?” Takua said. He felt a tiny spark within him as his eyes fell upon a cluster of long, stiff reeds that stuck up from under the water close by. He reached out to one, pulled it back, and watched as it sprung forward with great force. He grabbed Jaller’s arm.

            “Ow, Takua, what—?” Jaller protested.

            “Pull this back as far as you can and hold it!” Takua said. His friend’s brow was furrowed but he complied. Takua climbed onto the reed, relieved that it supported his weight.

            “Now on three, let go!”

            “Takua, are you sure—,”

            “One! Two!” And before Takua could say ‘three,’ he felt himself launch into the air, tumbling head over heels. All weakness was forgotten as he hurtled through the air and crashed onto the main lilypad, where the borok were advancing on the remaining matoran forces. He sprang to his feet, finding himself between the borok and matoran and Turaga.

            He stared into the shiny insectoid eyes of his enemies. The monsters that threatened to level his whole island home. The chill within him was gone, replaced with a white-hot rage.

            “If you touch one more matoran,” he declared, picking up a discarded spear from the ground beside him, “You’ll have to deal with me!”

            The borok seemed frozen for a moment.

            “Well, you ugly bastards? What are you waiting for?” Takua snarled, readying his spear. Suddenly the borok were bathed in a soft blue glow that brightened with each passing moment. Takua turned to look behind him. Through the smashed walls of Turaga Nokama’s hut a brilliant ball of blue light engulfed the area. Within the glow a square symbol appeared, hovering above the Toa suva inside the hut. The matoran around him whispered in confusion.

            The symbol glowed brighter still, nearly blinding all that looked upon it. A beam of white light shot from it, past Takua’s head, and straight into the headplate of the closest borok. The creature stood paralyzed; electricity crackled around it. The beam shot to the other borok nearby, and soon, the beam travelled and struck each borok in the surrounding area, paralyzing each one in turn. Once every borok was hit, the glow faded. The creatures all collapsed, limp even though their krana were still in their headplates. The borok closest to Takua fell, and its headplate snapped open. The krana inside faded from green to tan.

            Nobody made a move at first. The only sound was the ocean waves breaking on the shore. Takua remembered Nixie and ran over to her. His heart froze when he saw her limp body under the debris of a ruined hut, her blood staining the lilypad. He pushed the rubble off her and tried gathering her in his arms.

            “Nixie,” he said, “Nixie!” He felt her face, which was cold to the touch. He couldn’t hear her breath when he put his ear to her mouth. He shook her, feeling tears pricking his eyes. “No, no, please…Mata Nui…”

            He felt a hand on his shoulder. He looked up and his eyes met Macku’s. With a solemn glance at Nixie, Macku offered Takua her hand. He suppressed a sob as he let her pull him up to his feet. He glanced around, seeing the rubble, seeing more matoran bodies. Ga-matoran and Po-matoran healers were treating the wounded. He glanced back at the fallen borok, and their dead krana. Anger and grief came over him in alternating waves. He was so lost in his own thoughts that he barely noticed Turaga Nokama’s approach.

            “It is over,” the elder whispered somberly. Takua’s curiosity suddenly broke through his other emotions.

            “What was that light?” he asked. Turaga Nokama met his gaze.

            “It must have been the Toa,” she said.

            “How? What did they do?” Macku asked.

            “That will be for them to tell once they return,” Turaga Nokama said, turning towards her hut, “For now, we must care for the ones we lost, and rebuild.”

            Takua managed to glance at Nixie one last time before the healers took her away, no doubt for embalming and burial. He met up with Jaller, and Hahli joined them to begin the clean-up of the village. The rest of the day was a blur, with Takua being lost in the repair work. The Onu-matoran and Ta-matoran guards started removing the krana from the disabled borok and burying them in holes in the ground on the shore. Nuparu figured out how to reprogram the disabled borok to assist in the cleanup effort. With all the extra hands, Ga-Koro began to look more like its old self again, and the somber mood in the village seemed to lift a bit. The setting sun turned the sky pink and orange, like Mata Nui himself was giving the matoran a bit of beauty as a reprieve from recent events.

            Soon new fires were built and matoran began to mingle. Lanterns were lit for the fallen and placed into the water. Ga-matoran wove tropical flowers together and placed them around everyone’s necks. Music began to play, and grief over the fallen gave way to celebration of their victory over the borok. There was still a lot of repair work to do, but the Turaga agreed that the matoran deserved a rest from all the chaos from the past few weeks.

            As Takua cooled his feet in the ocean, he watched as Macku playfully pushed Hewkii into the water.

            “Now for your first swimming lesson!” she declared as the Po-matoran sputtered and flailed his arms around trying to keep his head above the water.

            Nearby he could also see Jaller talking softly with Hahli. She giggled at something he said and took the tropical flower from her hair to tuck it behind Jaller’s ear.

            He smiled to himself and allowed his eyes to drift up to the darkening sky. He could see the six stars of the Toa emerge first, and he felt a pang for Nixie. He wished he’d visited the observatory more often. He wished they could have talked more. He wished he could have protected her. Maybe if he was stronger…maybe if he was a Toa, she’d be alive and safe right now.

            He shook his head, pushing aside those foolish thoughts. It wasn’t his fault Nixie was gone. It was the borok. It was Makuta. The deep chill returned, and it made him shudder.

            “Takua?” Jaller’s voice brought him out of his thoughts. “We should head back to Ta-Koro. Turaga Vakama will want a report.” Takua nodded wordlessly, and after saying goodbye to Macku, Hewkii, Hahli, Nuparu, and Turaga Nokama and Turaga Onewa, Takua followed Jaller up the road back to their volcanic home.

            They didn’t get far before a rustling in the nearby trees alerted them. A tall armored figure emerged, and when the starlight hit her face, Takua started.

            “Toa Gali?” he said, astonished.

            She was taller than before, more muscular, and her armor had turned from a shiny blue to a gleaming silver. On her back in place of her twin hooks were two silver axes. Jaller looked up with an awe that reflected Takua’s own.

            “Chronicler, Captain of the Guard,” Gali nodded to each of them. She fixed her blue eyes on Takua. “I need to speak with you. A lot has happened.”

            “No kidding,” Takua said, prompting a chuckle from the Toa of Water.

            Jaller gave Gali a respectful bow. “Toa Gali, Takua,” Jaller said, “I’ll go on to Ta-Koro.” Takua nodded to his friend, who turned and left.

            “Come,” Toa Gali said, gesturing for Takua to follow, “We’ll talk at the Great Temple.”

Chapter Text

            Gali and Pohatu arrived at the base of the mountain, where Tahu and Kopaka stood in front of a large circular opening marked by a perfect circle of boulders. Gali was filled with unease and slight annoyance as she picked up the tail end of an argument between the Fire Toa and Ice Toa.

            “—the only thing you’re wasting is your breath when you tell me what to do,” Tahu said, pointing at Kopaka’s face. The Toa of Ice had his arms firmly crossed in front of his chest, with his icy eyes boring into Tahu’s.

            “Of course,” Kopaka hissed, “The great Toa of Fire listens only to himself.”

            “Brothers!” Pohatu bounded up to the two of them, “What news do you have?”

            “Kopaka found the nest,” Tahu said through his teeth, gesturing to the circular entrance behind him.

            “Nest? Of the borok?” Gali asked, puzzling in her mind about the nature of the creatures they’d been fighting lately. “Aren’t they just vehicles for the—,”

            “For the krana, yes,” Tahu broke in, prompting another prickle of annoyance from Gali, “But this is where they’ve been coming from. I saw it myself.”

            Gali sighed, “Then this means—,”

            “—They aren’t outside invaders,” Pohatu finished for her, “They come from the island itself.”

            “Why would they destroy their own land, then?” Gali asked. Pohatu shrugged.

            “It doesn’t matter,” Tahu said, whipping out his sword and igniting it, “We know where they come from, so now we can stop them. What are we waiting for?”

            “Onua and Lewa,” Kopaka said.

            “I haven’t seen Lewa in a while,” Pohatu admitted, worry creeping into his voice, “I think Onua went to go check on him…”

            “Well, we should wait for them,” Gali said, “We need to be united if we’re going straight to the source of the borok invasion.”

            “There’s no time to wait,” Tahu said, his grip tightening on his sword, “We should send a search party or—,”

            “—No need, Tahu,” Onua’s deep voice interrupted. He emerged from a nearby thicket. Close behind him was a rather dejected Lewa. Gali felt a twinge of unease at seeing the Toa of Air like this. She reached for her brother Toa’s arm.

            “Are you okay?” she asked. Lewa’s eyes were distant and unfocused. He looked up at her after a moment. He fiddled with his hands. Gali felt her concern growing by the second. Onua was by Lewa’s side in a second, nudging him gently.

            “You’re among fellow Toa, Lewa,” he encouraged.

            Lewa took a deep breath and straightened his posture. “I…have something to tell you all,” he began, his eyes not meeting anybody else’s, “The borok, they were burning down Le-Koro, and they krana-snatched the minds of the Le-matoran. The whole village. When I quick-flew to help…”

            Gali felt the anticipation buzzing in the air as they all waiting for Lewa to continue. Tahu broke in, impatience in his voice.

            “Well? What happened? Hurry up so we can get going!” The Toa of Fire said.

            “Tahu!” Gali snapped.

            “Please, Tahu, let him speak,” Onua said in a much gentler tone.

            “Wouldn’t want you to waste even more of your energy,” Kopaka said under his breath. Tahu shot him a nasty glare.

            Gali placed a hand on Lewa’s shoulder. “Go ahead, Lewa,” she said. Lewa took another deep breath.

            “It…it’s a mind-blur, but I found myself outnumbered, and they got one of those nasty little creature-masks on my face. I became part of the swarm,” he said, his eyes darting between each of his fellow Toa. “I could hear…the swarm. In my mind.” He cast his eyes down to the ground. “I…did the borok’s work. Cut down the trees. And I attacked Onua.”

            Gali felt her hand drop. She wasn’t sure how to feel. Glancing around at her brother Toa showed a range of discomfort. Kopaka stared intently at the Air Toa, dissecting him, his bionic eye clicking and whirring. Tahu was still gripping his sword, and looked at Lewa like the Air Toa could attack at any moment. Pohatu looked worried, but in more of a sympathetic way than a distrustful one. Only Onua seemed to be relaxed.

            “But in the end, Lewa conquered the krana’s influence!” The Toa of Earth patted Lewa on the shoulder, “I allowed him to choose his fate, and mine. And he ripped the krana from his own face!”

            Tension released from them all, and Gali felt slightly foolish for not trusting Lewa more. She gave the Toa of Air a smile, and the light in his green eyes returned.

            “It wasn’t only-just me,” Lewa said, “Without Onua’s mind-strength I’d still be a borok right now.”

            “You were never a borok, brother!” Pohatu clapped him on the back. Lewa grinned at him, but his face quickly fell again.

            “I…I just wanted to tell you all…just in case something happened,” he said.

            “Don’t worry, I’ll keep an eye on you,” Kopaka said. Pohatu stared at him for a moment, then burst out in jovial laughter.

            “Kopaka, did you just…make a joke?” Pohatu said. Confusion and embarrassment flashed across the Toa of Ice’s face. He hardened his expression just as quickly.

            “Let’s just go,” Kopaka muttered. Pohatu snickered, and Lewa joined in the laughter. The last bit of worry Gali had evaporated.

            “Where are we going?” Onua asked. Tahu sighed and pointed to the circular entrance.

            “The nest. There’s a tunnel that leads straight down. Let’s not waste any more time.”

            “There’s something else I should say,” Lewa spoke up, “It was Makuta. Makuta woke up the swarms.”

            The Toa exchanged looks of understanding. But Tahu had his gaze fixed on Lewa.

            “So,” he strode up to Lewa, a hand on his sword, “You heard Makuta too? He was in your mind?”

            Lewa threw up his hands in defense. “No, no! I didn’t hear the Dark One, just the borok!”

            “He didn’t tell you to do anything, attack anyone?”

            “No, Makuta didn’t mind-snatch me! The swarms think-talked about their mission, and they said Makuta’s the one that woke them up!” Lewa backed up a pace as Tahu took another step towards him.

            “Tahu,” Onua put a hand on the Toa of Fire’s arm, “It’s fine. Lewa is not the enemy here.”

            Tahu stopped for a moment, still peering at the Toa of Air like he was a rahi about to pounce. He turned towards the entrance to the nest. “Let’s go,” he muttered. With the air thick with tension once again, Gali followed her Toa brothers into the vertical tunnel.

            The climb was long and arduous. Occasionally a borok swarm would scurry past, and the Toa had to flatten themselves against the rock to escape their notice. The vertical tunnel ended, and each Toa dropped feet first onto rocky ground. As the group walked on, Gali saw Tahu fall in step with Onua.

            “Keep an eye on Lewa,” Tahu whispered to Onua. Gali clenched her fists.

            “I promise you, brother, Lewa overcame the dark influence,” Onua assured him.

            “Just as a precaution. Nothing can interfere with the mission.”

            “You’re sounding a bit like a borok yourself, brother,” Onua’s tone was light, but the words stopped Tahu in his tracks. Gali stepped up to Tahu, leaning close.

            “Unity means more than standing next to each other,” she whispered to Tahu, “Have some faith in our brother Toa.” Tahu grunted and brushed past her. With a flash of anger, Gali whipped out one of her hooks and caught his sword arm, pulling him back a step. He whirled to face her, but she met his fiery gaze with equal intensity. “Got it?” she hissed. After a tense moment, Tahu shrugged his arm out of her hook and turned his back to her. He ignited his sword to light the darkening tunnel.

            The Toa continued in silence. Gali walked beside Pohatu, who had begun running his hand along the tunnel wall with a concerned look on his face.

            “These walls are too smooth,” he said out loud, “No matoran or borok dug these tunnels.”

            “Are you sure?” Gali asked, “What does it mean for us?”

            “All I know is something’s very wrong here.”

            “There’s an opening over here! I’m going down!” Tahu called from the front of the group. Gali watched as the Toa of Fire walked through a tunnel entrance and leaped into a hole in the floor. With a loud scraping noise and a slam, the entrance sealed itself shut, cutting him off from the rest of them. The Toa were left in near darkness without Tahu’s sword. With his kanohi Pohatu was in front of the sealed entrance in the blink of an eye. He gave the rock a roundhouse kick, but it didn’t budge. Grunting in pain, he turned to Onua.

            “You give it a go, brother,” he said. Onua nodded and drew back his fist and punched the wall with his full strength. He didn’t even leave a crack. Onua tried slamming his shoulder against it, Pohatu tried a few more solid kicks, and still nothing happened. Gali noticed the tunnel began glowing a dim red. Lewa backed into Gali, letting out a panicked breath.

            “Lava incoming!” Kopaka shouted. In the next moment Gali could see the red-orange molten liquid rushing down the tunnel straight for them all. Kopaka pointed his sword at the lava and began blasting it with ice. It slowed somewhat, but the ice melted far too quickly to stop it completely. Meanwhile both Onua and Pohatu were still trying to break through the closed entrance. Gali’s mind raced, trying to figure out a way out of this situation.

            Lewa bounced up, like he’d been struck by lightning.

            “It’s not there! The wall’s not real!”

            Gali gave him an incredulous look. Onua and Pohatu ceased their efforts to give him the same look. Kopaka was preoccupied, using all his strength the slow the incoming lava with a steady stream of ice.

            “What do you mean it’s not real?” Pohatu asked.

            “Stone-brother and earth-brother could have broken through if it was a real wall,” Lewa waved his arms with some of his characteristic exuberance, “So it can’t be real!” Pohatu and Onua exchanged a look. Lewa stepped up between them and thrust his arm out. It passed through the wall like it was nothing. The Toa of Air turned to the shocked Toa, a grin spreading across his face. “Stop believing in it, and it disappears!” He walked through without further hesitation.

            Pohatu and Onua paused to exchange looks with Gali before stepping through themselves. Gali raised a hand and watched as it passed through the rock wall. She turned towards Kopaka.

            “Kopaka! In here, quick!”

            The Toa of Ice glanced at her, and didn’t waste time with questions. He left his rapidly melting ice to the mercy of the lava and followed her through the illusory wall. On the other side stood the rest of the Toa, except Tahu.

            Pohatu scanned the walls around them. “What kind of creatures are we dealing with here?”

            “Never mind that, Tahu’s still down there,” Onua pointed out the hole in the floor which was sealed shut with a boulder. He carefully placed a hand on it, but it didn’t pass through. “This one’s no illusion.”

            “Um, guys? Is it getting hotter in here?” Lewa asked. Gali noticed the floor was beginning to glow red.

            “Everyone down, NOW!” Kopaka barked, and all Toa took cover as an explosion of rock and fire blew them all in every direction. Gali hit the wall, and felt a few pebbles pelt her in the head. She grunted in pain, pushing herself to her feet. As the smoke cleared, Tahu came into view, climbing out of the hole in the floor. He struggled to lift himself, and accepted Pohatu’s hand to pull him out. The other Toa gathered around him, coughing and brushing dust off themselves.

            “Sorry,” Tahu panted, “I had to blast myself out of there.”

            Nobody had time to think or respond. The floor beneath them crumbled out from beneath them, sending them all falling further into the heart of Mata Nui.

            As Gali fell, she started to feel a strong wind whip around her, and soon she was floating gently downwards. Looking up, she could see the fall of her fellow Toa being slowed thanks to a large air pocket Lewa conjured with a wave of his arms. As each of their feet met solid ground once again, a sigh of relief passed between them all. Gali saw Tahu catch Lewa’s eye, and nod to him in respect. Gali put her hands on her hips, a satisfied smile on the corners of her mouth.

            The Toa had landed in a large circular chamber, lit by a circle of lightstones in the center. Gali and her brother Toa scanned the chamber, hoping to find a clue of what to do next. Gali saw Lewa take a step and unintentionally press down a tile in the stone floor. He leapt back from it in surprise. The chamber shook violently, throwing them all off balance. Gali lost her footing, and she instinctively grabbed Kopaka’s arm to steady herself. The stone wall on the far side of the chamber crumbled and with a loud clang, six metallic doors opened. Each opening leaked thick white smoke. Onua stepped up to the opening closest to himself. He turned to look back at them all.

            Gali didn’t know why, and she suspected her brother Toa didn’t know either, but the openings seemed to call out to each of them. Without discourse or argument, each Toa stepped into one of the openings. As Gali stepped into hers, she first noticed the sharp metallic smell of the tunnel ahead, and then she saw the dim glow at the end, which lit a large suit of metallic exo-armor from behind. It was nearly twice her size, but Gali could see that it was open in the front, with a small stepladder leading up to it. She hesitated for a moment. Why did she feel as if it was inviting her in? Was it some kind of trap? But the desire to step into that suit of armor was too strong to resist.

            Once Gali fitted herself inside and grasped the handles inside the arms of the suit, the whole thing whirred to life, closing over her chest and expelling more of the metallic-smelling smoke. She felt a surge of energy in her limbs. The screech of metal made her turn around just in time to see a panel opening to a new chamber, lit a bit brighter than the tunnel she was in. She stepped outside to see her fellow Toa emerging from their own tunnels, also clad in suits of exo-armor.

            They stood in yet another circular chamber, larger than the first. Despite the smooth earthen pillars with embedded lightstones that marked the perimeter of the chamber, the floor was uneven like a natural cave. There were massive stalactites hanging from the ceiling, and equally large stalagmites jutting from the floor. The momentary silence was broken by Lewa letting out a cry of distress.

            Gali moved in his direction, trying to get used to the heavy, clunky movements of her exo-armor. Kopaka made it to Lewa’s side before her. The Toa of Air was hunched over inside his armor suit, his hands pressed over his ears.

            “No, don’t!” he cried, “Stay out of my head!” Gali felt a chill.

            “Lewa, what’s wrong?” Kopaka asked, hovering over him.

            I am your queen, Lewa.

            Gali’s heart skipped. The voice sounded directly inside her mind. She glanced around at her brother Toa, who all looked as alarmed as her.

            “Who’s there?” Tahu shouted, waving the arms of his exo-suit. “Come out and face us!”

            You are an obstacle. You must be removed. The voice was harsher and more bestial than Makuta’s. Gali took a fighting stance. All obstacles must be removed!

            “No! Stop it! Stop mind-talking to me! I’m not one of you!” Lewa shrieked.

            “Brother!” Kopaka said, grasping the shoulder of Lewa’s exo-armor, “We hear it too!”

            Lewa snapped out of his hysteria, and locked eyes with Kopaka.

            We must clean! You are obstacles!

            “Who is that? Where are you?” Pohatu demanded.

            “Gahdok,” Lewa hissed, standing up straight in his exo-armor. He left Kopaka’s side and spoke to a large dark shadow on the far wall. “I am a Toa, not one of your slow-wit bog-foot borok!” From behind a cluster of stalagmites a jaw lined with gleaming white fangs snapped at Lewa, who stumbled backwards, his exo-armor clanking loudly with each step.

            The creature had the shiny red armor plating of a borok but was shaped like a large quadrupedal rahi. Her head was triangular, dragon-like, set on a long thick neck. She snarled at Lewa, who kept his footing and faced her with a determined look in his eyes.

            I rule your mind, Lewa, krana or no!

            “I’ll never mind-serve you!” Lewa raised an arm, activating a rocket launcher on the exo-armor. He blasted Gahdok in the face, forcing her back a few steps. Gali followed his lead, launching her own rocket. The rest of the Toa followed her example, and after the bombardment was over, the creature was backed against the wall, shrieking in fury. The Toa began to close in.

            All obstacles must be removed! Another voice similar to the first chimed in, and a second creature appeared. She was identical to Gahdok except her armor plating was blue. All the Toa reloaded and fired a new round of rockets at the twin creatures. However, this time the rockets exploded a few feet away from their opponents.

            What will you do now, Toa? With Cahdok by my side we are the invincible Bahrag!

            Our swarms will clean it all! All obstacles will be removed! Cahdok roared and snapped her massive jaws. The Bahrag advanced on the Toa. The Toa each fired one more rocket, and they all exploded uselessly in front of Cahdok and Gahdok.

            “What’s going on? Why aren’t these working?” Pohatu said, frustration in his voice. Onua picked up a stray rock from the ground and tossed it towards the twin queens. It bounced off an invisible wall and clattered to the floor.

            “No good,” the Toa of Earth said.

            With an earth-shaking roar, Cahdok began bombarding Kopaka with a hail of stones from her mouth. Gahdok turned to Gali, and before she could react, she felt the borok queen’s roar smother her in intolerable heat. Sweat poured out of her, and she fell to one knee, fighting with each breath to stay conscious.

            Lewa leapt into battle with a cry, but Cahdok switched from burying Kopaka in rubble to blasting the Toa of Air with ice. Lewa froze in midair, his voice dying in his throat. Cahdok began throwing stones at Tahu, who used his kanohi shield to repel them, but quickly found himself cornered as the assault grew more relentless with each moment. Gali craned her neck to see where Onua and Pohatu were, and through her darkening vision she could see the two of them ducking, dodging, and throwing punches at opponents that didn’t exist.

            “Pohatu! Onua!” Gali managed to cry out, “You—you’re fighting illusions!”

            The Toa of Earth and Toa of Stone both stopped, exchanging an exasperated look with one another. As Onua ran to help Tahu, Pohatu ran to Gali. He kicked a boulder towards Gahdok. It bounced off the force field, but it also interrupted the flow of her heat attack, and Gali felt like she could breathe again. Pohatu helped her to her feet. As he ran to dig Kopaka out of the debris he was trapped under, Gali ran to help Onua and Tahu.

            The Toa of Earth was batting away the boulders that threatened to bury the Toa of Fire. Gali was suddenly struck with the realization that none of her Toa brothers have used much of their elemental powers. She tried to conjure up a wave to distract Cahdok, but barely a stream splashed from her hand. Panicking, she tried again. Same weak results.

            Was it because of the heat attack? Or was it—?

            It was when Gali saw Tahu try to blast fire at Cahdok, only for mere sparks to fire from his fingertips, that she realized that the exo-armor was hindering their elemental powers. After a moment of struggle, Gali broke out of her exo-suit, and brandished her hook weapons. With a renewed surge of power, she sent a deluge in Cahdok’s direction. The water splashed against the force field, distracting Cahdok and causing her to cease her attack on Tahu. Onua caught Gali’s eye, an understanding passed between them. Onua broke apart the exo-armor in front of his chest and jumped out as the suit collapsed in a heap behind him. As his feet hit the floor, a ripple of earth lifted the forcefield and Cahdok was forced backwards.

            Tahu broke free of his own exo-armor and raced toward the still-frozen Lewa. He heated the air around the Toa of Air until the ice melted off him. Lewa collapsed on the floor, coughing. Tahu offered him a hand, and after glancing up into his brother Toa’s eyes, Lewa smiled and allowed Tahu to pull him up to his feet. Gali ran up to them.

            The six Toa stood in a line in front of Cahdok and Gahdok, all now free of the cumbersome exo-armor. The Bahrag stomped the floor with their massive feet, roaring with primal fury.

            You cannot stop the swarms! Soon all will be cleaned!

            “Now, together!” Tahu commanded, and all understood what it meant.

            Lewa summoned a windstorm around the borok queens. Gali grasped his shoulder, adding her energy to his. Pelting rains were added to the wind. Kopaka grasped Gali’s shoulder. The rain turned to hail. Pohatu added a vortex of stones. Onua conjured waves of earth to crash against the forcefield. And finally Tahu’s fire turned the stones and earth to lava.

            All their elements melded together, forming a bright silvery vortex that soon froze and locked the Bahrag in place.

            Fools! You have no idea what you’ve unleashed!

            The Bahrag enraged thoughts died down, and soon they were completely immobilized. The borok queens were now frozen inside a tightly woven silver cage. The Toa barely had time to celebrate their victory before the chamber began to shake, loosening the stalactites from the ceiling.

            Gali felt the floor lurch beneath her, and in the next instant felt herself falling. She thrust her arms out only for them to collide with a smooth glassy surface. Panic seized her mind. She was trapped in a transparent tube, and still falling. She could see her brother Toa trapped in similar tubes, each struggling to no avail. She struck the inside of the tube with her fist, finding it was far too tough to break.

            She barely took another breath before a thick silvery liquid surged from beneath her and completely enveloped her body. The liquid filled her mouth, and the sensation of drowning wracked her body. She convulsed. She battered the inside of the tube with her fists and feet and shoulders, but it was no use.

            However, just before Gali was about to accept her own demise, she felt the substance all around her and inside her shimmer with energy. Her body was filled with white-hot fire. Then it was colder than ice. Then it filled with the hum of the earth, the howls of the wind. Her muscles swelled. A searing pain stabbed her brain. She was falling again. Then the sensation of floating in a calm lagoon soothed her limbs and her mind.

            Gali’s eyes flew open, and she found herself surrounded by pure silver light. This weightless feeling was one she knew well. She allowed her instincts to take over, and she began pumping her arms and legs, heading upwards. Her head broke the surface, and she took in a loud desperate breath. She panted as she got her bearings.

            She was treading inside a large silver pool, and all around her the other Toa’s heads were popping up to the surface, gasping for air. They all swam for the nearby stone ledge, each pulling themselves out of the thick silvery substance. As Gali regained her footing, she glanced around at her brother Toa in awe, and they looked at her and each other in the same way.

            All of them had changed. Their bodies were taller, more muscular, and they all wore sleek silver armor, and they all carried new silver weapons attached to their backplates.

            “What—what was that?” She asked aloud.

            “Not sure, but,” Pohatu flexed his arms, a grin spreading on his face, “I feel amazing!”

            Gali couldn’t deny that she felt much stronger than before. She was filled with more energy, more than should be possible considering the battle they had just fought.

            “It seems we’ve become more than what we were,” Kopaka’s cool voice was tinged with the warmth of amazement.

            “I don’t mean to be a dark-cloud,” Lewa spoke up, bringing them all to attention, “But what about what the Bahrag said? They said…we don’t know what we’ve unleashed…” his brow was furrowed with worry. Tahu surprised both him and Gali by placing a hand on the Toa of Air’s shoulder.

            “Let’s not worry about that right now,” he said calmly, as Lewa relaxed, “For now, we need to find a way out of here.”

            Lewa scanned the inside of the chamber. He squinted into the distance, then his green eyes lit up.

            “Leave it to me, fire-brother!” he said cheerfully. Gali felt her feet leave the floor. She and all the others rose into the air, without the aid of a gust of wind.

            “Is this your kanohi?” Gali asked Lewa. A realization crossed the Toa of Air’s face.

            “Oh! It—it is! I can group-share my kanohi now!” Lewa said with a grin. Pohatu rose up next to him, a matching grin on his face.

            “Then let me help speed things up!” The Toa of Stone quipped, and all six Toa rocketed out of the chamber and through an opening in the ceiling. They hit open air in no time, and the six of them hovered for a moment, surveying the island of Mata Nui.

            There were vast stretches of scorched earth, piles of rubble, destroyed foliage, decimated villages. But no more borok swarmed the surface. Gali knew, and she knew that her brothers knew, that they would rebuild. Rahi birds sang and a sliver of golden sunlight poked through the clouds above. The borok were defeated, and now the island will grow back more lush and more beautiful than before.

            “Brothers, sister,” Tahu said, “Let’s go home.”

            Takua’s eyes flew open as he let go of Toa Gali’s hands. As his breathing evened out, he sat back, marveling at what he’d just witnessed.

            He and Toa Gali were sitting across from each other atop the Kini Nui suva. The silvery starlight offered an ethereal illumination of the Great Temple and the surrounding area. The Toa of Water’s blue eyes glowed in the dim light, and Takua felt a prick of worry when he saw the pain in them.

            “Chronicler,” Toa Gali said, her voice solemn, “I saw your memories as you saw mine,” her blue eyes shone, “I must go be with my people in Ga-Koro.”

            Takua felt a fresh wave of sorrow, remembering holding Nixie’s limp form in his arms. He swallowed, trying to keep his voice from breaking, “Yes, of course, Toa.” He bowed to her. His eyes dropped to the ground, and he felt a shiver course through his body.

            Gali rested a hand on his shoulder for a moment before leaping off the suva and jogging down the stairs of the temple. She disappeared in the direction of the coastline. Takua sighed heavily, blinking tears from his eyes and jumping down as well. It was too dark to take notes in his journal, so as he made his way back to Ta-Koro, Takua ran through Gali’s memories in his mind, committing them to his own so he’d be able to record them on the Wall of History.

*          *          *

            Takua had finished the final touches of the new carvings he made on the Wall. He had included the names of the matoran lost, making special mention of Nixie and her contributions to science. He dropped his tools and sank to the floor, looking up at all the history he’d written, and all the history that was completely foreign to him. He wondered if he’d ever find out who wrote it.

            Exhaustion pressed down on him, and he stood up to keep himself from falling asleep right there on the stone floor. He packed up his bag and left the Wall behind. He wandered towards the center of the village, where his fellow Ta-Matoran were beginning to gather. Excited whispers bounced between them all. Takua glimpsed Kapura from behind and tapped him on the shoulder.

            “Oh, Takua!” Kapura said with an excited grin.

            “Hey, Kapura,” Takua returned the smile, though a heaviness still weighed in his chest, “What’s everybody doing here?”

            “Toa Tahu’s returning soon,” Kapura turned in the direction of the main gates, his eyes wide and expectant. Takua stood up on his toes, looking over the heads of the crowd. He spotted Jaller, who spotted him, and was beside him in an instant. Ta-Koro didn’t have to wait long before Toa Tahu made his entrance. The crowd gasped in awe of his new powerful form. He was taller, stronger looking, his armor shone silver with accents of crimson. He carried twin flame-shaped blades on his back. Right on cue, Turaga Vakama emerged from his hut, beaming with pride.

            “It seems Mata Nui has blessed us this day!” he declared, which prompted a cheer from the gathered Ta-Matoran. Toa Tahu raised his hand, quieting the excited matoran crowd.

            “If you don’t mind, Turaga, I have something I’d like to say,” Tahu said. He surveyed all of Ta-Koro, a look of fondness in his normally fiery eyes. “When I first arrived on Mata Nui, I had only my name and my sword. I was tasked with protecting a world and a people that I did not know.” He paused for a moment, Takua figured he was trying to find the right words. “I have not been here for very long, but I now consider this island my home. And I consider you my people. My brothers and sister and I have seen Makuta’s power. And I have no doubt he is capable of much more. But we won’t ever give up. We will not stop until the matoran are free, and the Great Spirit is awakened!” He withdrew his swords and crossed them in front of his chest. “With the power Mata Nui has bestowed us, we will prevail!” He punctuated the statement by firing a great column of fire into the air, and Takua could feel the heat. All of Ta-Koro cheered and applauded, buzzing with elation.

            Turaga Vakama stepped forward. “Toa Tahu, given your enhanced powers and commitment to the matoran, I hereby grant you the title of Toa Nuva! May your flames burn brighter than ever!” After another round of cheers, the matoran swarmed Tahu, asking him questions. In stark contrast to how he was when he first arrived in the village, he handled the excitement with grace and patience. As matoran pushed past him, Takua felt himself rooted in place. The chill of Makuta sat in his chest like a ball of ice. What was wrong with him? Why couldn’t he be happy in this moment?

            Was it because of the death he witnessed firsthand just a short while ago? Was it because he was afraid of the future, of what Makuta would unleash next? What did he have to worry about, when the Toa have become more powerful than before? It took him a moment to realize that his feet had begun carrying him towards his hut.

            He threw open the door and began tossing everything he could possibly fit into his travel bag. As he turned to exit, Jaller blocked his doorway.

            “Where are you going?” his friend asked, his arms folded.

            Takua tried letting out a nonchalant chuckle, “Um…Chronicler duties.”

            “Why so soon?”

            Takua tried to leave, but Jaller blocked him again.

            “I’m just,” Takua grunted, trying to nudge Jaller aside with his shoulder, “Just let me out, please?”

            “Takua, you’ve barely slept since the battle in Ga-Koro. You’ve been home for an hour and now you’re running off again?”

            “Just!” Takua started, then with a heavy sigh his shoulders slumped, and his travel bag dropped to the floor. “I’m just—,”

            “—Scared?” there was no mockery in Jaller’s voice, but Takua immediately went on the defensive.

            “No! I—I’m not…” his voice died as Jaller fixed his yellow eyes on him.

            “It’s okay, Takua,” Jaller said. Takua sighed again and plopped down onto his cot and placed his head in his hands.

            “It’s just…” he stumbled through his thoughts, “After that…with…Nixie…”

            Jaller’s silence pressed down on his shoulders.

            “I don’t…want anyone else to…” Takua lifted his head, the edges of his vision blurring slightly as he looked into Jaller’s eyes. “What if it’s you next time?” Takua nearly choked on the last syllable. He felt his hands trembling. He dropped his gaze, resting his head in his hands again.

            He felt the cot bounce as Jaller sat down next to him. He felt his friend’s arm drape across his shoulders. They sat like that for a moment while Takua took some deep breaths.

            “We can’t waste time worrying about things like that,” Jaller said, “Nobody knows our destinies except Mata Nui.”

            Takua didn’t know what to say.

            “All we can do is our duty, here and now.”

            Takua drew in a deep breath and blew it out dramatically. “You know Jaller?” His friend looked at him expectantly. Takua locked eyes with him. “You’re terrible at making me feel better.”

            Takua felt laughter bubble up in his throat. Jaller stared at him as Takua began to chuckle. As Takua felt himself cracking up harder by the minute, a small smile formed on his friend’s face. Soon they were both laughing. Jaller punched Takua in the arm, which did nothing to deter his mirth. He punched back, twice as hard, which prompted Jaller to retaliate thrice as hard.

            “Ow!” Takua exclaimed through his laughter. Jaller fell onto his back on the cot, his laughter shaking the frame. After a few minutes, the two of them calmed down and caught their breath. Jaller stood up and gestured for Takua to follow.

            “Come on patrol with me,” he said. Takua grinned at him and the two friends left the hut together.

            Takua trotted alongside Jaller as the Captain of the Guard made his way around the perimeter of Ta-Koro. They walked along rocky ledges, passed over lava streams, and even stopped to watch the great lava falls on the village outskirts. Takua observed the flow of the molten liquid, at how the colors shifted from red to orange, how it morphed and rolled. He may have hated the smoke, the smell of sulfur, and the thick hot air, but there was one thing that Takua liked about his home village: the fascinating beauty of lava. Jaller tugged on his arm, and Takua tore his eyes away from the falls to scamper after his friend.

            The two of them made their way through a rocky pass that cut through the lava fields. The sound of scratching brought them both to attention. Jaller whipped out his guardstaff. Takua held his breath as the scratching got louder. Then the shifting of pebbles sounded directly behind them. Just as Takua was turning his head to look, a hard, heavy weight pushed him to the ground.

            The weight was gone the next instant, and Takua rolled onto his back. And directly above him, his beloved pet Ussal Pewku was trilling and chirping and hopping around happily. A surge of joy lifted him onto his feet and he threw himself onto her hard-shelled back.

            “Pewku!” he cooed, “What’re you doing here, girl? Have you been a good girl? Of course you have!” he stroked her head, and the Ussal chirped at him in delight. Jaller sighed and put his guardstaff away.

            “That thing nearly gave me a heart attack,” his friend said. Takua shot him an exaggerated look of betrayal.

            “Don’t you dare call Pewku a ‘thing’!” he chided Jaller. His friends rolled his eyes but let out a soft chuckle. He even gave the Ussal a quick pat on her head. Seemingly pleased at all the attention she was getting, Pewku trilled and snapped her pincers. Takua patted her shell, a signal to tell her to start walking.

            Pewku and Takua followed Jaller along the rest of his patrol, passing by splintered trees and fallen stone monuments, the last remnants of the borok swarms’ invasion of Ta-Wahi. The area had been the least affected by the swarms, which made Takua all the more relieved that the Toa had been able to neutralize the Bahrag when they did. Up ahead, Jaller’s patrol had taken them back to the main gates of Ta-Koro. The gate was already open, and the lava bridge had already been raised.

            Noticing the two fallen guardsmen in front of the gate raised an alarm in Takua’s head. Jaller broke into a sprint, and Takua encouraged Pewku to speed up as well. Jaller made it to one of the guard’s side. He was lying slumped against the stone wall, limp with the occasional twitch of the limb. Jaller reached out to touch the guardsman but jerked back from a visible electric shock.

            “Ow!” Jaller yelped, waving his hand about. He kneeled next to the disabled guard. “Can you hear me? Hello?”

            Takua swallowed and jumped off Pewku’s back. He hurried to the guardsman on the other side. He was in a similar state to the first, limp and twitching.

            “Who did this to you? Hello? Will you be okay?” Takua’s efforts were fruitless. He met back up with Jaller, and the two entered the village with a potent dread crackling between them. They rushed towards Turaga Vakama’s hut, which contained the Toa suva. They saw two more guards on the ground with electricity crackling around their lifeless bodies. And inside the hut was a scene to behold.

            Directly in front of the Toa suva, staring up at the symbol for Tahu Nuva’s power was a borok. It was larger and sleeker than the ones they had dealt with before. Its armor plating was red and silver, decorated with elaborate patterns. In the far corner of the hut was Turaga Vakama, protected by two trembling Ta-Koro guards with spears. The new borok snatched the hovering symbol in its claws and curled into a ball, swiftly rolling past Takua and Jaller before they could react.

            “Stop right there, thief!” Toa Tahu’s voice boomed. Takua whirled to see the creature stop mere feet from the Toa of Fire’s crossed blades. “You have something of mine. I’d like it back,” the Toa of Fire snarled. He began swinging his swords at the borok, who ducked and rolled out of the way with ease. Tahu let out a roar and ignitied his blades, jumped and spun, leading with the sharp edges of his flaming weapons. His blows were blocked by the borok, who leaped backwards and peered at the Toa with burning eyes.

            And what will you do, Toa? A hissing, mocking voice came from the creature, making Takua and Jaller gasp in unison. Tahu looked startled for a moment but quickly shook it off. He readied another attack with his twin swords.

            “Stick around and you’ll find out!” he swung one of his swords. In an instant, the symbol the borok carried dissolved in its claws, and the flames on Tahu’s swords fizzled out. He paused for a moment, then tried swinging again. Still there was no ignition. Tahu sheathed his swords, and thrust out his hands instead. Yet again, no flames answered his call.

            “What is this?” Tahu growled as the borok let out a horrible raspy laugh. Its claws crackled with electricity, and just as Jaller jumped forward and screamed “No!” bolts of lightning erupted from the creature and struck the guard tower above Tahu’s head. The stone crumbled and collapsed, burying the Toa in an instant. The matoran guard in the watchtower fell also, and his body hit the debris pile and lay still. The borok leapt over the rubble and ran out of the village.

            Jaller was already climbing on the rock pile to get to the fallen guard. Takua was stuck in place, feeling his breath shorten with each passing second. No, not again, he cried in his mind, not so soon!

            “Healers! We need healers over here!” Jaller called out. Takua was so focused on fighting down his mounting panic that he barely noticed Turaga Vakama rush past him to assess the situation. The elder watched with great sorrow in his yellow eyes as the healers arrived to take the matoran guard’s body away. Takua saw the fractures, the blood dripping on the stone ground, the glazed look in the matoran’s eyes. He knew it was too late for any healing. His eyes were burning, his vision blurred and swam.

            “Takua?” Jaller’s voice broke through the fog in his mind, and Takua blinked the tears away. His friend looked just as distressed as him. The debris pile began to shift, and the two turned to see an arm break through. Soon, Tahu managed to push enough rocks off himself to break free of the rubble. He was coated in dust, and his blazing orange eyes had faded to grey. He was battered, shaken, but alive.

            The Toa’s gaze fell to the blood on the ground. His eyes widened.

            “What happened?” He asked, “Who—who’s blood is this?”

            Takua swallowed as his vision began to blur again. Tahu scanned the grim and grief-stricken faces around him. Understanding crossed his face and was quickly replaced with rage.

            “I’ll find that damn creature and destroy it,” he snarled, turning to leave the village.

            “Hold, Toa,” Vakama commanded, stopping Tahu in his tracks, “It’s unwise to go after an opponent you know nothing about.”

            Tahu whirled on the Turaga. “And I suppose you know what that thing was?” Vakama held his burning gaze without a trace of fear.

            “I shall consult the Sacred Flame.”

            Takua found himself inside the Turaga’s hut, standing next to Jaller and Toa Tahu. They all watched as Turaga Vakama stood before the sacred fire pit. With a wave of his hand, the flames surged higher towards the ceiling and turned red for a moment before settling down and fading back to orange.

            “That creature was a Borok-Kal. Created as backup in case the swarms failed their mission,” the Turaga said. Takua glanced at Tahu. His hands were shaking.

            “We’re losing time here,” Tahu said, “I need to track it before—,”

            “—I understand your need for haste, Tahu,” Vakama said, “but perhaps it would be wiser to meet up with your fellow Toa to see if they—,”

            “—I don’t need their help,” Tahu broke in, turning to leave, “I’ll find that monster myself.”

            “You will do no such thing!” Vakama’s stern tone caused the Toa of Fire to whirl on him, and for a moment Takua was afraid Tahu might attack the elder. His face was twisted with anger and his chest was heaving. Vakama stared him down. “Tahu, your command over flame is gone. The Borok-Kal holds power much greater than those of the swarms. This is not a fight you can leap into carelessly!” Tahu stared at him for a moment that stretched far too long for Takua’s comfort. The Toa of Fire then turned and exited the hut without another word. Jaller stared after him, his expression unreadable. Vakama heaved a weary sigh.

            “His pride may well be his downfall,” the elder whispered. He turned his attention to Jaller and Takua. “It’s unclear to me what the creature wants with the symbol of the Toa Nuva.”

            “I’ll go with Toa Tahu,” Jaller stepped forward, “If anything, I can help him look for the other Toa.”

            Takua stepped up next to him. “Then I’d better go too.”

            Turaga Vakama nodded to them both. “Very well. Be safe, you two.” Jaller and Takua bowed to the elder and took their leave.

            The matoran caught up with Tahu in no time. The Toa of Fire was following a trail of borok-shaped footprints out of the village and towards the Le-Wahi jungle. If the Toa of Fire objected to Takua and Jaller trailing behind him, he didn’t say anything about it. His grey eyes were fixed on the tracks, and his swords were out and ready. The ground hardened, then softened, and with each change of terrain the tracks became harder to see. Once they reached the Le-Wahi swamplands they lost the trail. Tahu punched a nearby tree.

            “Dammit!” he growled.

            “We should go find—,” Jaller started, but got cut off when something heavy crashed through the trees above them and hit a patch of fallen leaves and moss. Much to Takua’s surprise, it was Toa Lewa that lay on the ground. He was on his back, sticks and leaves stuck in his wild hair, his green eyes faded to a dull grey.

            “Ow, my head,” Lewa groaned, “I think I’ll ground-lay here a while.”

            “No time, on your feet,” Tahu grasped Lewa’s wrist and pulled him upright. “What happened to you? Are you alright?”

            Lewa’s brow furrowed. “I was wind-flying, then suddenly I wasn’t. I call, but the wind doesn’t answer anymore.”

            “Then the Borok-Kal got you too,” Tahu said. Lewa looked at him with alarm.

            “Huh? Borok? But we—but, the Bahrag! We defeat—,”

            “Yes, I know,” Tahu snapped, then continued in a gentler tone, “This one’s an elite breed, I think. Turaga Vakama said it’s a failsafe for when the borok’s mission failed.”

            Lewa groaned, holding his head in his hands. “How’d it quick-snatch my powers?”

            “Those symbols above our suvas. That’s where our powers are contained. And that ugly bastard stole them.”

            “You need to find the other Toa,” Jaller chimed in. Tahu flashed a look of annoyance at him, but Lewa nodded.

            “I agree with the little one, the others might get power-snatched too.”

            Tahu sighed, “But we’ll lose time trying to track the creature.”

            “With all due respect, Toa,” Jaller said, “We’ve already lost the trail. I think it’s best for us to find the other Toa first.”

            Tahu’s jaw was clenched. Lewa patted his shoulder. “Come now, brother. The Ta-Koro Captain truth-speaks.”

            Pohatu arrived on the scene in a flash, causing everyone to jump. “Brothers! Thank Mata Nui!” the Toa of Stone exclaimed, leaning against a tree to catch his breath. Takua could see his eyes had faded to grey. “I—I don’t know how to say it but—,”

            “—A strange borok arrived in your village and stole your power symbol from the suva,” Tahu finished for him, impatience prickling in every syllable.

            “Yeah,” Pohatu said, “Did—?”

            “It happened to us, too!” Lewa said, bouncing on his heels, “We need to find the others before—!”

            The sound of fast, heavy footsteps and breaking branches made Takua flinch. Before anyone could react, a large, sleek, shiny shape flashed past them, knocking them all away. Takua pushed himself back onto his feet, blinking to clear the blurriness from his vision.

            “Hey!” Tahu shouted, leaping to his feet, “Borok! Come back here and face us!”

            Pohatu grabbed the Toa of Fire’s arm before he could start running after the creature. Tahu shot him a scathing look and wrenched his arm free. “Tahu!” Pohatu barked with uncharacteristic harshness as the Toa of Fire disappeared into the trees. Then in the next instant Pohatu disappeared after him.

            Takua, Jaller, and Lewa stood for a moment, usure of what to do. Jaller scratched his head, his brow furrowed with frustration.

            “Didn’t I say finding the other Toa first was the best strategy?” The Captain of the Guard grumbled.

            Lewa heaved a sigh, staring in the direction Tahu and Pohatu went. “Fire brother is heart-feeling, not head-thinking.” He turned to Takua and Jaller. “Then I suppose we can find the other—,” Lewa was cut off when the Borok-Kal crashed through the trees, leapt in a wide arc over the three of them, kicked off a tree trunk, and dashed away as the tree splintered and fell, scattering a cluster of taku birds.

            Lewa winced and clutched his head for a moment. Then his expression darkened. “Helpless?” he asked aloud. Takua exchanged a worried look with Jaller. “The Toa Nuva are never helpless!” Lewa sprinted after the creature. Jaller let out a frustrated growl.

            “What did he just say about heart-feeling and head-thinking?” Jaller rubbed the bridge of his nose with his fingers. Takua was rooted in place. He wanted to start running, but he also had no idea where to go. He wished the other Toa were here.

            “Looks like we’ll have to find the other Toa on our own,” Jaller stated. Takua almost smiled; the Captain of the Guard was good at decisive action, and he appreciated it a lot. So, the two friends began to walk.

            They didn’t get far before a shockwave reverberated through the jungle air, and with it came the most deafening ringing sound Takua had ever heard. It stabbed straight through his brain and vibrated through his body. He couldn’t even hear himself scream as he covered his ears, which did nothing to muffle the sonic barrage. He felt a nudge, and soon Jaller was pushing him towards a clearing in the jungle foliage while covering his own ears.

            When they arrived, they saw the creature, the massive borok with the shiny decorative plating, standing over Lewa, who was curled up in a ball on the ground with his hands pressed over his ears. The borok then locked eyes with Takua, and a deep shiver shook his frame. And a horrible realization hit him like lightning: this borok looked different from the one in Ta-Koro; its armor was white and silver. There was more than one of these things running around the island.

            I have no quarrel with you puny things.

            Takua felt Jaller instinctively grab his arm. He glanced at his friend out of the corner of his eye. Did this mean he heard the voice too?

            Stay out of our way.

            The borok turned away from the two matoran and helpless Toa of Air. It balled up and rolled out of the clearing. Takua and Jaller stood for a moment, staring at Lewa, who was still on the ground. He was shaking and mumbling to himself. Takua jumped at the sound of crunching leaves and breaking twigs, relaxing as Kopaka arrived on the scene. He was by Lewa’s side in an instant.

            “Brother,” the Toa of Ice said, shaking Lewa’s shoulder, “Tell me what happened.” Lewa continued to babble incoherently. “Lewa!” Kopaka said loudly, making Lewa wince and press his hands tighter over his own ears.

            “No! Stop it! The sound-shape, the sound-shape!” Lewa wailed. Kopaka gripped his shoulders and lowered his voice.

            “Lewa,” Kopaka whispered, “It’s Kopaka. It’s okay. You’re safe.” Lewa’s eyes fluttered open and focused after a moment. His shoulders relaxed, and he lowered his hands. “Tell me what happened,” Kopaka said a bit louder, which made Lewa grunt and tense up, covering his ears again.

            “Ice-brother, please!” he whined, “The sound-shape, it hurts!”

            “It was a borok,” Jaller cut in. Kopaka’s focus switched to the Captain of the Guard. “But bigger and stronger than the ones before. It attacked Ta-Koro with its electrical powers and stole Toa Tahu’s powers. And it got Toa Lewa with sound. To think one creature could have this much power—,”

            “No,” Takua interrupted, “This was a different one. It had different colored armor.”

            Kopaka frowned. “The one that attacked my village used gravity to pin the Ko-Matoran guards to the floor. I think it’s safe to say that there are at least three of these elite borok out there.” Lewa groaned and sat himself up.

            “Great,” the Toa of Air mumbled, “And one is trouble-bad enough.”

            “I hate to be the bringer of bad news,” Onua’s voice cut into the discussion. The Toa of Earth arrived at the clearing, with Toa Gali by his side. Takua could see the grey in both their eyes, and his heart sank. It was too late to stop all the Toa from losing their elemental powers. “But I think there are four of these borok.”

            Lewa sprang to his feet, incredulity and frustration radiating off him in waves. Kopaka rose to his feet as well, closing his eyes and heaving a sigh.

            “The Onu-Koro guards were deprived of air when my symbol was stolen,” Onua explained, “And based on what we just heard, it seems you were just attacked by the borok that attacked Gali’s villagers.”

            “Electricity, sound, air, gravity,” Gali counted on her fingers, “Have you heard from our other brothers? Have they lost their powers as well?”

            “Yes, stone-brother and fire-brother were power-snatched as well,” Lewa said, his voice brimming with anxiety.

            “If all our villages were hit at the same time,” Kopaka said, “Then there might be six borok, not four.” The area fell into heavy silence.

            “Then what are we supposed to do?!” Lewa nearly shouted. Onua placed a hand on his arm.

            “Let’s take a moment and think about this,” the Toa of Earth said in a soothing voice. But Lewa surprised them all by slapping his hand away.

            “Yes, let’s take a moment, or a day, or a year. No offense, earth-brother, but think-talking for as long as you require won’t bring our powers back.” Onua frowned.

            “Lewa!” Gali snapped, disbelief in her voice, “How could you say that to him?”

            “I fell out of a tree today!” Lewa shouted back.

            “And I fell off an ice bridge,” Kopaka retorted, his arms folded tight over his chest, “You don’t see me crying about it.” Lewa’s eyes flashed as he fixed the Toa of Ice with a glare. He took a threatening step forward, and Gali jumped between them.

            “Brothers, this is not helping! Onua is right, we have to think about this!”

            “Hold on!” Onua interrupted, holding his hand up to silence the group. His greyed-out eyes scanned the jungle. Takua strained his ears but couldn’t hear a thing.

            “What is it? What do you hear?” Gali asked. Onua stayed still for a moment, then raced out of the clearing. Gali stared after him, her jaw slack. She sighed, slapping her forehead.

            “How many times. How many times have I said we need to stick together?!” She groaned. She stopped herself. Then the light in her eyes brightened. “That’s it!” she exclaimed. Lewa and Kopaka stared at her, clueless for a moment. Then understanding washed over their incredulous expressions.

            “What’s it?” Jaller asked, “What’s your plan?”

            Gali flashed him a smile and stepped towards her two Toa brothers. The three Toa stood in a tight circle and closed their eyes. Takua felt excitement bubble up inside him, and he nudged Jaller with his elbow. He caught Jaller’s stunned expression as the three Toa merged into the Toa Kaita Wairuha. They looked slightly different from when Takua had seen them before, no doubt due to the Nuva transformation. Their armor was silver and shiny, their muscles stood out more, and they held two spears which took on the shape of Gali, Kopaka, and Lewa’s new weapons. Even though their eyes were a dull grey color, they shone with determination.

            “Now then,” Wairuha said with a grin, “Follow close, little ones. Let’s neutralize this threat.”

            Jaller watched them go for a moment, and Takua tugged on his arm, giggling with excitement. Soon they found themselves traversing the jungle with the tall and elegant Wairuha leading the way. They walked for a long while. The jungle had fallen eerily quiet. But Takua wasn’t afraid.

            He had only seen Wairuha and Akamai in Gali’s vision. Seeing one of the kaita in real life, seeing their tall lithe form, their sleek armor, and their long deadly-sharp spears gave Takua a glimmer of hope. Wairuha lifted a large palm frond above their head, giving Takua and Jaller enough room to walk through. The three of them climbed over a pile of boulders and emerged into a large, swampy clearing. Another elite borok was already there, its fierce blue eyes piercing them from afar. Its blue and silver armor gleamed in the dim cloud-filtered sunlight. Wairuha picked up Takua and Jaller by the back of their collars and placed them gently in a sturdy tree branch that overlooked the clearing.

            “Stay here, little ones,” they whispered. Wairuha faced the elite borok across the way, spinning their spears in their hands and pointing at their foe with one of them. “What is your mission here, foul creature?” the kaita boomed, “Speak now, or suffer my wrath!”

            The borok began making a short hissing noise, which Takua recognized as laughter. Bold of you to assume, puny Toa, that you’re the only one with the tricks!

            The blue borok raised its head and let out a shrill screech, and soon the white and silver armored one and one with green and silver armor appeared at its side. With a bright flash of light, the three sleek borok forms melded together, and in place of the three stood a monstrous kaita fusion. Takua gasped, then clamped his mouth shut with his hand. He could feel Jaller tense up next to him. Fear flashed in Wairuha’s eyes, but they readied their spears in anticipation of an attack.

            The borok kaita rolled forward, clashing its claws with Wairuha’s crossed spears. The two opponents broke apart, and Wairuha sprung backwards to give themself some space. They put their guard up again and circled around their enemy.

            Oh, puny kaita, the mocking metallic voice of the monstrous fushion said, This was over before it started. A quiet hum began as the borok kaita waved its claws in a circular motion. Wairuha thrust their spears forward but stumbled when the spears slipped from their hands and stuck to their metallic armor. A spherical vortex formed around the Toa Kaita as the humming noise grew louder with each second. Wairuha fell to their knees, the color draining from their face as they began gasping for air. The humming noise escalated into a high-pitched ringing, and Wairuha pressed their hands over their ears. Their large body bent over as their armor was magnetized against itself.

            Then a bang reverberated through the area, knocking Wairuha off their feet, and Takua and Jaller from their tree branch. As Takua winced in pain and recovered from the fall, he saw Wairuha’s form split, and in their place lay Kopaka, Gali, and Lewa scattered on the swampy ground. The borok kaita laughed its hissy mocking laugh, then separated into the three elite borok once again.

            Let us go, no more time wasted. The Bahrag await us.

            In agreement, the three borok departed, leaving three battered Toa in their wake. Kopaka managed to sit up first, testing his arms and shoulders for injury. Gali pushed herself up, her head still bowed towards the ground. She punched her fist into the mud.

            “Not even Wairuha stood a chance,” she said, “It wasn’t even close!”

            Lewa lay on his back, his chest heaving. “It’s over, then. We can’t do anything.”

            “No, it isn’t!” Jaller’s voice rang through the clearing, startling Takua. He looked to his friend, wondering how in the world he could say that after what had just happened in front of their eyes. But there he stood, in full Captain of the Guard mode, staring down three Toa that looked just as surprised as Takua felt. “It’s not over! It can’t be, because you are still breathing! You are Toa, our last line of defense! If you can’t find a way to defeat those monsters, then the matoran are lost!”

            The sobering reality of Jaller’s words seemed to rouse the three Toa out of their momentary stupor. They all rose to their feet and regarded the Captain of the Guard with a respectful nod.

            “He’s right,” Kopaka said, “Giving up is not an option. Even if it looks hopeless.”

            “Then our next step is reuniting with our brothers,” Gali said, “So let’s—,” before she could continue, another elite borok with brown and silver armor crashed through the trees and blasted past her. Then came Tahu in hot pursuit.

            “Don’t turn your back on me, monster! Get back here and face me!”

            Kopaka heaved a purposely loud sigh. “Of course, that’s what you’ve been up to.”

            The elite borok paused its escape, turned, and pointed its claws at the ground in front of Tahu. The swampy patch began to emit foul-smelling steam, and Tahu cried out in pain as he tripped and landed palms-first into the boiling mud. He jerked himself backwards and landed on his back. Alarmingly, he sprang back to his feet and continued his pursuit. The borok aimed his claws at Tahu directly and fired waves of heat in his direction. Tahu fell to his knees, panting and sweating profusely. The borok took the opportunity to exit the area as quickly as it had arrived.

            Gali knelt by Tahu’s side. “Tahu, your hands!” She reached out to examine the burns, but Tahu whipped them away from her.

            “Don’t worry about it,” he said. He rose to his feet. “I won’t let him get away with—,”

            “Please, stop, Toa Tahu!” Jaller had left Takua’s side to block the Toa of Fire’s path. “You’re going to get yourself killed!”

            “Better than living as a coward,” Tahu snarled, looking past Jaller and into the trees where the borok had vanished.

            “You have no right!” Jaller shouted. Tahu shifted his burning gaze to the Captain of the Guard.

            “What did you say to me?” he said. Takua gulped. But his friend stood strong in front of Tahu’s towering figure.

            “You have no right to sacrifice yourself. You and your fellow Toa have a duty to the matoran. It allows no room for personal pride!”

            Tahu seemed to struggle to both process what Jaller has just said, and to keep his temper under control. After a few moments, his hard expression relaxed, and he sheathed his swords. Without looking at the Captain of the Guard, he turned towards his fellow Toa.

            “Well?” he said, looking at his battered and bruised companions, “What happened to all of you?”

            “Well, it started after Gali and Kopaka found me after the Borok-Kal sound-blast, and—,” Lewa started.

            “—Let me tell the short version,” Kopaka interrupted, “We merged into Wairuha. The Borok-Kal formed their own kaita. We lost the fight.”

            Lewa folded his arms, glaring at Kopaka. “Some storyteller you are.”

            Tahu’s gaze switched between them. Gali remained silent, staring at the ground. None of the Toa seemed to notice that Pohatu and Onua had now arrived.

            “We have news!” Pohatu shouted, waving his arms.

            “I hope it’s better than what I just heard,” Tahu said, his voice tinged with frustration.

            “Why? What happened?” Pohatu asked.

            “Wairuha just got air-stolen, sound-battered, and magnetized all at once,” Lewa said, “the borok can make their own kaita!”

            “By Mata Nui,” Pohatu breathed, “So, they stood no chance…”

            “Never mind that,” Tahu cut in, “Tell us the news.”

            “Oh, yeah,” Pohatu reached into a pouch at his belt and took out a krana, a gasp passed through the gathered Toa. “Onua and I managed to deflect the red one’s lighting and grabbed its krana. Then it spoke to us.”

            “It said the Borok-Kal have learned the location of Cahdok and Gahdok,” Onua said.

            “But Cahdok and Gahdok are—,” Lewa started but stopped himself.

            “We thought they were dead too, but the krana seemed convinced they weren’t,” Onua said, “It spoke of freeing the Borok queens from their prison, which logically would lead to them releasing the swarms again. We need a plan.”

            “We track down the Borok-Kal and get our power symbols back. That’s our plan,” Tahu said.

            “That’s not a plan,” Kopaka hissed, “That’s suicide.” Tahu got in his face.

            “Then what do you suggest, wise Toa of Icicles?” he sneered. Anger flashed in Kopaka’s eyes as he threw a punch at the Toa of Fire’s face. Tahu looked stunned for a moment, then made a grab for Kopaka. Onua grabbed Tahu around his waist, pinning his arms to his sides. Pohatu held back Kopaka, who struggled in the Toa of Stone’s grip. Gali stepped between them.

            “Brothers! Stop it! We are all on edge, but this is not the time for petty squabbles!” Gali shot a disparaging look at both of them. “Don’t you think this is exactly what Makuta wants? He wants us to give up! He wants us to fight among ourselves like angry rahi! Now both of you,” she pointed to Kopaka then to Tahu, “start acting more like you’re on the same team!” Kopaka relaxed first, prompting Pohatu to release him. Tahu was released by Onua a moment later, still looking tense and angry, but he turned his back on the Toa of Ice.

            “We should find the entrance to the Borok nests again,” Onua said, “We don’t know if the quakes collapsed the nest, but the Bahrag should still be where we left them.”

            “I did see the brown and silver one run in that direction,” Kopaka added.

            “But what will we do when we find them?” Pohatu asked, “We’re still powerless.”

            “We’ll just have to think of something on the way.”

            Gali nodded to them. “Okay, then. That sounds like a plan to me. Are we all in agreement?” She surveyed her Toa brothers, scattered, injured, irritated, and discouraged. But one by one each of them met her eyes. “Then let’s go.”

            The Toa began taking their leave of the jungle, more or less as the team they were supposed to be. Takua let out an exhausted breath. Gali stopped by to check on him and Jaller.

            “Are you both alright? Do you have any injuries?” she asked.

            “No, I’m fine. Thank you, Toa Gali,” Jaller bowed his head to her.

            “So, you’re going back down…there?” Takua asked, wringing his hands. Last time, the Toa won against the Bahrag by combining their elemental powers. What were they supposed to do without them? Gali gave him a warm smile.

            “We have to. Obviously, it’s too dangerous for you to follow, Chronicler. Find somewhere safe. And watch us through the link,” she whispered that last part and winked, and departed with her Toa brothers. Takua wished her words were comforting him, but he couldn’t stop fidgeting. Jaller began walking away from him.

            “Come on, Takua, let’s go,” his friend said. Takua trudged after him, his hands still shaking. The two of them walked in silence for most of the journey. Takua reflected on what he’d witnessed. The Toa were powerful, but they barely seemed to know what they were doing sometimes. He felt a twinge of guilt for thinking these things. Then his mind switched to the worst-case scenario. If they lost to the Borok-Kal, the borok swarms will return, and they might not be able to stop them a second time. Are the matoran doomed to die at the hands of these monsters?

            Jaller nudged Takua with his elbow, pulling him out of his thoughts.

            “That was hard to watch,” his friend admitted. Takua couldn’t help but let out a short laugh. “But, we need to have faith in them.”

            “It’s not that I don’t…” Takua’s voice died in his throat.

            “They know their duty. They know what’s at stake. They’ll figure something out,” Jaller said.

            “How can you be sure?”

            “I’m not. But I have faith. Like I have faith that Mata Nui will protect them, and us.”

            Takua looked up to the overcast sky.

            “Do you think he can see us now?” Takua asked.

            “Who knows.”

            “He’s asleep, right? So how could he see us? How could he protect us?”

            Jaller laughed. “You’re asking the kinds of questions only a Turaga could answer.”

            “Vakama doesn’t answer my questions,” Takua mumbled, a pout on his face.

            “That’s ‘cause you’re a pest,” Jaller said, punching Takua’s arm. He found himself laughing along with his friend as the two of them entered the Ta-Koro gates.

Chapter Text

            Takua sat on his cot, hands clenching his knees, his heel tapping anxiously on the floor. He almost didn’t want to observe the confrontation with the Borok-Kal. He was so afraid of watching the Toa Nuva fall one by one. He could picture it now: after Gali witnesses the death of her brothers, she too will meet her end. The connection between her and Takua would be severed. Then Ta-Koro would be decimated by the swarms, and he and everybody he knew would be killed. He didn’t want to feel like this. He wanted to be an objective observer. He wanted to see the Toa Nuva succeed. He wanted everything to work out.

            He wanted to see the ultimate defeat of Makuta himself. He remembered Jaller’s words about having faith in the Toa Nuva.

            Takua took a deep breath. The longer he put it off, the less of history he’ll observe through Toa Gali’s eyes. What kind of Chronicler would he be then? He forced all his muscles to relax, and he closed his eyes, feeling the tether that linked Toa Gali’s mind to his own. He followed it like a rope through a dark tunnel.

            The entrance to the borok nest had partially collapsed after the defeat of the Bahrag, but Gali could see now that a new opening had been melted through the rock. Her and her Toa brothers wasted no time climbing down into the tunnel. Another new hole had been burned into the floor ahead of them. Tahu knelt to look through it.

            “Lewa,” the Toa of Fire ordered, “You should scout ahead.”

            Lewa was expressionless. He had been quiet since they left the jungle to confront the Borok-Kal. Gali knew without asking that he had been hearing borok voices again. Without argument, Lewa activated his kanohi and gently floated down the hole and was lost from view.

            The rest of them waited with bated breath. Time seemed to crawl by, and Gali could sense the agitation of her fellow Toa as potently as her own. Pohatu was pacing back and forth. Onua was lightly scratching the earthen floor with his finger. Tahu was fidgeting with the handles of his swords. Kopaka remained still, but Gali could see the worry in his eyes.

            “Maybe I should have gone with him,” Pohatu said, still pacing.

            “He’ll be fine,” Tahu said, “He’s good at moving quietly.”

            Silence fell again. Seconds, then minutes scraped by.

            “Maybe I should go down there,” Pohatu stepped towards the hole. Then Lewa’s head popped out of it, making the Toa of Stone jump.

            “Ever-bad sorry-news!” The Toa of Air exclaimed. He jumped out of the hole and nearly ran into Pohatu. “The Borok-Kal down-cave are cube-front with the power symbols and the exo-Toa armor are hard-luck down-falling ever-quick—,” he babbled until Pohatu put a hand on his shoulder.

            “Slow down, brother,” Pohatu said, “What are you saying?”

            Lewa took a deep breath. “Sorry. The exo-armor is moving on its own, fighting the Kal! And there’s this cube—,”

            “—The exo-armor is fighting on its own? How?” Kopaka asked.

            “Look, ice brother, I have no answer for that, the important thing is the cube! It has the carve-shapes of our power symbols!”

            Onua spoke up, “It sounds like some kind of lock…and our symbols are the key!”

            “And what does it open?” Pohatu asked, his eyes shining with worry.

            “The shiny Bahrag-cage,” Lewa said, “I saw it. The cube…I could hear the borok-voices talking about it…”

            “Then we need to get down there,” Tahu said, “Lewa, share your kanohi with us.”

            Lewa nodded wordlessly and Gali felt her feet leave the floor.

            “Um, we still don’t have a plan,” Pohatu said as all six of them descended through the hole.

            Nobody reassured the Toa of Stone. It was true, they didn’t have a plan.

            Gali and her Toa brothers landed in the chamber where they had fought Cahdok and Gahdok. Sure enough, in the center of the chamber stood the frozen Bahrag inside their silvery cage. In front of it was a floating cube, carved with the elemental symbols, just as Lewa had said. And in front of it stood the six Borok-Kal surrounded by the broken piles of exo-armor parts.

            The Borok-Kal all held the Toas’ symbols in their claws, and each was moving towards the cube. Gali’s mind raced. They had only seconds. What were they supposed to do? Shout? Throw rocks? Bargain with them? She cursed herself. They had relied on their elemental powers so much, and now they were all useless. They didn’t even get the chance to use the exo-armor again.

            Tahu stepped past her, approaching the Borok-Kal.

            “What are you doing?” she said, alarmed. Has he truly learned nothing? Tahu turned back, a new look in his eyes that sent a shiver through her heart. The Toa of Fire looked worried.

            “I’m sorry I didn’t tell you all before…but, I think I have something that will help.”

            Gali stared at him. She heard the other four Toa behind her whisper in confusion and disbelief. Tahu pulled something out of a pouch on his belt. It was a totem slightly bigger than his fist, with a strange symbol carved into it. He turned swiftly towards the Borok-Kal, holding the totem above his head.

            “Go, Vahi!” the Toa of Fire said. A ripple of golden energy radiated out from the totem in a cone shape, surrounding the Kal and the cube. Their movements slowed down to near zero. The Toa Nuvas’ power symbols hovered mere inches from the cube. But now Tahu had bought the Toa some time.

            “Okay, great! Now we’re getting somewhere!” Pohatu said while Gali was too stunned to speak. Kopaka’s cybernetic eye focused on the Borok-Kal, making faint clicking noises. Pohatu bounded forward, but Kopaka grabbed his arm and pulled him back. Pohatu shot him a look, but Kopaka froze him with an icy glare.

            “Don’t bother,” the Toa of Ice said, “There’s a force field around them. Nothing’s getting through it.”

            “Allow me to test your theory, Kopaka,” Onua said. The Toa of Earth lifted a large boulder off the floor, thanks to his kanohi of strength, and threw it towards the Kal. All were stunned when it disintegrated before it could touch the frozen creatures. Pohatu sighed. Onua stared in disbelief. Kopaka’s gaze was fixed on the Bahrag’s cage, his eyes filled with defeat. Tahu was shaking; holding the Vahi seemed to be draining his energy. Lewa hung his head.

            “Then this time it really is over,” the Toa of Air whispered.

            Gali surveyed them all, glanced at Tahu, then back at the Kal. They were still virtually frozen inside the golden sheen of the time distortion, but she knew it wouldn’t last long based on Tahu’s grunts of exhaustion and pain. She could also make out the silvery sheen of the force field that had turned Onua’s boulder to dust. She locked her gaze on her own power symbol, in the hands of the enemy. It was so close, and yet there was no way to touch it.

            A thought came to her, like the whisper of a distant ocean. She lifted her hand towards her power symbol. She pictured in her mind the flow of the sea, the currents and the waves. She remembered what it was like to feel that flow within her own hands, her own body. It floated like a strand of seaweed just out of grasp. She reached out to that power.

            “Brothers!” she called out, not taking her eyes off her symbol, “Tap into your symbol! We can still control the flow!” Gali felt her body heat up. She started to feel a slight buzz on her fingertips. As she kept reaching, she could sense Lewa and Onua step up to her side and do the same. Each one of them began to glow.

            “Tahu, deactivate that thing now,” Kopaka ordered.

            The golden shell of the time distortion dissolved, and she glanced over at Tahu, who lowered the Vahi and collapsed. Luckily, he was caught by Pohatu. The Toa of Stone pulled him upright, and the two of them and Kopaka joined Gali and the others. The glow surrounded them all, and each of their power symbols glowed in the claws of the Borok-Kal in response.

            “Water-sister,” Lewa whispered to her, “My wind-power isn’t returning! What are we…?” Gali didn’t answer him. She could feel the flow of energy beyond her reach, exactly as she had planned.

            What is this? I feel…stronger!

            The Borok-Kal holding Lewa’s symbol sounded delighted. One of its companions laughed.

            Yes, the Toa are feeding us their power!

            “Gali? Are we sure about this?” Pohatu asked.

            Another Kal held Tahu’s symbol over its head. My brothers! Don’t you see? We don’t need the queens after all!

            Gali felt Lewa tense next to her, but hope swelled in her chest. A grin spread across her face, and she reached out even harder. She could see the glow of her energy flowing into the Kal that held her power symbol. She could see a slight tremor in the claws of the creature.

            “That’s right!” she declared, “You wanted our powers, monster! Now let’s see if you can handle it!”

            The Borok-Kal began to shake all over. It dropped the symbol on the floor. Its body shuddered as electricity sparked from its claws and surrounded its body.

            No, wait! Too much! I can’t—!

            The red-shelled Kal’s crackling electrical discharge grew in intensity until its body burst apart and burned to ashes within seconds. Nearby the brown and silver Kal threw its symbol aside, letting out a helpless screech as waves of sweltering heat exploded from its body and melted the ground beneath its feet. It sank into the plasma pool as its body turned to slag.

            You…you puny Toa! How could you—! The green and silver Kal was blasted through the ceiling with its backfiring vacuum powers. The symbol it had held clattered to the floor. The Kal never fell back down.

            My queens! Please, help us! My queens! The black and silver Borok-Kal shuddered violently and let the symbol it held drop at its feet. Gravity crushed the Kal’s body into a smaller and smaller ball until there was nothing left but a miniature black hole in the center of the chamber.

            The white-shelled Borok-Kal was stuck inside a sound vortex of its own making, its whole body vibrated and jerked violently. All Gali could hear from the outside was a faint high-pitched buzz as the Kal succumbed to its own terrible power and crumbled to pieces.

            Finally, only the blue-shelled Kal was left. Gali felt herself and her fellow Toa getting pulled towards it by their metallic armor. She dug her feet into the earth. Lewa grabbed her arm, holding tightly as he tried planting his feet as well. Kopaka jammed the sharp end of his weapon into the floor and held on tightly. Pohatu grabbed onto the handle of Kopaka’s weapon to steady himself as well.

            Tahu’s body was closest to the Kal and was getting pulled in fast. He tried unsheathing one of his swords, but his hand slipped, and the sword went flying through the air towards the Kal.

            I will not give in, foul Toa! The creature’s voice was equal parts defiant and desperate. I will finish the mission alone! The Kal began moving towards the cube again, symbol in hand. Tahu’s foot slipped, and with a startled yell began flying in the air towards the creature. Gali felt Lewa tighten his grip on her arm.

            Onua leapt towards Tahu, snatching him by the hand and pulling him away from the Borok-Kal’s magnetic field.

            The broken remnants of the exo-Toa armor lifted off the floor and flew towards the final Borok-Kal at breakneck speed all at once. Pounds upon pounds of debris piled on the creature as its screeches were drowned out by the clanking and clattering of metal. Soon the Kal was crushed under the weight of the armor fragments, and its magnetic field ceased. All the Toa were instantly relieved of the powerful force and succumbed to the normal pull of gravity.

            The chamber lay silent. The Bahrag remained frozen in their silvery cage. The Toa all breathed a collective sigh of relief and pushed themselves to their feet.

            “Wait…we did it?” Lewa gasped.

            “We did it,” Tahu said, his voice tinged with awe.

            “It’s all thanks to our wise sister,” Kopaka said. He gave Gali a look of admiration. “How did you know?”

            Gali smiled and shook her head. “I didn’t. I made a gamble that tapping into our symbols would feed the Kal more power than they could control.” Her smile faded, “But I have a question of my own.” She turned towards the Toa of Fire. She could see he was still clutching the strange totem in his fist. “Tahu, where in Mata Nui did you get something like that?”

            Tahu sighed heavily, holding the totem out in his palm for all to see. “Turaga Vakama gave it to me a while back. He said to only use it if all was lost, and that its power may be too great even for a Toa. He was right.”

            “And where did fire-elder get a thing like that?” Lewa asked, bouncing on his heels.

            “I don’t know,” Tahu admitted, his eyes distant, “It seems there’s a lot I don’t know about the old man. A totem that controls time itself…”

            Gali shuddered. “To control time is to control everything. I don’t think anyone should wield that power.”

            Tahu tucked the Vahi into his belt. “I’ll be giving this back, that’s for certain.”

            Gali nodded to him, and he nodded back, a small smile on his lips. Gali glanced across the chamber where their discarded power symbols lay. Her brothers were already scattering to pick up their symbols. She strode towards hers, feeling that ebb and flow of energy calling out to her. She bent to pick it up, and as soon as her fingertips brushed its surface, Gali could feel the warm rush of energy travel up her arm. The warmth permeated her body, her very soul, and soon she could feel the pulse of the ocean once again. It felt like coming back from the dead. The symbol dissolved in a burst of blue light.

            Gali unsheathed her aqua axes, and shot a stream of water from them, slicing a stalactite from the ceiling. Before it could hit the floor, Pohatu landed a spin kick on it, launching it across the chamber. Tahu ignited his one sword, melting the fallen stalactite into magma. A powerful blast of wind blew out Tahu’s flames, and he whirled on a grinning Lewa. As the Toa of Fire chased the Toa of Air around the room, Kopaka fired a thin stream of energy that left the ground under their feet slick with ice. Lewa slipped and fell on his backside, and Tahu had no time to stop himself from tripping over the Toa of Air and hitting the floor face-first. Pohatu, Onua, and Gali laughed, and even Kopaka had a satisfied smirk on his face. Tahu rose to his feet, a surprisingly amused smile on his face. He and Kopaka met each other’s gaze. Their smiles faded, but they nodded to each other in mutual newfound respect.

            Onua helped Lewa to his feet. A sheepish look crossed the Toa of Air’s face.

            “Ah, earth-brother…I said some nasty-mean things to you. I was heart-feeling and not head-thinking…” Onua pulled Lewa into a headlock and rubbed his knuckles on Lewa’s head. Lewa’s yelp of surprise dissolved into laughter. The two of them fist-bumped and pulled each other into a quick embrace.

            Tahu crossed the chamber to pry his second sword from the pile of magnetized exo-armor.

            “Now then,” Tahu addressed them all, a triumphant smile on his face, “Brothers, sister, let’s get out of here.”

            Takua severed the link and jumped to his feet. He was out of his hut in a split second, running through the streets of Ta-Koro. It was the middle of the night, but the torches were lit and Ta-matoran milled about aimlessly, no doubt worried for the fate of the Toa Nuva. But Takua’s excitement seemed to rouse them one by one as he ran past.

            “The Toa Nuva triumphed! They’re all alive!” Takua cried out, and a happy buzz began to travel through the village. Takua ran up to the base of a watchtower and cupped his hands around his mouth.

            “The Toa Nuva won! The Borok-Kal are defeated!” he shouted up to the guardsman in the tower, who left his post and slid down the ladder to the ground. The guardsman skipped out onto the street, cheering with the other Ta-matoran emerging from their huts.

            Soon all of Ta-Koro was united in the chant “The Toa Nuva have won! The Toa Nuva have won!” The streets flooded with excited Ta-matoran. Takua ran head-first into Jaller and the two fell onto their backsides. Jaller groaned with pain, but Takua was too ecstatic to feel it.

            “They did it! They did it, Jaller!” he shook his friend’s shoulders. Jaller recovered, smiling as Takua helped him to his feet. The two friends hugged and danced in a circle around each other. They broke apart, both grinning ear to ear.

            “Didn’t I tell you? All we needed was to have faith in them,” Jaller grinned. Takua jabbed him in the ribs with his elbow.

            “You’re right, Jaller. You’re always right,” Takua teased. Pewku bounded up to him, temporarily parting the crowd. “There you are, girl!” Takua cooed, patting her shell. Pewku trilled happily and then nudged Jaller with her head. Jaller smiled, and even gave her a pat.

            A party broke out, and soon instruments were being played and firepits were lit with Ta-matoran dancing around them. The arrival of Toa Tahu at the front gate prompted more cheers and dancing, and the music got louder. Fireworks were launched into the sky, illuminating the village with bursts of bright colors. The Toa of Fire smiled warmly, greeting all who approached him. Turaga Vakama approached, brimming with pride. Toa Tahu nodded to him, and Takua could see him discreetly slip the Vahi into the elder’s hands. He saw Tahu whisper something to the Turaga, but Takua couldn’t read his lips. Vakama tucked the totem into the sleeve of his robe and gave Tahu a somber nod. His yellow eyes lit up with joy and he gestured for the Toa to join all of Ta-Koro in the celebration.

            The party lasted until the grey daylight filtered through the smog. Exhausted but happy Ta-matoran cleaned up the streets and put away the instruments and carried on with business as usual. Takua entered the chamber of the Wall of History to carve out the recent victories of the Toa Nuva. Once he finished the last line, he sat back with a sigh. Jaller arrived soon after and examined Takua’s work.

            “You’ve been busy,” Jaller commented. Takua managed a tired chuckle.

            “Can’t complain,” he said, “But…” Jaller turned to look at him. “What comes next? What’s Makuta’s plan now?”

            “All that matters is he can’t use the borok anymore,” Jaller said, offering Takua his hand. Takua allowed Jaller to pull him upright.

            “Yeah, yeah, you’re always right,” Takua teased. Jaller punched his arm. Then the two of them sat for a moment, surveying the great Wall of History. Takua’s eye wandered to the older carvings with the vague recollections. He could see Jaller was looking at them too.

            “You want to go to Ga-Koro tomorrow?” Jaller asked. Takua dropped his gaze to the floor. He hadn’t been back since…

            “I suppose…I’d like to see the observatory again,” he said slowly. Jaller rested a hand on his shoulder.

            “I’d like to see Hahli again,” his friend admitted. Takua smiled at him.

            “Then it’s a plan,” he said.

Chapter Text

            Ga-Koro was bustling with busy matoran. A few Po-Matoran and Onu-Matoran had stayed behind after the borok swarms’ attack to fix up the damage to the village. They cleared out piles of boulders, dismantled the barricades, and some even helped the Ga-Matoran weave new nets and build new huts. Other Ga-matoran were chopping wood to repair the causeway. The sun blazed brightly overhead. The ocean sparkled like it never had before.

            Takua fumbled with the fibers of a rope he was supposed to be weaving, but it was looking more like the nest of a taku bird. He glanced sideways at Jaller, who was having about as much trouble as him. Hahli was sitting between the two of them, giggling softly.

            “Do you need me to show you again?” she asked. Jaller and Takua looked at her at the same time. Takua sighed, dropping his tangled mess on the sand.

            “I need a break,” he said as he flopped onto his back.

            “Yes, I’d like to see you do it again,” Jaller said, shooting an exasperated look in Takua’s direction. Hahli grasped the flaxen fibers, weaving them together and forming nearly an inch of rope in seconds. Jaller stared at her.

            “Wait,” he said, “How did you…?”

            Hahli smiled at him. “Sorry, I’ll go slower this time.”

            Takua sat back up, his gaze wandering along the beach. Near the front gate of Ga-Koro stood two figures he had never expected: Turaga Nuju and Matoro. He could see Matoro translating the elder’s strange speech and hand gestures for the Ga-Matoran guards. Takua jumped to his feet and sprinted away from his friends.

            “Takua, you just kicked sand in my eye!” Jaller’s protest faded to the background as Takua approached the elder of Ko-Koro and his translator. The two of them turned to face him. Matoro’s blue eyes lit up.

            “Oh, Chronicler! Hello!” the Ko-Matoran said.

            “Hey, Matoro!” Takua replied.

            Turaga Nuju didn’t look nearly as pleased as Matoro, but then Takua never knew the elder to look pleased about anything. The elder whistled and waved his pointer finger in a circular motion.

            “The Turaga says that the heat is oppressive here,” Matoro said.

            Takua shrugged and gave the elder a nod of respect, “It’s good to see you again, Turaga. What brings you here?”

            Turaga Nuju waved both his hands and clicked his tongue.

            “We’ve come to review Nixie’s work in the observatory,” Matoro said, his face falling as the unsaid words hung heavily in the air. Takua nodded, the cold chill in his chest returning. His mind flashed back to the borok attack, and he could almost feel her weight in his arms again.

            “Are you alright?” Matoro asked. Takua glanced up at him, straightening his posture and plastering a smile on.

            “Yeah, sure,” he said unconvincingly, “Would…could I join you?”

            “I don’t see why—,” Matoro got cut off by a flurry of gestures and clicks from Turaga Nuju. He gave Takua a sheepish look. “I, uh, I’m sorry, the Turaga wants to get moving. But yes, you can come along!” The three of them began making their way through the gate and up the cliff that led to the Ga-Koro observatory.

            Turaga Nuju clicked and whistled. Matoro didn’t say anything at first, but then the Turaga made the same noises again with more force. Matoro flinched and turned to Takua.

            “He’s not in a good mood right now,” he whispered, “He hates leaving the cold of our village.” Takua nodded in understanding.

            Takua took it upon himself to push open the large door to the observatory. He gestured for Turaga Nuju to enter. The elder grumbled under his breath in his strange language. Matoro nodded to Takua in gratitude. The three of them all separated to search through different clusters of notes and file through star charts. Takua walked right up to the telescope, which had gathered a thin layer of dust. He ran his finger over it, collecting the dust on its tip. The sight nearly broke his heart.

            He became aware of Turaga Nuju standing behind him, and he jumped aside. But Takua quickly realized the elder didn’t look angry, and he relaxed. Turaga Nuju used the sleeve of his robe to clear the dust off, and he peered through the eyepiece. He looked up at the opening in the ceiling where the other end of the telescope pointed at the sky.

            “I thought you couldn’t see stars during the day,” Takua said. Turaga Nuju’s icy blue eyes pierced through him for a moment, then switched focus to the device that controlled the platform under the telescope. The elder worked the crank, turning the whole thing to point at another part of the sky. After a few more adjustments, and a throw of the lever, the elder peered through the eyepiece again. He looked up at Takua and gestured towards it.

            Takua searched Turaga Nuju’s face, then looked into the eyepiece himself. Even in the bright blue sky above, six white points of light shone through. Takua remembered Nixie showing him those same six stars before the borok attack.

            He looked up at Turaga Nuju. The elder pointed towards a star chart hanging on the wall nearby. Takua quickly spotted the same six stars drawn on it.

            “Nixie told me about them,” Takua said to the elder, “Each star represents a Toa.” The elder nodded. He made a smooth motion with both his hands.

            “The Turaga says the Great Spirit had proclaimed them as the heroes of our people, and now their stars shine in the daylight,” Matoro said. Takua breathed an awestruck sigh and glanced through the eyepiece again. The stars blazed into his retinas, giving him a sense of peace. Turaga Nuju left his side to begin sorting through the notes piled on Nixie’s desk.

            Takua left the telescope and walked into another room to gather more notes for the elder. It had a small cot surrounded by discarded papers. Some lay scattered on the floor, and some were tacked onto the walls haphazardly. He looked them all over, but quickly realized that they were drawings, not notes. They were a bit crude, but he could make out the people she had depicted. There was a drawing of Turaga Nokama with Macku standing by her side. There was one of Gali fighting the two tarakava. And one was a drawing of him, smiling, holding a glowing blue stone in his hand.

            He grasped the bottom edge of the paper and pulled it carefully off the wall. Then his vision began to blur.

            “Chronicler?” Matoro’s gentle voice broke through his thoughts and Takua’s hands flew to his face, quickly wiping away tears. He sniffed and let out a choked laugh to cover it.

            “Oh, uh, sorry,” he said, “Um, I haven’t found any more charts in here,” he said. Matoro looked at him with sympathy shining in his eyes. Turaga Nuju appeared at the Ko-Matoran’s side, peering at Takua through his spectacles. The elder made a motion with his hands, then clapped his hands together. He grasped his Turaga staff and lightly rapped the floor with it. Matoro nodded then turned to Takua.

            “The Turaga says that Nixie was an intelligent astronomer. Her notes will prove useful moving forward,” Matoro said. He glanced at Turaga Nuju out of the corner of his eye, then added, “If I might speak for myself, I’d say she was a wonderful person as well. I’m sorry she is gone. May her memory stay alive in our hearts.” He bowed his head in respect.

            Takua walked forward and pulled Matoro into a quick embrace. “Thank you,” he said.

*          *          *

            When Takua returned to the Ga-Koro beach, he was surprised to see a gathering of a big group of matoran from all over the island, including the familiar faces of Tamaru, Taipu, Kapura, Hafu, and Kopeke. Macku spotted him and bounded in his direction.

            “Hey, Takua!” she called out, waving a hand above her head. The other five members of the Chronicler’s Company followed close behind.

            “Are we having a reunion?” Takua said, the heaviness he felt from visiting the observatory lifted a bit. The Company formed a circle around him. A few moments later, Jaller and Hahli also joined the group.

            “What better way to celebrate the Toas’ third major victory?” Taipu said, clapping him on the back.

            “I invited them since I heard the news,” Macku said with a grin, “The Toa wouldn’t have come this far without us, after all!”

            Takua laughed. He wasn’t sure he agreed, but he was glad to see all of them together again.

            “Takua!” Tamaru piped up, “Story-tell the Toa’s battle-fight with the Borok and Borok-Kal!” The other Company members nodded and made sounds of agreement.

            “Yeah, come on, storyteller!” said Kongu as he arrived on the scene. Nuparu skipped up next to him.

            “I wanna hear this!” Nuparu agreed.

            The large group sat in a circle as Takua began to weave the tale of the Toas’ struggles starting with the clashes with the swarms to the imprisonment of the Bahrag to their transformation into Toa Nuva to how they turned the Kal’s power against themselves. They all listened with looks of excitement and awe. The crowd grew as he spoke, and even the Toa Nuva themselves showed up to listen. He finished his tale with a flourish, which prompted a cheer from Macku which evolved into applause from the crowd. Takua nodded to them all and sat down on the sand as the crowd dispersed. Jaller and Hahli plopped down next to him. The three of them watched as a small group of Le-Matoran set up a drum circle and encourage the gathered villagers to begin dancing.

            As the sun began to dip into the ocean and turn the sky a blazing array of oranges and pinks, the six Toa stars blazed ever brighter, upstaging the other stars that began to pop out. Takua took in their beauty for a moment, then his mind wandered. He scanned the bustling beach, and spotted Matoro and Turaga Nuju again, this time conversing with Turaga Nokama.

            The elder of Ga-Koro had never needed Matoro to translate Nuju’s speech, so Matoro stood off to the side as the two Turaga spoke to each other. The Ko-Matoran met his gaze and smiled. Takua smiled back and waved him over. For a moment, Matoro seemed to consider the offer, but Nuju made a gesture in his direction, and the two of them left the beach and entered the jungle. Turaga Nokama followed close behind.

            Questions popped up in his mind, and Takua rose to his feet.

            “Takua?” Jaller said, breaking him out of his thoughts.

            “I just saw Turaga Nokama leave with Turaga Nuju and Matoro,” he said, taking a step towards the outskirts of Ga-Koro. Jaller caught his arm.

            “It’s probably none of our business,” his friend said.

            Takua scoffed at him. “Um, I’m the Chronicler. Is anything not my business?”

            “If they needed you, they would have sent for you,” Jaller said, his posture stiffening.

            “But—,”

            “I don’t blame you for being curious,” Hahli said. Jaller shot her a quizzical look, but she either ignored it or didn’t notice. “I’ve never known Turaga Nokama to leave Ga-Koro without telling anyone.”

            “See?” Takua said. Jaller rolled his eyes at him.

            “Come on, Takua. Let’s just relax and enjoy the celebration.”

            Takua stared at him for a moment, then burst out laughing. “Did the Captain of the Guard just tell me to ‘relax’?!” Hahli began to laugh along with him, and Jaller glanced between them with a look of incredulity plastered on his face. He folded his arms and waited for the two of them to catch their breaths.

            “Alright,” Jaller said, his tone half-defeated, half-amused, “I guess I’ll go have a sane conversation with Nuparu.” He took a couple of steps backwards as Takua and Hahli tried to fight down the last few chuckles.

            “Wait, Jaller!” Hahli gasped, her smile stretching from ear to ear. She grabbed onto his arm and the two melted into the crowd. Takua stood for a moment, watching them go as his breathing returned to normal. He sighed, feeling light as air. He caught the eye of Toa Gali, who was standing on the beach, allowing the water to rush over her feet and retreat back into the sea. He found himself by her side before realizing it.

            They stood together, looking up at the inky blue sky, sprinkled with stars. Though they weren’t far from the jovial festivities, the sound of the waves seemed to drown it all out. Takua’s eyes found the six stars again, and he watched them shimmer in the sky.

            “I don’t know how long this will last,” Gali suddenly said. Takua looked up at her. “But, no matter how short a time, I’m glad to know that peace is possible.”

            Takua looked back up at the six Toa stars.

            “Sometimes I worry I’ll never know who I was before I landed on these shores,” Gali continued, “But sometimes I’m glad I don’t know.”

            “Why wouldn’t you want to know?”

            Gali shrugged. “Perhaps not knowing is safer. Perhaps there are things in my past that I’m better off not knowing.”

            “I’d want to know,” Takua said. His gaze was fixed on the Toa stars, but he could feel Gali’s eyes on him. “Even if it’s bad, I’d want to know it all.” Gali remained silent. “I’ve seen things on the Wall of History that I didn’t write. I don’t know who wrote them. I don’t know who those things happened to, or when they happened. But I still want to know.”

            “Even if it shatters your world? Even if you lose all this?”

            Takua looked up at her again, locking eyes with her. “Things can’t stay the same forever.” Gali seemed to mull over his words, a knowing smile pulling the corners of her mouth. She rested a hand on his shoulder as they both gazed at the sea of stars above them.

*          *          *

            The kohlii ball whizzed past Takua’s head, ruffling his hair in its wake. He flinched a second too late, breaking out of his wandering thoughts. Jaller stood across the practice field, a stern look on his face.

            “Takua, you need to pay attention to the ball!”

            “Well, you throw at light-speed!” Takua retorted, knowing full well he was making excuses. Jaller rolled his eyes.

            “I’m going to pass another one, try to catch it!”

            Another ball sailed in Takua’s direction, and he thrust out his kohlii stick as far as he could reach. The ball landed in the cup end with a satisfying plink.

            “See? You’re perfectly capable,” Jaller said, picking another ball off the ground. He tossed it into the air and caught it in the cup end of his own stick. He swung the stick, tossing the ball to Takua, who ran forwards to catch it.

            “I still don’t get why Turaga Vakama picked me for the team,” Takua grumbled, using his kohlii stick to pass it back to Jaller. His friend caught it with ease. “I mean, we’re up against the inventors of kohlii!”

            “Po-Koro can’t win every game,” Jaller said, tossing the ball back to him. Takua tripped and fell onto his knees. The ball bounced past him.

            “Yeah, we’ll definitely be the ones to break their streak,” Takua said with sarcasm dripping off each word.

            “Well,” Jaller said, tossing another ball into the air, “It’s possible.”

            “But we have to beat them and Ga-Koro. If we have to go against Macku and Kotu, we’re done for.”

            “Don’t worry about them, just work on your moves,” Jaller said with a more encouraging tone. He threw the ball in Takua’s direction.

            Takua managed to catch this one but nearly stumbled over his own feet. He raised a hand to Jaller to stop him from passing another kohlii ball to him. Takua hefted his kohlii stick in his hand, spinning it to keep the ball inside the cup as he started running across the field. Once he built up enough speed, he jumped, planted the cup end of the stick onto the ground, swung his legs into the air, and swung the stick in an arc over his head as he landed his feet back on the ground. The ball sailed over the wall that surrounded the practice field and disappeared into the charred trees of Ta-Wahi.

            “Great, you lost another ball,” Jaller said dryly.

            “I think I’m getting the hang of this,” Takua said, cracking a grin.

            “Pull that off at the game, and we have a chance,” Jaller returned his smile, then grew stern the next second. “But you should work on your aim. Now go get that ball.”

            Takua placed his kohlii stick on the ground and stretched his arms above his head. He gave an exaggerated yawn. “I dunno Jaller, I think I need a break!”

            “We’ve only been practicing for half an hour.”

            “Perfect! Let’s take a break!” Takua dropped to the ground, laying spread-eagled on his back. Jaller stood over him, his hands on his hips.

            “We have a week to practice. Think you’ll be ready if you lie down every half hour?”

            “No problem, I’ll just imagine I’m being chased by a Borok-Kal!”

            His friend chuckled and sat down next to him. The two of them sat in silence for a moment, watching the grey clouds roll by. Takua could see patterns and faces in them. One of them even looked like an ancient depiction of the Great Spirit himself.

            “What do you think will change once Mata Nui wakes up?” Takua asked aloud.

            “Huh?” Jaller sounded like Takua had asked him something absurd.

            “Can you remember a time before he was asleep? What was it like? And why can’t I remember it?”

            Jaller was silent for a moment. “I don’t remember either.”

            Takua sat up, looking his friend in the eye. “But why? Why don’t we remember? What was it like before Makuta cursed him?”

            Jaller chuckled, “You worry too much.”

            “And you don’t worry enough! Don’t you think it’s all…kinda weird?”

            “Yeah, it’s weird, but I don’t know why you need to worry.” Takua stared at his friend like he had lava eels slide out of his ears. “We’re here, the Great Spirit is asleep. The Toa will find a way to wake him up.”

            “But where is he?” Takua asked, “How will they find him?”

            “Takua,” Jaller’s voice was exasperated, “Let the Toa worry about that. For now, we have to practice. And you still need to work on aiming your throws.”

            Takua pouted at his friend for a second, then cracked a grin. “And you need to work on blocking.” Jaller glared at him, then sighed as he pushed himself to his feet.

            “Alright, big shot,” Jaller said with an air of friendly competitiveness, “Hit me with your best throw.” He grabbed his kohlii stick and a goalie shield and crossed the field. He turned to face Takua. He rapped his shield with his stick.

            “Oh, I’ll hit you all right! So fast you won’t even know it!” Takua grabbed his own kohlii stick and spun it around the handle. The two of them practiced shooting goals and blocking until the overcast sky began to fade.

Chapter Text

            It was the night before the big kohlii match and Takua was not getting the sleep he needed. His mind was even more chaotic than usual, with thoughts of the past he had forgotten, and of the future challenges of the Toa Nuva, and of the Great Spirit and Makuta all mingling with the growing dread of the upcoming kohlii game.

            He felt silly that his biggest worry at the moment was a sport. Just a game. Something that had no bearing on the survival of the matoran race, something that had nothing whatsoever to do with Makuta. He didn’t even know what Makuta was capable of unleashing on the island next, but Takua did know how big the new Ta-Koro kohlii stadium was and he knew how many matoran would be sitting in those seats, all staring down at him as he tripped over his own feet chasing after a ball.

            Takua rolled onto his side. No matter what position he was in, his cot wasn’t getting more comfortable. He glanced at the far corner of his hut where Pewku was fast asleep with her legs and claws tucked into her shell. He stared at her in envy. Takua rolled over again. His brain would not stop whirring, and his eyes would not close. He sighed heavily, sending a prayer to Mata Nui to grant him at least a little bit of sleep. And it wouldn’t come. He’s too busy sleeping himself, after all…Takua thought. He sat up on his cot.

            In one swift motion he swiped up his travel bag and jumped to his feet. He gently roused Pewku, who let out a sleepy trill. Takua left his hut behind and with his pet by his side he started wandering to the back of the village. If the night guardsmen could see him from their towers, they didn’t seem to care. Takua exited out of a back gate and made his way to the lava fields.

            He spent hours traversing the stone pathways which wound through pools and rivers of lava and silently flowing lava falls. Pewku skittered next to him. Takua flicked through his older journal entries, where he had scribbled crude maps of all the areas of Ta-Wahi he had first explored as Chronicler. He remembered getting lost in these very lava fields as far back as his memory could go. He also had a vague memory of another Ta-Maotran helping him get back to the village, but he couldn’t remember who it was. He tried forcing his mind to go back further, but he hit a wall. He flipped to the first entry he’d written. It didn’t help him get through that wall.

            Takua looked up from his journal and stopped to get his bearings. Nothing around him looked familiar. Pewku was skittering in circles around him, chirping like she was wondering why he had stopped walking. He flipped through the maps in his journal again. He couldn’t help but feel a bit excited, knowing there were still parts of Ta-Wahi that had yet to be discovered. He noticed a small tunnel entrance further along the path he was on. Takua bounded up to it, poking his head through. He glanced both ways down the tunnel. He turned to Pewku.

            “What do you think, girl? Left or right?”

            Pewku’s shiny black eyes stared through him. She trilled and made small snipping motions with her claws. Takua chuckled and patted her on the head.

            “Left it is, then!” he said. He ducked into the tunnel while Pewku trailed behind him. The tunnel was lit by embedded lightstones, which allowed Takua to see the scratch marks on the walls. It wasn’t the matoran language, in fact he was sure it wasn’t a language at all. It looked more like someone was marking the path. There was a fork in the path up ahead, and Takua took the tunnel with the scratch marks on the wall.

            After a while, the long winding tunnel ended, and Takua found himself on the bank of a wide lava river. There were steppingstones poking out from the flowing lava, and on the other side of the river was something that caught his eye.

            It was a tall stone totem enveloped in a shaft of pure white light. Takua squinted at it, wondering where that light could be coming from. He nudged Pewku, who was crouched next to him.

            “Look, Pewku!” he said, pointing across the river. He strode up to the edge of the riverbank and leapt to the first steppingstone. He glanced back at his pet Ussal, who seemed reluctant to follow. Takua cracked a smile at her and jumped to the next steppingstone. “That’s why they call me the Chronicler!” he declared as he hopped across five more stones. He was about halfway to the other side. The totem seemed to shine brighter now, and Takua could see a pearlescent sheen on its surface. He breathed a sigh of awe as he felt a pull towards the mysterious object. “I’ll bet no one’s ever recorded this before,” he said to himself.

            “Takua!” Jaller’s voice shattered through his thoughts and nearly made him jump into the lava. Takua whirled to see his best friend standing on the riverbank, hands on his hips.

            “What are you doing down here alone?! We’re supposed to be at the kohlii match!”

            Takua clapped his forehead, realizing how badly he had lost track of time. “Oh yeah! Sorry, Jaller! Hang on a sec, I just gotta check out that totem!”

            “You’re hopping across lava to look at a stupid warning totem?! Do you know what Turaga Vakama would say?!”

            Takua sighed, “’Irresponsible’?” he turned his back to Jaller.

            “Now come on!” Jaller shouted to him, but Takua kept jumping across the river.

            “Be right there!” he called back. When his feet landed on the opposite riverbank, he turned on his heel and gave an exaggerated bow. Even at a distance he could see the annoyance on Jaller’s face.

            “Very impressive! Now, let’s go!” Jaller shouted.

            His friend’s impatience didn’t deter him. Takua stepped up to the shining totem, examining the scratch marks on its surface, blinking at how bright it was. After looking it over, he grasped it with both hands. It came off its pedestal much easier than he expected.

            The pedestal sank into the stone floor, and the whole area began to shake. Rocks crumbled and fell from the ceiling. Takua lost his balance and the totem slipped from his hands and began rolling towards the rising lava river.

            “Takua, get out of there!” Jaller’s voice reached him, but he didn’t listen. He dove after the totem, but it was too late. It fell into the lava river and sank. Takua stared after it, frozen for a moment. Then before he could register the loss, a bright yellow Toa stone rose from the lava, throwing beams of light in all directions.

            “Jaller, look!” Takua exclaimed.

            “What is that?” His friend called.

            Takua reached out to the stone, gently easing it back to the riverbank even as its hot surface singed his fingertips. He grabbed it, tossing it between his hands and grunting in pain. But it cooled quickly, and soon he was able to examine it more closely. It definitely was a Toa stone, but different from the ones he had used to summon the Toa Nuva to the island. Its surface was covered in unfamiliar matoran characters, along with a strange symbol that looked a bit like a face with beams of light emanating from it. He felt himself sigh in awe as he held it. It felt almost right in his hands, like it belonged to him.

            “Takua!” Jaller shouted.

            “Hold your rahi!” Takua shouted back, “I’m coming…” His heart sank as he realized that the lava in the river had risen enough to bury the steppingstones beneath it. He was stuck on the wrong side, with Jaller and Pewku on the other. And another quake began. Some more rocks loosed from the ceiling and walls, and Takua could see some of them were big enough to use as lavaboards. He held the Toa stone above his head for Jaller to see.

            “Here, take this!” He threw it as hard as he could across the river, and Jaller caught it with one hand. He dove toward a pile of debris and lifted a long flat rock from it. He turned to face the river, and with a yell he took a running start and tossed himself and the makeshift lavaboard onto the lava.

            He lost momentum much sooner than he expected, and Takua found himself drifting barely halfway across the lava river before realizing he was being swallowed in a bright orange glow, and intense heat. A wave of lava towered above him, moments away from burying him and searing the flesh from his bones. He barely had time to scream “Jaller!” before he felt himself get yanked out of the way, and suddenly he was on Toa Tahu’s back, riding with the flow of the river.

            “Chronicler! Sightseeing, were you?” Toa Tahu said as he angled the lavaboard made of his twin swords down the river. Takua gripped the Toa’s shoulders harder as they gained speed, the orange glow of the lava wave still at their backs. Up ahead the river ended at the cliff. All Takua’s muscles seized in place as Toa Tahu leapt off the lava falls.

            As the two of them fell, Takua felt a scream loose itself from his throat. Toa Tahu grabbed his twin swords from under his feet and ignited the blades. He jammed the swords into the nearby cliff face and carved two long gashes down the side of the cliff as their fall slowed to an eventual stop.

            “So, Takua,” Toa Tahu said, ‘Is this view close enough?”

            Takua spotted the lava wave break over the falls, and he shouted “Incoming!” as the molten liquid fell towards them. Activating his kanohi, Toa Tahu summoned a shield to surround the two of them, and the lava flowed harmlessly off it, leaving them untouched. Takua breathed a sigh of relief and took long deep breaths to calm his wildly racing heart.

            “Thank you, Toa Tahu,” Takua said.

            “No need,” Toa Tahu said as he began the long arduous climb up the cliff by stabbing his twin swords into the rock face.

            Before Takua knew it, he and the Toa of Fire were back on the riverbank where Jaller and Pewku had awaited their return. Takua jumped down from Toa Tahu’s back and bounded up to his friend, who trapped him in a tight hug.

            “You’re alive!” he gasped with relief. Then when the two of them broke apart, Jaller jammed an elbow in Takua’s ribs. “Kohlii-head.” Takua chuckled as Pewku jumped onto him, trilling with relief and joy. Toa Tahu’s eyes fell onto the glowing yellow stone in Jaller’s hand.

            “What is that?” The Toa of Fire asked.

            “It was in the lava. Takua—,” Jaller started.

            “—This could be important,” Toa Tahu interrupted, “Take it to Turaga Vakama. After you’ve won the kohlii match, that is.” He stole a glance at Takua, “And no more sight-seeing.”

            Jaller and Takua nodded to him in respect. “Yes, Toa Tahu,” they stated together. And the two of them sprinted back to the village. As they made their way to the stadium, Jaller tossed the Toa stone into his bag, and once inside the changing area, the two of them threw on their red and yellow kohlii uniforms. Takua barely got one shoe on his foot before Jaller was already jogging out onto the field. The muffled sound of Turaga Vakama’s address to the stadium audience reached his ears, prompting him to hurry. Takua shoved his other foot into a shoe and scampered after Jaller. Turaga Vakama had just finished his address and took his seat in the Turaga box between Turaga Onewa and Turaga Nokama. The announcer began the introduction; it was a miracle Takua and Jaller had arrived on time. Takua stole a glance at Toa Gali, Toa Tahu, and Toa Pohatu sitting on a balcony above the Turaga. A banner depicting the Three Virtues hung from the railing. In another box, the Ta-Matoran announcer spoke into a shell that augmented his voice.

            “Ta-Koro welcomes three teams! From the desert village of Po-Koro, are the undisputed Kohlii champions: Hewkii and Hafu!”

            Hewkii and Hafu stepped out onto the field, clad in their copper and gold-colored kohlii uniforms, and raised their kohlii sticks above their heads. The Po-Koro section of the stadium erupted in cheers.

            “From the shining seas of Ga-Koro, the challengers: Hahli and Macku!”

            “Oh, Hahli’s playing!” Takua nudged Jaller in excitement, “Maybe now we have a chance,” he added with a mischievous edge. Jaller shot him a glare. “What?” Takua scoffed.

            Hahli and Macku wore kohlii uniforms in varying shades of blue. They both brandished their kohlii sticks above their heads as the Ga-Koro section of the stadium cheered.

            “And from Ta-Koro, our own Captain of the Guard and the Chronicler himself: Jaller and Takua!”

            Jaller stepped onto the field with the confidence and grace his title suggested, but Takua tripped on the lace of his one untied shoe. With a wave of embarrassment, he recovered quickly and raised his kohlii stick to the crowd. The Ta-Koro section waved to them and cheered. Takua knelt to quickly tie his shoe. Jaller nudged him with his kohlii stick.

            “Try your new move,’ his friend said.

            Takua leapt to his feet, flashing him a grin. “Of course, it’s what the audience came for!” He strode out to the middle of the field where the other two offense players, Hewkii and Hahli, were taking their starting positions. Jaller, Hafu, and Macku all took their places in front of their teams’ goals. Takua, Hewkii, and Hahli tapped their sticks together, and uttered “Play well,” to each other. Hewkii winked at him, and Hahli gave a friendly smile. Takua nodded to the both of them. He wasn’t worried about Hahli; he had never seen her hold a kohlii stick before. Hewkii, on the other hand, was going to be a difficult opponent. He took in a deep breath and let it out slowly, shutting out any thoughts not related to the game.

            A hole opened in the floor between the three offensive players, and a ball was launched into the air. Takua and Hewkii reacted at the same time and trapped the ball between the cup ends of their two sticks. Hahli struck with the hammer end of her stick, breaking them apart and knocking the ball away from them all. Takua was rattled for a moment but broke into a sprint after her and the ball. Hahli hit it again, and the ball sailed up and hit the stadium wall above their heads.

            As the ball fell, Hewkii made a reach for it. Takua kicked off the wall and got in front of him. Hewkii spun and swiped the ball out of midair, then twisted his body to weave away from both Takua and Hahli. After crossing the field with Hahli and Takua on his heels, Hewkii threw the ball towards the Ga-Koro goal, but Macku smacked it away with her goalie shield. Takua dove after it. Hewkii overtook him again, but Takua used his stick to pole-vault over the Po-Matoran’s head. Undeterred, Hewkii trapped the ball between his feet and performed a perfect standing front flip over Takua’s head.

            Hahli managed to intercept Hewkii, astonishing both him and Takua as she tossed the ball into the air and smashed it across the field with the hammer end of her stick. The ball sailed towards the Ta-Koro goal, but Jaller blocked it.

            “Nice save!” The announcer said as the Ta-Matoran cheered in the stands.

            “Not bad!” Hahli called over to Jaller.

            “Nothing gets by the Captain of the Guard, unless he wishes it!” Jaller responded with a smirk.

            “I’ll keep that in mind!” Hahli said as the end of the quarter was called, and the three offensive players reconvened in the middle of the field.

            The ball was launched again, and this time Hewkii batted it away from them all, and it sailed past Macku’s head into the Ga-Koro goal. The Po-Matoran cheered wildly, and the Ta-Matoran referee marked the first goal of the game with a lightstone on the scoreboard next to the symbol for Po-Koro. Takua let out a huff. He could feel sweat pouring down his face. At the relaunch of the ball, he dove after it, but Hahli snatched it up and wove around him and Hewkii, knocking it into the Po-Koro goal, past a stunned Hafu. The Ga-Matoran in the stands hollered in excitement. Humility overtook Takua. Alright, she’s amazing, he admitted to himself.

            The game wore on, and Takua felt more and more hopeless as both Hewkii and Hahli each got another goal, with Hewkii scoring on Macku and Hahli scoring on Hafu again. Takua glanced at the lightstone scoreboard. It was dismal to see two lightstones lit up next to both his opponents’ teams, with nothing illuminated next to the Ta-Koro team. There was a one in a million chance of him catching up to them. Either Po- or Ga-Koro would win if they scored again. He gripped his stick tight in his hand; the game wasn’t over yet.

            At the next launch of the ball, Takua knocked the ball away from his opponents and sprinted after it. With a surge of adrenaline, he scooped it up in the cup end of the stick and vaulted himself into the air. There was a collective gasp from the crowd. As he swung his stick in a wide arc over his head, he realized he was overshooting by a mile. And it was too late to correct it.

            The ball whizzed into the stands and smashed into the back of the Turaga’s box. Luckily all three elders had ducked before getting hit. The matoran in the crowd were either stunned or amused. Some of the Ta-Matoran groaned in disappointment. The ball bounced back onto the field. Takua had also botched his landing, hitting the ground face-first.

            “I don’t think we’ve seen that move before!” the announcer said. Takua had never felt more foolish.

            He pushed himself up only to catch a glimpse of the ball rolling past him, with Hewkii and Hahli in hot pursuit. Hahli swung her stick and batted the ball straight into the Ta-Koro goal, past Jaller’s goalie shield, and prompting the whole of Ga-Koro to explode into a chorus of jubilant cheers and bright blue confetti. The two other villages groaned but clapped along with good sport. Takua made it onto his feet, his face burning with shame. He glanced down and noticed his shoe had come undone again. He dropped heavily onto one knee to tie it.

            Around him the other players were gathering and hitting their kohlii sticks together to show good sportsmanship.

            “…Good shooting, Hewkii,” Hahli was saying, tapping sticks with him.

            Hewkii let out a breathless chuckle, “Good shooting yourself, Hahli!”

            Jaller stepped forward, holding his stick out to Hahli. “Not bad, for a Ga-Matoran,” he said with a wink. Hahli gave him a look and tapped his stick with hers.

            “Good effort, Takua,” Hahli said. Takua finished fiddling with his shoelaces and stood, facing her. “Nice move back there,” she said, smiling, “A little more practice, and you’ll have something amazing.”

            “Thanks,” Takua mumbled, avoiding her gaze. Even Hahli’s kind words couldn’t take the sting out of his humiliating performance today. The others began lining up on the field underneath the Turaga’s box, and Takua dragged himself after them.

            He looked up at the Toa’s balcony. Pohatu and Gali looked pleased, but Tahu seemed to be so disappointed that he refused to fist-bump Pohatu when offered. In the Turaga’s box, Vakama didn’t seem at all affected by the outcome of the game. He was beaming down at all the players, which made Takua feel worse somehow.

            “Congratulations to Ga-Koro! And well-played by all!” the elder said and all the players bowed to him and the other elders.

            Takua heard a plink and noticed the Toa stone he had found earlier had fallen out of Jaller’s bag and rolled over to his foot. The moment it made contact with Takua, it fired a brilliant beam of pure white light straight at Jaller. His friend did a double-take and shielded his eyes from the brightness. The stadium fell into stunned silence.

Chapter Text

            The three villages of matoran and the three Toa Nuva gathered around the Ta-Koro amaja circle, where Turaga Nokama, flanked by Turaga Vakama and Turaga Onewa, held the yellow Toa stone. She was running her fingertips over the characters on its surface, mumbling under her breath. Takua waited with bated breath to see what her translation was. He glanced at Jaller in his peripherals. His friend seemed more focused on Turaga Nokama than anything else. He wondered if his friend was angry at him for his awful kohlii playing earlier.

            Minutes passed before Turaga Nokama finished her work and stepped forward to face the crowd. She held the stone aloft for everyone to see.

            “This is the Avohkii,” she said, “A Toa stone unlike any other. It is meant to be claimed by a Seventh Toa, a Toa of Light.”

            Gasps of awe and bewilderment rippled through the gathered matoran. Even the Toa Nuva looked amazed. Turaga Vakama stepped forward next to Turaga Nokama.

            “Legends foretell the coming of the Seventh Toa, who will bring light to the shadows and awaken Mata Nui!” the elder of Ta-Koro said, prompting more whispers from the crowd. Toa Tahu spoke up.

            “Then, what are we waiting for? We should prepare for this Toa’s arrival! When will it be, and where?”

            Turaga Onewa placed a hand on Toa Tahu’s arm. “Ah, this Toa will not ‘arrive’ as you and the others did, the Seventh Toa must be found!”

            “The Avohkii chose who would find it, perhaps it also chose who would deliver it to its master,” Turaga Nokama said.

            As the crowd’s whispers and excitement got louder, Takua felt a cold weight pressing on his chest. He had found the Avohkii, he was the one. But there’s no way he could be chosen. He was a clueless wanderer, an easily distracted kohlii-head, a clumsy weakling, and a terrible kohlii player. He caught Jaller staring at him, his yellow eyes wide and expectant.

            “Wait,” Toa Tahu said, silencing the crowd, “At the stadium, there was a sign. The Avohkii shone its light on one matoran: Jaller!” The Toa of Fire pointed at Jaller and all eyes in the area fell upon him. “He must be the Herald of the Seventh Toa!”

            As excitement stirred through the crowd, Jaller was stunned into silence. Jaller’s name rippled through the area. Hands grasped his shoulders and patted his back in encouragement. Jaller locked his pleading eyes onto Takua. Say something, his friend mouthed. But the cold heavy fear in his chest won, and Takua pumped his fist into the air.

            “All hail Jaller, Herald of the Seventh Toa!” he proclaimed, the catalyst for the numerous cheers of “Hail Jaller” through all of Ta-Koro. Jaller’s yellow eyes burned through him, pure betrayal written across his face.

            “Captain of the Guard, approach!” Turaga Vakama commanded. The crowd dispersed slightly to allow Jaller a pathway up to the amaja circle where the three Turaga and three Toa Nuva awaited. Jaller was frozen in place. Takua crept up behind him and gave him a slight shove forward.

            “Go on!” he said. Jaller flashed a death glare back at Takua before approaching Turaga Vakama. Turaga Nokama handed Vakama the Toa stone.

            “It seems the Avokhii has chosen you,” Vakama said, holding the stone out to him. Jaller remained paralyzed. “Will you seek the Seventh Toa?”

            The crowd waited with bated breath to hear his response. After a moment, Jaller held his hand out, and allowed Turaga Vakama to place the Avohkii into his palm.

            “I…I will,” Jaller said finally. The crowd cheered. “And Takua the Chronicler has volunteered to join me!” he turned back to Takua, burning him with his eyes as the crowd applauded and pushed Takua up to his friend’s side. Turaga Vakama beamed with pride.

            “Perfect,” the elder said, “While Jaller makes history, you will record it! Soon we will have another great chapter to add to our Wall!”

            Takua let out a nervous laugh, “Yeah, right…” He peeked at Jaller again out of the corner of his eye. Jaller was still staring daggers at him. The two of them made their way back through the crowd, led by the proud trio of Turaga. Ta- Po- and Ga-Matoran alike were still staring at him and Jaller with expectant enthusiasm. They applauded and patted their shoulders in encouragement and called out their names. Takua felt colder still.

            As they made their way to the back of the village, the crowd dispersed. Takua and Jaller separated to visit their own dwellings to pack for the journey that awaited them. Takua stared at his travel bag on the floor of his hut for a moment before shoving any extra warm clothes he might need, his Chronicler journal, charcoal sticks for writing, and he woke up Pewku from her nap and coaxed her out of his hut. He took one look back at his small dwelling and sighed.

            He and Jaller met at the front gates. Jaller had his own travel bag slung over his shoulder. Turaga Vakama was also there, no doubt to see them off on their quest for this Seventh Toa. Takua was so nervous and guilt-ridden than he hadn’t had the time to wonder why they were even getting a seventh Toa now of all times. Jaller locked eyes with Takua as he approached, looking less angry but still not friendly. He glanced at Takua’s pet, raising an eyebrow.

            “You’re bringing Pewku?”

            “Are you kidding?” Takua cracked a smile, patting Pewku’s shell and nuzzling her with his cheek, “I couldn’t leave her behind if I wanted to!” Pewku chirped happily as Takua hopped onto her broad back. Jaller’s gaze snapped away from him and Pewku, and Takua turned to see what grabbed his attention.

            Hahli was striding towards them, her head held high. Her blue eyes met Jaller’s yellow ones.

            “Look,” she said, folding her arms in front of her, “Don’t get mushy, Jaller. I have no time for a long goodbye.”

            A somber look softened Jaller’s features, “I just want to say…well…you owe me a rematch on the kohlii field.”

            “Well, then,” Hahli said with a smile, “You’d better hurry back. Because I’ll be practicing.” She turned on her heel and left them behind. Jaller stared after her for a moment, then sighed as he mounted Pewku next to Takua. Their elbows touched, and Jaller shoved Takua’s arm aside. Takua grunted in protest, but his friend ignored him.

            “The shadows of the Makuta are powerful,” Turaga Vakama warned, bringing the two of them to attention, “Do not take your journey lightly. It will tolerate none of your foolery.”

            “So, uh, how do we know where to start?” Takua asked.

            “Trust the Avohkii. Let it be your guide.”

            Jaller dug the yellow Toa stone out of his bag. When he held it up, a beam of light shone from it. He pointed it in another direction, and it went dim. He pointed it forward, and the beam reappeared.

            “Remember your duty, and walk in the light,” Turaga Vakama said. He clutched his Turaga staff in both his hands, leaning into it like he was suddenly burdened with worry. But he smiled a wrinkled smile at the two of them as Takua tapped on Pewku’s shell to get her moving. They left the gates of Ta-Koro behind, and soon they were deep in the charred forest, following the beam of light from the Avokhii. Takua watched as the sky darkened, and the clouds dispersed as they reached the outskirts of Ta-Wahi. He glanced up at the Toa stars above them, and he felt his heart lurch when he spotted a seventh star burning brighter than the rest.

            Jaller was quiet, dutifully holding up the Avohkii to light their way. For the first time in Takua’s life, he had nothing to say to his friend. So, the two of them rode Pewku in silence as the night grew darker.

*          *          *

            It had been several hours since Gali left Ta-Koro to meditate at the suva at Kini-Nui. When she had heard the Turaga proclaim the existence of a Seventh Toa, her mind flooded with questions. Instead of getting cagey or vague answers from the elders, as she had a few times in the past, Gali decided to seek out wisdom on her own. Then she received a shock when she looked to the sky and saw that a seventh star had appeared next to the ones representing her and her Toa brothers.

            She sat cross-legged at the suva, pondering on what it could all mean. Why a Seventh Toa? Why now? What was in store for them? Where could this Seventh Toa be? If the star was in the sky, he must be on the island somewhere. She focused on her breath and closed her eyes. She imagined her mind opening, waiting to receive some insight perhaps from Mata Nui himself.

            She reflected on all she could remember from her arrival on this island paradise. And she wondered how she could ever regain the memories she had lost. She remembered what Takua said to her, that even if it shattered his world, that he’d want to remember what was forgotten. She almost smiled to herself. For one so small, he was wiser than even he himself knew.

            The diminutive light of the stars became noticeable points of heat on Gali’s skin the deeper she went into meditation. The Seventh star burned the hottest. In her heightened mental state, she could also feel the earth stirring beneath her.

            The stirring became a quake. The quake grew stronger. Gali’s eyes flew open. Something told her this was no natural earthquake. Thunder rumbled in the sky overhead, and a dark cloud rolled over the seven toa stars, cutting off their light. A shadow swept across the ground as well, even spreading up the spires of Kini-Nui. Gali glanced about, feeling an unnatural cold seeping deep into her bones. Beyond Kini-Nui was a tall plateau that overlooked the temple. Gali saw the explosion of rock before she heard it, and she instinctively pulled out her twin aqua axes and held them at the ready.

            From the mound of shattered stone on the plateau emerged three tall lithe scaly creatures that she’d never seen before. They stood on two legs and carried long double-pointed metal staffs in their clawed hands. Their spines were arched and crested with long spiked protrusions. Their reptilian heads swiveled about, scanning the area. Gali stood her ground, waiting for a hint as to what they were planning.

            A pair of burning yellow eyes fell upon her, and the creature rattled its spines and opened its plated face to hiss in her direction. Its two companions also opened their faceplates, and Gali could see the slime and the flicking forked tongues. She shuttered in disgust.

            “Mata Nui,” she muttered as she caught one of them making a move with their staff. A crackling bolt of energy shot in her direction. She dove off the Kini-Nui suva and the spot she had just been standing on shattered to pieces. She sprinted down the temple stairs as the three creatures leapt down from the plateau after her. Her feet hit the grassy plain and she sprinted for the nearby river. The hissing of her pursuers grew closer behind her, and soon she could feel their hot breaths on her back. Gali twisted her body around and fired a jet of water from her aqua axes that knocked the creatures’ heads back for a moment. One of them opened its faceplate and let out an angry shriek as its forked tongue flicked into the air.

            Even then, the three creatures continued their pursuit. Gali sprinted harder. A bolt of energy whistled past her ear and blew a hole in the ground next to her. She felt her feet leave the ground for a moment, but she kicked her legs out and backflipped back onto her feet. She planted one foot and spun on her heel, using the momentum of her body to swing her axes as hard as she could, throwing a sharp blade of water at the creatures. This time they were ready for her attack, and they all ducked and rolled in different directions.

            Another bolt of energy struck directly in front of Gali’s feet, and she flew backwards further than she expected, and she landed flat on her back, her breath knocked out of her lungs. Before the creatures could attack again, Gali dove behind some boulders, and from there she slid under the surface of the nearby river.

            She crouched on the riverbed, keeping close to the bank under a rocky outcropping. She could see the wobbly images of the three creatures above the water’s surface. After a few moments, the creatures’ heads vanished from view. Gali surfaced as quietly as she could, watching the creatures from behind a boulder. The three hissed at each other, as if they were discussing their next plan of attack. Then they all locked themselves into a sitting position and their bodies rose into the air and shot forward. As they flew, the dark clouds in the sky followed them. Gali’s breath caught in her throat as she realized they were heading towards Ta-Koro.

            She dove back into the river, knifing through the water against its natural current. She followed it further inland until it ended in a lake near the outskirts of Ta-Wahi. She shot herself out of the water and as soon as her feet hit the rocky ground she broke into the most desperate sprint of her life. When she glanced backwards, she could see the creatures and their curse of shadows not far behind.

            Once the main gate of Ta-Koro came into view, she began shouting and waving her arms above her head.

            “Something’s coming! Something’s coming! Prepare yourselves, there’s something dangerous coming!” She leapt to the top of the wall, coming face to face with a Ta-Koro guardsman, who jumped in surprise. “Sound the alarm!” she commanded, and with a swift salute the guard took out a horn made from a shell and blew as hard as he could. Several more Ta-Koro guards followed suit, while others scrambled to close the gates and arm themselves. Inside the village was a mix of Ta- Po- and Ga-Matoran who were beginning to panic. Turaga Vakama was trying to calm them, but there was too much confusion. Gali was by his side in a second.

            “Wise one,” she gasped, out of breath, “There’s—these things—they can fly—I don’t know—where they…” Vakama met her eyes for a moment, then he focused on something above and behind her. Gali turned to see the three creatures descending upon the village.

            “Rahkshi. Shadows that cower in the depths. Exactly as foretold…” he whispered, his yellow eyes wide with equal parts fear and disgust. Gali spun and stood guard in front of him, her aqua axes crossed in front of her. The rahkshi were moments from landing. And seemingly from nowhere Tahu burst onto the scene, blasting them with fire. The creatures shrieked and scattered, and in turn matoran scrambled and stumbled and screamed in fear. Gali glanced at each rahkshi and noticed the color difference; one was brown, one blue, and the third was green. The brown and blue rahkshi were breaking everything in sight, knocking down walls and caving in roofs. The green rahkshi prowled about, leaving sickly green footprints on the ground. Tahu cornered the green one, jamming his twin swords into the ground and sending cracks towards the creature. It shrieked as lava oozed up from the cracks. Tahu surged forward and clashed his swords with the creature’s staff.

            Gali turned her attention to the brown one, which was picking through the rubble of a smashed hut. She left Turaga Vakama’s side and fired a jet of water at the creature’s head. Its head snapped back from the force of her blow but snapped forward again. It opened its faceplate to snarl at her. Gali swung her axes, but the creature caught them on its staff. It swung upwards, carrying her with it. She swung her legs, leading into a flip, freeing her axes and carrying her over the creature’s head. She landed with a skid, and she spun to face the rahkshi again. Then something exploded behind her, raining stones and rubble onto her back. She heard more matoran screams.

            Gali found herself between the brown and blue rahkshi while Tahu was still clashing with the green one. And there were still matoran and a Turaga to protect. She spun on her heel, slinging a bladed ring of water outwards. It knocked both creatures back for a mere second, and they were back to firing their explosive energy bolts.

            Nearby, a Po-Matoran and Ta-Matoran were stuck in a corner, shaking and holding each other in fear. Gali saw an energy bolt headed for them, and she shot forward, scooping the two matoran up and whisking them away before they could get hit. As she began herding the matoran away from the rahkshi, she caught a glimpse of Tahu pinning the green one under some rubble. The brown rahkshi climbed over the remains of a demolished hut and began to dig through it with the end of its staff. Gali’s heart seized as she saw the blue one creep towards Turaga Vakama.

            The elder stood his ground and swung his staff at the creature’s head. “Back, you foul creature!” he cried. Unfazed, the rahkshi raised its staff above its head. Thankfully Tahu jumped between Vakama and the rahkshi, blocking its staff with his swords.

            Gali continued leading the matoran away. Then, she spotted Hahli crouched under the rubble of a half-collapsed roof. The brown rahkshi was nearly on top of her, sifting through rocks and bits of crumpled metal. Gali fired a full-blast jet of water from her axes, knocking the rahkshi off the rubble pile. She dove under the rubble and grabbed Hahli and blasted the creature again while she brought the Ga-Matoran to the crowd of other scared villagers.

            “Open the gates!” Gali commanded, “Evacuate!” The matoran complied without question. Gali ran to Turaga Vakama’s side and lead the elder to the front of the village where the matoran were filing out of Ta-Koro. Tahu was still locked in combat with the blue rahkshi. It jammed its staff into the ground, breaking a slab of earth under Tahu’s feet and launching him backwards. He hit the ground hard and lay stunned for a moment. The brown rahkshi had resumed digging through rubble. The green rahkshi was digging itself out of the pile of stones it was trapped under. Gali took a deep breath and let it out. She clashed her aqua axes together and dove back into the fray.

            Before she could get a hit in, the ground under her feet blasted apart and sent her sailing through a partially collapsed wall. Her vision blurred for a moment, and she forced herself to her feet. Now Tahu was clashing with the brown and blue rahkshi at the same time, and the green one was nearly free from the rubble pile. She shot herself forward and slid across the ground, sweeping the legs of the brown and blue rahkshi. As the creatures lost their balance, Gali wasted no time slamming her axes onto the ground and shooting the rahkshi into the air with a powerful geyser blast. She leapt to her Toa brother’s side. He was panting heavily.

            “Where’s Pohatu?” Gali asked.

            “He went north,” Tahu said, catching his breath.

            “We have to get the matoran to safety, now!” she said. Tahu shot her an incredulous look.

            “Surrender?” he sounded offended at the idea. Suddenly Tahu whirled on the green rahkshi, which had tried pouncing on him from behind, his sword slicing one of its arms. It howled in pain but wasted no time bringing its staff down on Tahu, who summoned his kanohi shield around himself and Gali just in time for the weapon to bounce off. Tahu let his shield down and clashed his swords with the rahkshi again, and the two were locked together for a long time.

            Gali didn’t get the chance to help, because she heard the rapid footsteps other two rahkshi. She saw them running towards the front of the village, where matoran were still trying to evacuate. She blasted the two creatures with water from behind, and as they stumbled, she vaulted over them and blasted them from the front as well. As the two rahkshi reeled from the attack, Gali rushed over to the crowd of escaping matoran.

            “Go, faster! Hurry!” she barked at them, spurning them on. The rahkshi recovered and fixed their yellow eyes on the Toa of Water, hissing with their headplates open wide. They both pointed their staffs at the wall above the main gate and blasted it with combined energy. Gali swung her aqua axes and summoned a deluge of water to carry the remaining matoran out of the village before they were buried in the rubble.

            Gali let out a roar and summoned a larger deluge and swept the two rahkshi away. They both crashed into a wall. Gali started running back towards Tahu, but the ground exploded right under her feet, and she was thrown through another demolished hut. The world went black for a moment. Gali instinctively began dragging herself out of a pile of debris. Warm red blood dripped down her face and into one of her eyes. She scanned the area, realizing she couldn’t see the brown and blue rahkshi. She could see Tahu sparring with the green rahkshi.

            The rahkshi snarled and knocked one of Tahu’s swords away. As he stumbled the creature used the shaft of its weapon to knock him onto his back and pin him to the ground. Gali grunted in pain but forced herself onto her feet. She surged forward, firing a jet of water at the creature. In her desperation, she miscalculated the size of the blast, and both the rahkshi and Tahu got caught in the deluge.

            The rahkshi rolled away and scrambled back on its feet. It hissed in her direction and jammed the sharp end of its staff into the ground. A sickly green substance infected the stone itself and began spreading outwards. Gali rushed to Tahu’s side. He was lying on his back, groaning and dripping wet. Her breath caught in her throat as she saw the long jagged laceration across his left cheek, glowing the same green as the poison spreading on the ground towards them.

            “Tahu, I’m so sorry!” Gali reached a hand out to him. Tahu leapt to his feet.

            “It’s nothing,” he scoffed, retrieving his discarded sword. He started forward again but Gali grabbed his arm and pulled him backwards. When he flashed an annoyed look at her she gestured to the green taint spreading on the ground.

            “We’re not winning this fight, Tahu,” Gali said, “We need to regroup.”

            “If we’re still standing, we still have a cha—,”

            With a sudden fury, Gali grabbed the back of Tahu’s neck and turned his head towards the devastation of his village. “—Tahu, look around you! Ta-Koro is already lost!” The Toa of Fire looked sobered for a moment, then his features hardened with barely contained anger.

            “Fine,” he said through his teeth, “Let’s lose them.” Gali nodded, understanding. The two of them crossed their weapons. Their elemental powers combined, producing an explosion of steam that enveloped the immediate area. Gali could hear the rahkshi hissing and scraping about as she and Tahu slipped through a crack in the village wall. They came upon a cliff overlooking the lava river. Tahu attached the handles of his sword together and placed it at the edge. He stepped onto it and slid down onto the flowing molten liquid.

            “Gali, jump on!” he called over his shoulder. Gali was already mid-jump and landed on the lavaboard directly behind him. The two surfed down the river until the crowd of evacuating matoran came into view. They reached the bank of the lava river and joined Turaga Vakama at the back of the crowd of matoran. Many of them were injured, clinging to each other, dragging their feet further from their home as they hung their heads in sorrow. Gali could see the foundation of the village had been damaged beyond repair and had begun sinking into the lava lake it was built upon. One of the guard towers exploded, and the three rahkshi flew out of the village, sailing over all their heads and disappearing into the distance.

            Tahu clenched his fists, his knuckles turning white. “They could have destroyed us. Why didn’t they?”

            Turaga Vakama touched his arm. “They are seekers. Whatever they came for, they did not find.”

            “What were they after?” Gali asked.

            “Makuta fears for his spell of shadows,” Vakama said, his eyes troubled.

            “The Avohkii?”

            “Then that means,” Tahu paused for a moment, and his orange eyes widened, “Jaller and Takua!”

            “We’ll summon our brothers to find them,” Gali suggested. Tahu waved his hand dismissively and began walking the path into the Charred Forest.

            “Don’t trouble the others, sister. I’ll see to their safety myself.”

            “No, Tahu, no!” Gali snapped, stopping him in his tracks, “We must remain united! Have you truly learned nothing?!”

            Tahu heaved in angry sigh. He turned to look at Gali. The green gash on his face glowed with a sickly light. His orange eyes flashed green for a split second. “If you insist,” he hissed.

Chapter Text

            For the first time in too long, the Le-Wahi jungle was peaceful. The birds sang and insects hummed, and the sun blazed through the many-layered canopy of leaves and fronds overhead. Even in the daylight, the Avokii blazed bright in Jaller’s hand, pointing the way to the Seventh Toa. Takua was still silent. He still couldn’t quite gauge Jaller’s mood, and his throat seemed to close itself when he tried to ask.

            “Beautiful day,” Jaller said, rousing Takua out of his stupor. A small insect buzzed past Takua’s ear, and he smacked it against his neck.

            “Real buggy, though,” he grumbled, waving another insect away from his face, “It’s sticky, too. This is why I hate the jungle.”

            “How can you say that? It’s incredible!” Jaller gestured around them, and Takua could see the vines covered in small white flowers and the large palm fronds and the brightly colored berries on the bushes. His friend was right, but he wasn’t in the mood to agree. Silence fell between them again. Jaller held up the Avokhii, leading Pewku straight ahead on a path through a cluster of bushes.

            A rustling sound and heavy footsteps caused the Ussal to stop. Her eyestalks surveyed the area.

            “What are you doing, Pewku? Keep going!” Jaller urged.

            The Ussal made a clicking sound. Takua recognized it as a warning call. There was more rustling, the snapping of branches, and more heavy footsteps. Pewku turned and scuttled in a different direction.

            “Wait, Pewku!” Jaller said in protest. He tapped on her shell to change direction, and the Ussal obeyed with a reluctant whine, steering back the way the Avohkii was shining.

            “Hold on,” Takua said, telling Pewku to halt with a click of his tongue, “Is it the duty of the Herald to lead us towards something that wants to eat us?”

            “Oh, I’m sorry,” Jaller said with sarcasm dripping off his words, “Guess I should listen to the real Herald. Oh, wait, you wussed out, so now I’m in charge.”

            Takua was about to retort, when a large furry shape burst through the foliage and lunged down on them, prompting a scream from him and Jaller. Pewku squealed and jumped back, and Takua and Jaller instinctively clung to the edge of her shell. The hulking figure of an ash bear loomed over them, snarling through long sharp teeth. It stood on its hind legs and swung a large front paw at them. Takua and Jaller ducked before getting hit, and Pewku carried them away from the ash bear’s reach. She scuttled around a tree, while Takua could hear the beast roar and begin galloping after them.

            The ash bear appeared in front of them, and Takua and Jaller both screamed and ducked out of the way of its claws again. Pewku scuttled backwards, but her back hit a tree trunk. She let out another string of loud warning clicks. Takua clung to her shell, terrified, while Jaller threw the Avohkii into his travel bag and began climbing the tree.

            “What’re you—why’re you leaving me?!” Takua shrieked at him. The ash bear snarled and swatted at Pewku, who snapped her claws at it in retaliation. Jaller inched his way onto an overhanging branch and slowly stood up.

            “Jaller, what are you doing?”

            “Just watch!”

            The ash bear reared up on its hind legs to swipe at Takua and Pewku again. Just then, Jaller dropped from the tree and landed on its back. The rahi snarled and bucked its hind legs while Jaller kept a death grip on its fur. It backed away from Takua and Pewku, roaring in fury.

            “Great plan! What’s next?” Takua called out to Jaller as his friend clung onto the ash bear’s back for dear life. The rahi was about to rear up again, but a vine shot from somewhere in the trees and wrapped around the ash bear’s front paws. Before the rahi could react, a second vine tied up its back paws. The beast fell to one side, dumping Jaller onto the marshy jungle floor, and was then hoisted upside down into the trees as Toa Lewa came swinging from the other end of the vine.

            “Toa Lewa!” Takua cried with excitement. Pewku chirped happily as Takua slid off her back and bounded up to the Toa of Air. Toa Lewa flashed a grin at Takua. Jaller groaned and pushed himself to his feet, massaging the back of his head.

            “Mata Nui!” Toa Lewa said to him, “Where did you learn to bear-fight like that, little one?”

            “Ugh…right here, just now,” Jaller groaned.

            “Well, I say you’re a natural! Brave fire-spitter!”

            “I guess I better finish what I started,” Jaller said, unsheathing the guardstaff from his pack and pointing it at the rahi suspended above them.

            “Now, now, what’s that for?” Lewa stood between Jaller and the beast, “You and ash bear have no wrong-quarrel! She’s just doing her duty!” Lewa lowered the ash bear gently to the forest floor, giving her a gentle pat on the head as he loosened the vines around her paws, “If this was your home-realm, you’d do the same.” The rahi rolled onto her feet, and Lewa stood between her and the two matoran and Ussal crab. “Go now, sister-bear,” he whispered, and the rahi made a soft humming sound in her throat before turning away and lumbering back into the jungle foliage.

            Jaller cracked a smile and stowed his guardstaff away in his travel bag. Takua let out a sigh of relief. Toa Lewa turned to face them.

            “Word is deep-wood that you seek a Seventh Toa,” he said.

            “He seeks,” Takua pointed at Jaller, “I follow. He’s the Herald, I’m just his biographer.” He could feel Jaller’s eyes on him, but he ignored him and focused on Toa Lewa’s excited expression instead.

            “If Toa Lewa helped on your search, might he be a spirit-lift?” the Toa of Air said with a grin. Takua and Jaller exchanged an astonished look.

            “You? With us?” Takua asked.

            “We’d be honored to have you walk with us,” Jaller said with a slight bow of his head.

            “Walk?” Toa Lewa laughed, “Not-never! If you ride with me, there’ll be no foot-walking! Just air-flying!” He brought two fingers to his lips and let out a loud whistle. A familiar bird call answered and a large gukko swooped down and landed next to the matoran. “Ever wind-fly a gukko bird?”

            Takua felt a nervous skip in his heart. His mind flashed to the battle over Le-Koro all those months ago. “I’ve been a Second,” he said, “But I’ve, uh, never flown one myself…”

            “Then today’s for quick-learning!” Toa Lewa scooped up Takua and Jaller and tossed them onto the massive bird’s back. Takua was in front, and Jaller hung onto him from behind. The gukko began revving up its wings. “Stay sharp and follow well!” Toa Lewa said over his shoulder as he took a running start, whipped out his air katanas, and leapt into the air. He soared over the jungle canopy in seconds, and the gukko followed. Takua grasped its feathery neck as the sensation of flying overtook him. He felt Jaller’s arms tighten around him as the wind buffeted his face and made his eyes water.

            The gukko caught up to Toa Lewa quickly, and the Toa of Air angled his air katanas to carry him into a midair loop and end up right next to the bird and the two matoran.

            “Lead the way, Herald!” he called out to Jaller. The beam of light from the Avohkii appeared from behind Takua, pointing in the direction of Mount Ihu. As the air grew colder, and the mists grew thicker, Takua shivered. Soon they were surrounded with swirling white snow, and only the light of the Avohkii could cut through.

            The gukko bird pitched to the side, nearly throwing Takua and Jaller off its back.

            “Hey, what’s the deal?” Takua shouted. He caught a glimpse of a snowy cliff edge as the bird veered to the other side. Suddenly the tops of snow-covered evergreen trees heaved towards them from below. The gukko caught itself on one, and began spiraling downwards, shrieking in distress. Takua held on for as long as he could, but soon his hand slipped, and he and Jaller crashed through a snowbank and tumbled head over heels down a short hill.

            Takua sat up, blinking until his blurry vision cleared. He dug into his travel bag and pulled out a thick coat. He glanced sideways at Jaller, who was standing himself up and groaning in pain. He had already put on his own winter coat. Takua rubbed his hands together as he watched his friend hold up the Avohkii and turn every which way until it lit up again.

            “Well, we’re still on the right path,” he sighed, rolling one of his shoulders, “Despite that landing.”

            Takua felt a jolt of realization. “Pewku!” he cried, “We forgot Pewku!” He scrambled around, shouting his beloved pet’s name. Jaller caught his arm, and Takua’s voice died in his throat.

            “Too late. She’ll have to find her own way home.”

            Takua sank to the ground, wrapping his arms around his knees.

            “Unfriendly skies in ice-brother’s domain,” Toa Lewa said, appearing by their side. He sheathed his air katanas, then suddenly he gestured for Takua and Jaller to keep quiet. Toa Lewa’s eyes stared off into the distance, wide with concern. He crept towards the edge of a nearby cliff. Takua was about to ask what was wrong, then a drumbeat reached his ears. He exchanged a look with Jaller before slowly walking to Toa Lewa’s side.

            The drumbeat pattern repeated a few times. Toa Lewa’s earlier enthusiasm vanished before Takua’s eyes, his fists clenching tight.

            “The drums of Le-Koro bring a sorry-bad story,” The Toa of Air said in a near whisper. Takua and Jaller waited for him to speak again. After a few more rounds of drums, Toa Lewa said, “Your village…has fallen to…rahkshi.”

            Takua felt Jaller stiffen next to him as a cold weight pressed down on his own chest. He didn’t know what “rahkshi” meant, but the name alone carried sinister connotations.

            “The Makuta’s sons!” Toa Lewa turned to the two matoran, his green eyes shining with sorrow.

            “Ta-Koro…fallen?” Jaller’s voice was small. Takua saw his grip tighten around the Avohkii. “I should have been there.” His friend gazed out over the icy cliff towards the peak on Mangai Volcano. He turned to Toa Lewa. “I must return!”

            “Sorry, fire-spitter, past-late to help now,” Toa Lewa said sadly, “The Avohkii most needs you.”

            Jaller shoved the Toa stone into Takua’s hands. “Takua will continue in my place!”

            Takua shoved back, “Nuh, uh! No way! You accepted this duty!”

            “I accepted your duty!” Jaller snapped.

            “Stop!” Toa Lewa interjected, “What is this duty-quarrel? We all have a duty to Mata Nui! No time to in-fight!”

            Takua and Jaller exchanged an ashamed look. Jaller took back the Avohkii, gripping it in both his hands. He hung his head in grief. Takua just felt cold, and not from the icy environment they were standing in. The mighty fortress of Ta-Koro, destroyed? Takua never would have guessed it possible. A shadow passed over the three of them, and Takua’s heart froze as he saw the encroaching cover of darkness spreading across the blue sky, the jungle canopy and the snowy mountain slopes. He blinked to readjust his eyes to the dimness. Toa Lewa moved towards them, scanning the darkened sky.

            “I must go be with the Toa,” he said. The Toa of Air turned to Jaller, placing a hand on his shoulder, “And then I’ll go to your village, Jaller.” Toa Lewa placed a hand on his own chest, “Heart-promise,” he said, his green eyes full of sincerity.

            Jaller seemed unable to speak for a moment. He glanced up at the Toa of Air, his yellow eyes shining with grief. “I…I can’t thank you enough, Toa,” he finally said. Toa Lewa nodded solemnly, whirled to face the cliff, dove off and unsheathed his air katanas. Takua and Jaller watched as he soared upwards into the clouded sky and off in the direction of Mangai Volcano.

            Soon after Takua and Jaller began their trek up the slopes of Mount Ihu, they found themselves caught in whiteout conditions. The only thing Takua could see was the yellow glow of the Avohkii. The icy winds howled and cut straight through his winter coat. His shaking hands numbed in seconds. He blew his white breath onto them and rubbed them together.

            Minutes melted into hours, and Takua stopped in his tracks, making out the irregular shape of a stone carving he’d definitely seen before.

            “Stop!” he called out to Jaller. His friend made it to his side, bringing the Avohkii’s glow with him. “Does something here look familiar?”

            “Besides everything?” Jaller said, barely visible in the swirling white.

            “I mean this,” Takua pointed at the carving, “We passed it a million times. And look!” He pointed ahead to two sets of small matoran footprints in the snow. “Those are ours!”

            “Well, don’t blame me! I’m just following the Avohkii.”

            “Alright, then let’s freeze to death because the Avohkii says so!”

            “Well, maybe our path would be straighter if the real Herald had the stone!”

            “The real Herald has the stone!” Takua let out an angry white puff from his mouth. Jaller turned away from him, holding the Avohkii aloft. He wasn’t sure, but the stone looked a bit dimmer than before. He sighed, trudging after his friend. “I couldn’t find water if I fell out a canoe,” he grumbled.

            “Well, what do you think I can find?” Jaller’s last syllable was cut off with a grunt of pain as he ran into something hard and fell to the ground. A gust of wind cleared away some of the whiteness, and Takua jumped out of his skin at the sight of a large white borok looming over him and Jaller. He grabbed his friend, pulling him away from the creature.

            “Wait,” Jaller said, “It’s frozen.” Takua let out a loud breath of relief, his heart hammering in his chest. Just as he was sinking to his knees, the crunching of footsteps in the snow brought him back on high alert.

            With the flash of a silver blade, the blizzard cleared. And Toa Kopaka stood before the two matoran, peering down at them with his cold cybernetic eye.

            “Toa Kopaka!” Jaller sprung to his feet and gave a bow, “How did you find us?”

            “It was you that were following me,” the Toa of Ice said.

            “We were?” Takua exchanged a confused look with Jaller. Toa Kopaka promptly turned away from them and started up the slope.

            “Wait!” Takua said, “We didn’t mean to! We were lost!”

            “We’re on a mission. I suppose you’ve heard of it?” Jaller added.

            “No,” Kopaka said without looking back.

            “We’ve been sent to find the Seventh Toa. See, Takua was down in the tunnel where the lava break is, where he’s not supposed to be, by the way—,”

            Toa Kopaka held a hand up, silencing Jaller. “I’ll bring you to Ko-Koro. You can tell your story there.” He continued up the mountain, his white hair and cape fluttering in the cold breeze.

            After a moment of hesitation, Takua and Jaller scampered after the Toa.

*          *          *

            Gali and Tahu led the migration of the Ta-Matoran in the direction of Ga-Koro, keeping an eye on her Toa brother all the while. The slash across the cheek he’d gotten from the poisonous rahkshi’s staff was beginning to turn the skin around it a sickly grey. She felt a pang of guilt, but it was overshadowed by the sense of dread brought by their new enemies. Vakama had told her that they were the “sons” of Makuta, made from pieces of his essence.

            She wondered how he would know that, but she pushed the worry aside. There were more pressing matters to deal with.

            “Toa Lewa approaches!” a matoran voice cried out, and Gali’s gaze snapped upwards. Sure enough, she could see her brother Toa descending from the clouded sky. He landed lightly in front of her and Tahu.

            “Brother, sister! I heard the news,” he said with a crestfallen look on his face.

            “Ta-Koro is gone,” Tahu said, his voice heavy with grief, “Buried by the very lava that sustained it.” His orange eyes flashed green for a moment, and Tahu flinched.

            “Tahu!” Gali flew to his side, touching the side of his face with the poisonous laceration. Tahu brushed her hand away.

            “You worry about scratches,” he hissed, “My village is gone!” His eyes softened. “Your power was nothing. My power…was nothing…”

            Lewa clasped the back of Tahu’s neck and touched foreheads with him. “We are same-hearted, brother,” he stepped back and pumped a fist, “And that heart will quicken us to stop the evil-spread!”

            Gali stepped between them, putting her arms around them both. “First, we need to unite with our brothers. Together we are strong!”

            Tahu shrugged out of her embrace and stalked away from her and Lewa.

*          *          *

            Takua and Jaller trotted after Toa Kopaka in the deep snow in silence for quite a while. The Toa of Ice was not a conversationalist. Normally Takua would have tried breaking up the silence with questions, but he was at a loss for words. He was too choked up with dread. Since hearing the news of Ta-Koro’s destruction and witnessing the cover of darkness sweep across the land, Takua couldn’t shake the heavy cold presence within himself. He had felt similarly before, and he knew it was Makuta, but something was different this time. It was as if the Master of Darkness himself had his eyes on him.

            Toa Kopaka stopped short, and Takua skidded on a patch of ice in the attempt to avoid running into him. Jaller also slipped and caught himself before falling into the snow. Takua followed Toa Kopaka’s fixed stare and saw the source of his sudden halt.

            The gates to Ko-Koro were blown apart, reduced to a pile of stone and ice that blocked the entrance to the village. The cold in Takua’s chest intensified, making him shiver. Toa Kopaka’s cybernetic eye clicked and whirred as it scanned the area.

            “No…” the Toa of Ice said under his breath. His other eye widened. Before Takua or Jaller could blink, Toa Kopaka dove in front of them and blocked a crackling bolt of energy with his shield. It bounced off and flew into the distance. From the snowy slopes, three large reptilian creatures holding staffs rose into the air. They were positioned as if they were sitting, but they hovered far above the ground. One of them rattled the spines on its back and with a shriek it sent another bolt of energy from its staff towards the Toa and two matoran. Kopaka grabbed Jaller and Takua and leapt out of the way of the charge that exploded the icy ground on impact. He placed them on their feet and threw his shield down onto the snow.

            “Go!” Kopaka barked.

            Takua pushed Jaller onto the shield before jumping onto it himself. The two sailed down the sheer slope, knifing through the cold air.

            “What were those things?!” Jaller shouted over the screaming wind, “Were those the…?”

            “Rahkshi!” Takua shouted back.

            Toa Kopaka appeared alongside them, skating down the slope with the twin halves of his blade attached to the soles of his boots. Bolt after bolt whizzed by, blowing chunks of ice and rock in all directions. The Toa of Ice glanced backwards at their pursuers, tossing ice spikes from his hands.

            Jaller had gripped the sides of the Toa’s shield in an attempt to steer it, but it proved difficult. Up ahead a rock formation jutted out of the snow, threatening a swift end to their descent. With a wave of his hand, Toa Kopaka summoned an ice slide to carry the shield and the two matoran around the rock and back onto the relative safety of the icy slope. When they landed, Takua let out a relieved laugh.

            More explosions surrounded them, hitting closer to them each moment. Takua could feel the rain of pebbles and ice chips on his head. Toa Kopaka skated around the matoran, tossing more ice spikes at the rahkshi in the air behind them.

            The ground right under the Toa’s shield burst apart, tossing Jaller, Takua, and Toa Kopaka in all directions. Takua tumbled head over heels then skidded to a stop. Jaller tumbled next to him. Takua’s head throbbed painfully with every heartbeat, and his shoulders and back almost hurt too much for him to get up at first. He turned his neck with a wince of pain, and saw Jaller, lying still face-down in the snow.

            “Jaller!” Takua lunged forward, grasping his friend’s shoulders. Jaller hung limp in his arms. “Jaller!” Takua cried louder, shaking his shoulders. Jaller’s yellow eyes fluttered open and took a moment to refocus. He looked at Takua with momentary confusion. Then they both noticed three shadows looming over their heads.

            The rahkshi were hideous, more terrifying than any infected rahi or any of the Borok. They were tall, lean, scaly, covered in spikes, and their faces opened to reveal a mouth of slimy sharp teeth and a long forked tongue. All three hissed at the two matoran.

            Takua glanced around frantically. Further up the slope was Toa Kopaka, lying in a snowbank, seemingly unconscious. But the rahkshi paid no attention to him and went straight for Takua and Jaller…why? Takua felt a lightning strike in his mind.

            “The Avohkii!” he cried out, snatching the stone out of Jaller’s bag and sprinting down the slope with it before his friend could form a thought. As luck would have it, Takua also spotted Toa Kopaka’s shield, and he grabbed it as he ran. He could hear the Makuta’s spawn shrieking behind him. With gravity on his side, Takua raced down the mountain until he came upon a lake. He threw himself onto the water’s surface, using the shield as a raft. He placed the Avohkii onto his lap and paddled with his hands, gritting his teeth at the icy cold of the water.

            The rahkshi were nearly upon him. They were all readying their staffs to fire at the doomed Chronicler. Far behind them, on the shore of the lake, a recovered Toa Kopaka thrust his blade forwards and shot a long sharp icicle that knifed through the air and pierced through all three rahkshi at once. All three tumbled into the water. The Toa of Ice spun his blade in his hand then stabbed it into the water’s edge, freezing the lake over in seconds.

            A clawed hand burst from the lake to grab at Takua, who yelped in fear, but the hand quickly iced over. Takua panted for a moment, his throat sore and dry from all the screaming and the high-speed chase in the cold. He grasped the Avohkii in his hands. He could feel its warmth. And he could have sworn it was glowing brighter than before.

            “Takua!” Jaller bounded up to him, his eyes shining with relief. Takua stood and hugged his friend. Toa Kopaka approached them and retrieved his shield.

            “Good moves,” the Toa of Ice said.

            “Even I get lucky sometimes,” Takua laughed.

            “Not luck. It’s what you do that makes you a hero,” Toa Kopaka said. A small, rare smile turned up the corners of his mouth. He patted Takua on the shoulder. He then turned back in the direction of the lake shore, and Takua quickly picked up the sounds of skittering feet.

            He glanced up, his heart swelling as the broad form of his beloved pet Ussal bounded towards him, chirping happily.

            “Pewku!” Takua crashed into her, hugging her shell as she hopped and bounced and trilled. “You came all the way from the jungle! You’re such a good girl, yes you are!”

            Jaller chuckled beside him, giving the excited Ussal a few pats. “Not bad, maybe Pewku should be the Herald! Right, Toa Kopak—,” Jaller cut himself off. Takua glanced back and saw the Toa of Ice walking away from them, back up the slopes of the mountain. “He just left us here,” Jaller said, his brow furrowed.

            “He must see to his village,” Takua said with a pang of sadness. The gates of Ko-Koro had been collapsed; who knew how extensive the damage was inside, how many Ko-Matoran had been hurt? He sighed, handing Jaller the Avohkii. Jaller stared at it for a moment.

            “What you did back there,” he said, “Looked pretty Herald-like. You sure you don’t want to hang onto it?”

            Takua pushed the stone to his friend’s chest. “Tempting,” he said, “but no.”

Chapter Text

            The Avohkii’s light led them across Ko-Wahi, and soon the ice on the slopes grew scarcer. Takua and Jaller shed their winter coats as the air warmed. They traversed the rocky terrain that marked the border of Onu-Wahi and soon found themselves crossing a ridge of small mountains and coming to a tunnel opening. A well-eroded stone totem marked the entrance, with barely legible matoran characters spelling out “Onu-Koro Highway.”

            “Doesn’t look like it’s been used in a while,” Takua said, “And we don’t have a lightstone.”

            Jaller nudged him and held up the Avohkii with a condescending look on his face. He entered the tunnel first, the stone lighting the way. Pewku bounced after the Captain of the Guard. Takua sighed at his own foolishness, then quickly felt the cold dread of Makuta pressing at his insides again. Too many bad things happened underground. He trudged after his friend and pet.

            The tunnel ceilings were low and the paths branching and serpentine. It was no wonder matoran weren’t using this highway anymore. Takua followed the yellow glow of the Avhokii for a long while, long enough to give his mind time to wander. He glanced down the forking paths as he and his companions passed by. One caught his attention and drew him away from the Avohkii’s light. The tunnel was overgrown with a strange weed that glowed blue in the dark. There were also glowing matoran characters carved into the walls, mostly just descriptions of the glowing plant species that could be found underground.

            Takua plucked a few stalks of the glowing weed, holding them up to his head to give himself antennas. He chuckled playfully.

            “Hey Jaller!” he said, then realized that he was alone. He cursed himself. Of all the times to wander off…

            Takua…

            An icy needle pierced through him. The cold voice was all too familiar.

            “Uh, Jaller? Pewku? Guys, where’d you go?” Takua squeaked in terror.

            Takua… the voice breathed into his ear. Takua dropped the glowing weed and began to run.

            “Jaller? Jaller?!” Takua soon found himself in total darkness. He hit a stone wall and fell onto his backside. He panted heavily, panic surging through his body. The cold inside his chest spread until he felt as if he were submerged in icy water, with no way to swim back to the surface.

            Shadows are everywhere. And where they are, so am I.

            Takua’s heart was trying its best to break out of his ribcage. He scooted across the floor, feeling for the walls of the tunnel. His hands hit stone, and he leaned against the wall to bring himself to his feet.

            “I know who you are,” Takua said into the dark, his throat constricted, “I’m…not afraid.”

            Even my shadows cannot hide your fear.

            Takua felt along the wall, hoping the tunnel led somewhere with light.

            Or the truth…

            “What truth?” Takua gulped, his shallow breathing doing nothing to calm his racing heart.

            That you will not find the Seventh Toa. Deep down, you know it.

            Takua continued blindly down the tunnel. He stopped short when a pair of glowing red eyes materialized in front of him. His knees weakened and he sank to the floor of the tunnel.

            “So I won’t, maybe Jaller will,” Takua said in a small voice. The disembodied eyes blazed brighter, bathing the tunnel in foreboding red light.

            And if he doesn’t, he will die because of you.

            Takua felt there was a very real possibility that he would die from sheer fright. Then guilt flooded his mind; this was all his fault. Jaller had a target painted on his back because of him. He took up the mantle of Herald, when it was supposed to be Takua’s burden. The red eyes of the Makuta burned through him, looking almost expectant.

            Bring me the Avohkii, Takua. Bring it to me, and you won’t lose your friend.

            “No!” Takua blurted, “I won’t let everyone down!”

            You fail them more if you refuse. For the stone, your villages, and Jaller will be spared. Makuta’s eyes burned brighter still. Don’t be a fool.

            “No, I can’t!” Takua cried, even as the eyes faded away and left him standing in the pitch dark. He found himself panting again. Jaller is going to die. Jaller is going to die. It’s all his fault. Every village on Mata Nui is going to be destroyed. It’s his fault.

            “Takua?” A yellow light enveloped Takua, and he jumped at the sight of Jaller and Pewku approaching. The sight of his friend only increased his anxiety. “The stone is pointing this way,” Jaller beckoned to Takua with a jerk of his head. He started walking away. Takua was rooted in place.

            “So, where’d you wander off to?”

            “Jaller,” Takua said, swallowing hard, “Um, about the Avohkii…”

            “What about it?” Jaller asked, then turned back with a smirk, “Are you ready to take it? Finally?”

            “I can’t,” Takua croaked. His eyes stung. “I can’t go with you.”

            Jaller looked stunned, like Takua had just punched him in the face. “What? Why?”

            “I can’t—I can’t explain,” Takua said in a quavering voice.

            “Well, that’s just great,” Jaller’s voice hardened, his yellow eyes glaring Takua down, “First you stick me with your duty, and then you ditch me?”

            “My duty is to myself!” Takua blurted, turning his back to his friend, “I quit! Just…take the stone and go!” His feet began carrying him away from Jaller, and he didn’t care where he was going. He just needed to get away from everything.

            “Fine,” Jaller’s defiant voice shouted behind him, “But I won’t give up. I’ll find the Seventh Toa whether you’re the true Herald or not!”

            The tunnel grew dark. Takua didn’t care anymore. He heard the scuttling footsteps of Pewku approach. Without a word, Takua climbed onto her back and let her carry him through the pitch-black tunnels. He let stinging tears slide down his face as darkness surrounded and filled him. Useless weakling, idiot, he told himself.

*          *          *

            Takua had no idea how much time had passed in the darkness, and he didn’t care. Pewku kept moving through the tunnels, even though Takua gave her no instructions. She seemed to sense his despair, because she made a soft cooing noise. He gave her no feedback, no praise or reprimands. He simply became numb as the tears dried on his face.

            The only thoughts in his head were the words of the Makuta, the promise of sparing the island of death and destruction if Takua gave him the Avohkii. Surely it was an empty promise. There was no reason to take Makuta’s word at face value. Perhaps it was all a warning that no matter what Takua did, the whole island was doomed to fall to Makuta’s shadows. So, there was nothing he could do. There was no point in trying to be a hero.

            Takua barely noticed that Pewku was now carrying him through tunnels lit by mounted lightstones, signifying that Onu-Koro was nearby. He didn’t care. He let her take him to the front gates, where a pair of Onu-Matoran guards let them in without question. Inside the village was a great commotion. Practically all of Onu-Koro was gathered around the village center, where Toa Pohatu and Toa Onua stood upon a platform above the matoran crowd.

            “Matoran of Onu-Koro,” Toa Pohatu announced, “the prophecy of the Seventh Toa is about to be fulfilled!” All the gathered Onu-Matoran cheered. “Right now, as we speak, the Captain of the Guard of Ta-Koro and Takua the Chronicler seek this legendary hero, using the great artifact: The Avohkii!”

            Pewku carried Takua through the crowd, which parted to let them through. Whispers of confusion slowly replaced the enthusiastic cheers at the Toa of Stone’s speech.

            “Chronicler, where’s the Herald?” Toa Pohatu asked. Takua raised his head, looking up at him. He slid off Pewku’s back.

            “We got…separated,” he said, “After we met the rahkshi.”

            Toa Onua and Toa Pohatu exchanged a quizzical look. The gathered Onu-Matoran buzzed with worry.

            “What’s a rahkshi?” Toa Pohatu asked.

            As if to answer the Toa of Stone’s question, the large village chamber began to shake. Cries of panic and confusion rose from the crowd. The wall behind Toa Onua and Toa Pohatu crumbled and collapsed, and three more rahkshi appeared. Takua blinked, and panic coursed through him as he realized these three were different colors from the ones Toa Kopaka froze in that lake.

            “Those!” he said in a shaking voice, “Except—different ones!”

            “Clear the village! And close the tunnels behind you!” Toa Onua commanded. The Onu-Matoran scattered and headed towards Onu-Koro’s various exits. Takua was frozen in place. Pewku began making her loud warning clicks. Toa Pohatu pulled out his climbing claw weapons, and Toa Onua unsheathed his twin quake breaker drills, and the two of them faced the rahkshi.

            Toa Onua made the first move. He jammed his weapons into the ground and sent a massive wave of earth towards the three creatures. The wave broke over them, and the rahkshi rose from the rubble, seemingly unaffected. Then all three leapt in different directions. Toa Pohatu activated his kanohi and ran after one. Another began smashing the Onu-Koro huts. And the third started for another area of the village but was quickly stopped by Toa Onua.

            At first, the Toa of Earth held his own well against the rahkshi. He blocked every blow from the creature’s staff, crossed his quake breakers in front of himself, and knocked the creature backwards with a strong blast of shockwave energy. But the rahkshi quickly gained the upper hand; it swung its staff harder and faster, until it was too much for the Toa of Earth to keep up with. The rahkshi managed to knock both his weapons out of his hands.

            Toa Onua gritted his teeth, and he began fighting back with his bare hands. He caught the shaft of the rahkshi’s staff and pushed hard, even as the creature pushed back, causing his feet to skid backwards. The Toa of Earth replanted his feet and summoned small bands of earth to keep them planted. But Takua could see the Toa beginning to falter. He could see purple tendrils of Toa Onua’s elemental energy draining from him and entering the rahkshi’s staff. The earthen bands keeping Toa Onua’s feet in place crumbled to dust, and his grip on the rahkshi’s staff loosened. The creature hissed in triumph as the Toa of Earth’s shaking hands fell loose at his sides, and he collapsed limply onto the floor.

            Toa Pohatu saw his brother fall mid-run. “Onua!” he cried as he skidded and changed direction. Another rahkshi shot a red ring of energy that struck him square in the chest, and the Toa of Stone froze in place, panting, shaking, his eyes wide with fear. “No…” he whispered, “Brother Onua…”

            Onu-Matoran were still scrambling to evacuate the village chamber, running in every direction. One rahkshi blasted the roof off a nearby dwelling, and pieces of earth flew into the air and landed close to where Takua stood.

            He looked up at the cursed Makuta spawn. The monsters that just took out two Toa with barely a fight. The monsters that were destroying his island home. Takua felt a hard cold ball form in his chest. He grabbed a kohlii stick that was leaning against a nearby wall, and he swiftly mounted Pewku.

            “Yah, Pewku!” he said, and his beloved pet obeyed, carrying him forward as fast as her legs could go. She scuttled up to the rahkshi that had just knocked the roof off an Onu-Matoran hut. Takua readied the kohlii stick for a swing. The creature knocked it away, and Takua lost his grip immediately. The rahkshi’s faceplate opened, and the monster shrieked inches from Takua’s face, bathing him in its putrid breath.

            This is the stupidest thing I have ever done, Takua thought hopelessly. Pewku was squeaking and trying to run him away from the rahkshi, but the creature pursued and was nearly upon them again.

            “Rahkshi!” Toa Tahu’s bellow echoed through the cavern, and a bolt of fire struck the pursuing rahkshi in the face. It shrieked as it came face to face with the Toa of Fire. Takua barely had time to feel relief, because he felt himself getting scooped into the air and flown away from the village center.

            He realized Toa Lewa had him slung under his arm, and Pewku under the other. The Toa of Air flew him to one of the village exits, placing him and Pewku onto their feet on the cavern floor.

            “Quick-speed to Jaller! Warn him!” Toa Lewa said, then flew back to the village center, where Toa Gali had also arrived to join the fight.

            Takua sighed. Leaving Jaller had been a bad idea. A worse idea than fighting a rahkshi with a kohlii stick. With renewed resolve, he climbed aboard Pewku once again and tapped her shell to get her going. Instead of heading through the village exit, she headed towards the back of the village where the ventilation shafts were.

            “Pewku? Where are you going, girl?”

            His pet Ussal began climbing up the vertical shafts, and Takua had to hold onto the edge of her shell and let his legs dangle. It dawned on him that this was probably a faster way to the surface than any of the highway tunnels, and he felt a small smile on his face.

            “Atta girl, Pewku. Good, smart girl, Pewku,” he encouraged.

            Then a clawed hand burst through the wall to grab at them. Takua yelped as Pewku managed to jump out of its reach. A rahkshi head poked through the hole and shrieked at Takua.

            “Keep going, girl! You’re doing great!” Takua said, and his Ussal continued upwards. He tightened his grip, feeling sweat prickle all over his body.

            Gali raced to Pohatu’s side as Lewa went to check on Onua. Pohatu was frozen in place, trembling, eyes wide and unfocused. She glanced between him and the three new rahkshi that raged through Onu-Koro. They were different than the ones at Ta-Koro. And they had new abilities, ones far beyond the first three it seemed. She brought her attention back to the Toa of Stone.

            “Brother?” she said, touching his arm, “It’s okay. You’re okay now. We’re here. We’ll be united again.”

            Pohatu kept staring ahead, his breathing rapid and his hands shaking. Gali stepped away from him, then tossed a small orb of water at his face. Pohatu jerked out of his stupor, coughing and wiping the water off with the back of his hand.

            “Gali?” he said as if seeing her for the first time. Then his eyes widened. “Duck!”

            Gali dove to the floor as Pohatu grabbed a nearby boulder and tossed it at a rahkshi. The creature got knocked back a pace, and it shrieked at him. Gali nodded to him, and leapt to her feet, and began bombarding the creature with blade after blade of water. Pohatu threw more rocks into the air and kicked them in the rahkshi’s direction. One rock bounced off the creature and sailed across the battlefield and hit the one that was locked in combat with Tahu.

            As the creature stumbled and turned its head away, Tahu took advantage and sliced at its armored hide and left burns with his fully ignited swords. The rahkshi spun its staff and fired a ring of energy that struck Tahu in the face. The Toa of Fire hit the stone floor and was engulfed in crackling black energy. He lay still as the energy dissolved into the air.

            With a surge of anger, Gali blasted the rahkshi away, and before it hit the floor, she struck the ground and sent the creature flying to the ceiling with a geyser blast. A blade of air struck it midair, sending it crashing through a wall of the cavern. Gali nodded to Lewa, who flashed a grin. She ran to Tahu’s side.

            “Brother!” she said, shaking his shoulder. Tahu bolted upwards and whirled to face her. Gali’s breath caught in her throat. The greyish infection around the green slash in his cheek had spread all over his body. Both his eyes blazed with a sickly green light.

            “Fire has no brothers,” he said, his voice crackling with rage, “Fire consumes all!” He slammed his twin swords to the ground, cracking the floor and sending jets of flame towards Gali, who backflipped out of range. She replanted her feet and watched for his next move.

            “Tahu? What are you doing?” she said. The Toa of Fire’s face was twisted with fury. He advanced on her, crossing his ignited twin swords in front of himself. As he readied a swing, Gali lunged at him and countered with a blow from one of her aqua axes, causing a burst of steam. The two of them clashes weapons a few times, then jumped back away from each other.

            “It’s me, Tahu. It’s Gali! Remember?”

            Tahu pointed his swords towards the cavern ceiling and created a massive fiery tornado above his head, then brought it down on her. Gali twisted and flipped out of the way, breaking out in a sweat as the heat licked across her face. She gritted her teeth and shot a jet stream of water directly at Tahu’s chest. The Toa of Fire’s flames fizzled out, and he was forced back a few steps as Gali kept pushing.

            “Remember who you are! Remember your destiny!” Gali cried out to him. Tahu grunted and strained against the deluge.

            Then Kopaka appeared and touched his blade to Tahu’s throat, freezing him over in an instant. Gali ceased her onslaught and raced to Kopaka’s side. She grabbed his shoulder and turned him towards her.

            “He was poisoned. And that other rahkshi’s power made it spread. But we can still save him!”

            Kopaka nodded to Gali. Lewa appeared at their sides, and he helped Kopaka lift the frozen Toa of Fire to carry him out of the chamber. Gali surveyed the area. Onu-Koro was nearly reduced to rubble, with barely a hut still standing. But she breathed a sigh of relief to see that Onua had recovered, and he and Pohatu had managed to bury the three rahkshi in rubble.

            But another quake shook the chamber, and the creatures emerged from the rubble pile. They loomed over the Toa of Earth and Stone. And the ceiling collapsed, blocking them all from view. Gali gasped, starting after them, but Kopaka caught her arm.

            “Tahu needs us,” he said. Gali wrestled her arm out of Kopaka’s grip, she took a step forward, then realized she no longer could move. She looked down to see her feet were frozen to the floor. She flashed a glare at Kopaka. The look in his icy blue eye softened as he placed a hand on her shoulder.

            “Those two have a higher chance of survival than him,” the Toa of Ice said. Gali stared him down, then dropped her gaze to the floor. Kopaka released the ice from her feet, and she trudged after him. She looked back towards the Onu-Koro tavern.

            Mata Nui, she prayed, please protect them.

            Takua and Pewku reached the end of the ventilation shaft and had emerged on the snow-covered surface. Takua breathed in a lungful of fresh air, and as he let it out, he suddenly noticed how exhausted he was. His whole body ached. His head was pounding. He collapsed off Pewku’s back and lay on the snow for a moment. It was so soft. He wished he could fall asleep right there.

            But he knew it was not the time. He needed to find Jaller, apologize for being an idiot, and find the Seventh Toa. He forced himself to stand. Pewku chirped at him, and he patted her on the head. And the two of them began their trek across the mountain range that led out of Onu-Wahi.

Chapter Text

            Lewa, Kopaka, and Gali made it out of the tunnels and into the jungles of Le-Wahi. They managed to find a small clearing with a large stone slab to lay the frozen Tahu on. Lewa grabbed one of Tahu’s stiff hands, and Gali grabbed the other. Kopaka pressed the hilt of his sword onto Tahu’s ankles. Gali nodded to Kopaka, who melted the ice off the Toa of Fire’s body with a wave of his free hand.

            As soon as he thawed out, Tahu’s eyes snapped open, and he began to thrash. While keeping an iron grip on his hands and feet, Lewa Gali and Kopaka took turns using a length of thick vine to tie down Tahu’s limbs. The Toa of Fire twisted and pulled at the restraints, which thankfully held against his strength. His eyes still glowed green, the same color as the open wound on his face. He snarled like an angry rahi. Kopaka glanced over him, his cybernetic eye clicking rapidly.

            “This looks bad,” he said. Lewa’s brow furrowed with worry. Gali rubbed her hands together.

            “I think I know the cure,” Gali said, “Lewa, ready his sword.” The Toa of Air bent over and picked up one of Tahu’s discarded swords from the jungle floor. “Kopaka,” Gali said, and the Toa of Ice held out his own blade. Lewa and Kopaka crossed the two weapons in front of Tahu’s chest. As soon as the blades made contact, they reacted and radiated alternating waves of heat and cold into the Toa of Fire, who roared in pain and thrashed even harder against his restraints.

            “That’s enough!” Gali said after a few minutes, and Lewa and Kopaka withdrew the blades, their combined energy fizzling out. Tahu let out a groan, closed his eyes, and his body went limp.

            “Brother!” Lewa cried, squeezing the Toa of Fire’s hand. Kopaka’s face was stone. Gali took in a deep breath, gathering every drop of her elemental energy and focusing it into her hands. She formed an orb of water above Tahu’s limp form and let it drop onto his chest. The orb expanded and engulfed his whole body, shimmering with every perceptible color. After a few seconds, the water drained away, leaving Tahu’s whole body completely clear of the infection. All that was left of the gash in his face was a scar. He was still motionless, and Gali couldn’t tell if he was still breathing. But at least he looked peaceful.

            Gali’s vision swam and felt herself beginning to collapse. Kopaka caught her in his arms before she hit the jungle floor. Her vision blacked out for a moment.

            “You did all you could,” he whispered to her. Kopaka gently led Gali to the bank of a nearby stream while Lewa stayed by Tahu’s side. Gali fell to her knees and dipped her hands into the water. She felt the energy slowly rippling and flowing back into her. She sighed heavily.

            “Kopaka,” she said, “I’ve been getting this awful feeling lately. I feel as if we’ve lost our unity…” Kopaka was quiet, as he normally was, but Gali glanced over her shoulder just to be sure he was still there.

            He wasn’t.

*          *          *

            Takua dragged himself through the mountain pass, fighting against the exhaustion weighing him down. He let Pewku take the lead, hoping she could track Jaller by scent. He gazed over the nearby cliff that overlooked Le-Wahi. The jungle was blanketed in a dead silence. The dark trees swayed in the stiff cold breeze without making a sound. No rahi birds sang. There were no more Le-Koro drums. Dark clouds rolled in the sky above.

            The whole island had become unrecognizable. Takua longed for the blue sky, the blazing yellow sun, the green foliage. He wished to hear the buzz of rahi activity, and the laughing of working matoran. He wished for all that was broken to be whole again.

            He shivered. Makuta’s cold dark influence swirled in his chest. He pressed a hand against it, fighting it down. He gritted his teeth. He wasn’t going to let the Master of Shadows win. Not this time. He straightened his posture, striding forward with renewed vigor. He was going to complete this quest. He wasn’t going to let Jaller die. Warmth blossomed in his chest, and energy flowed back into his limbs. He felt as if his body was glowing.

            Pewku chirped and nudged his hand.

            “What is it, girl?”

            The Ussal trotted in a circle around Takua, trilled, then scuttled ahead.

            “Wait for me, Pewku!” Takua scampered after her. After a few moments, he felt himself shaking all over. He was unsure if it was nerves or excitement, until he skidded to a stop. It wasn’t him; it was an earthquake.

            Up ahead on the mountain pass Takua could see some boulders break off the cliff above and tumble down the slopes. And he heard a familiar scream. He sprinted towards it.

            “Jaller?!” Takua stopped at the cliff edge, his gaze sweeping the area. “Jaller! I’m here!”

            The quake finally ceased. And Takua’s ears picked up a grunt of pain.

            “T-Takua…?”

            Takua ran further down the path, following the voice of his friend. “Jaller! Jaller, where are you?!”

            “I—I’m—right—here! I—can’t—I’m—slipping!”

            Takua kneeled over the cliff edge and saw Jaller clinging to the side of the mountain, his knuckles bone white and sweat beading his forehead.

            “I’m here, Jaller!”

            Jaller’s head snapped up and he met Takua’s eyes. Takua lay on his stomach and stretched his arm down as far as it could go. “Come on, Jaller, grab on!”

            Jaller shifted his grip slightly, then yelped as his foot slipped. Takua slid himself further down the cliff face, stretching his arm until he feared his shoulder would dislocate.

            “Just—a little—more!” Takua grunted as Jaller’s fingertips barely brushed his. His friend clenched his jaw and lunged upwards, grabbing onto Takua’s wrist with a vicelike grip. Takua used every ounce of strength inside his body to pull. As soon as Jaller was safe on the ledge, Takua fell onto his back, panting.

            “Well, well, well,” Jaller looked down at him, “Whatever happened to ‘I quit’?”

            Takua’s chest heaved for a moment, then he forced himself to sit up and look his friend in the eye.

            “Jaller, I am the biggest kohlii-head in all of Mata Nui,” he said, “And leaving you behind was stupid and selfish. I’m really, really, really sorry.”

            Jaller narrowed his eyes at Takua, then punched him hard in the arm.

            “Ow!” Takua cried, then his protest dissolved into a chuckle, “Okay, I deserved that.”

            Jaller cracked a grin and punched him again. Takua retaliated with a punch to Jaller’s arm. When Jaller went for another swing of his fist, Takua caught his arm. The Jaller caught Takua’s other arm, and the two began rolling across the rocky ground. The tussle ended with Jaller pinning Takua onto his back. The two of them laughed heartily for a long while.

            “Depending on how the rest of this goes,” Jaller said, nearly out of breath from laughing, “I might consider forgiving you.” He stood and offered Takua his hand, “Fair?”

            Takua felt a grin spread on his face from ear to ear. “Fair,” he agreed, allowing his best friend to pull him to his feet. Takua felt his face fall. He’d nearly forgotten.

            “Bad news,” he said, “More rahkshi. They’ve taken Onu-koro.”

            Jaller dug the Avohkii out of his travel bag and gave Takua a quizzical look. “The Avohkii was never at Onu-Koro.”

            “They don’t want the Avhokii. They’re looking for the Herald.”

            “You sure?”

            “Yeah.”

            Jaller searched Takua’s face for a moment, then the two of them exchanged a nod. Jaller held up the Avohkii and let it shine its guiding light forward. The beam was brighter than before. The two friends continued their journey, with Pewku trotting after them while making happy chirping noises.

*          *          *

            With her elemental power restored, Gali stayed on the bank of the stream to meditate. While she was concerned for the fate of the island, her mind was mostly occupied with Tahu’s health. She worried her cure may have only given him a peaceful passing. She worried that if the Toa team lost a member, that their destiny would remain unfulfilled. For a moment anger flashed through her mind. Tahu was such a stubborn fool sometimes. He never listened, and he was especially indifferent to her pleas for keeping the team united.

            Despite that, he was still her brother in arms. She didn’t want him to die. And she couldn’t help but blame herself a little bit. After all, it was her mistake that got him poisoned in the first place. She breathed deep and let all these thoughts fall away. The jungle was too quiet. But it helped her concentrate.

            She sat in silence until the leaves of a nearby shrub rustled, wrenching her out of her meditation. She glanced over her shoulder to see Lewa emerging from the jungle undergrowth, his green eyes sparkling with excitement.

            “Sister, he is open-eyed!”

            Gali jumped to her feet and trotted after the Toa of Air, back to the clearing with the stone slab. Tahu was sitting upright on the slab, his chest heaving. Gali flew to his side.

            “Tahu, are you well?” she asked.

            “No,” Tahu said, rubbing the welts on his wrists from the restraints, “No, I’m not well.”

            Gali stared at him for a moment. Tahu raised his head, and his orange eyes met her blue ones. His hard stare softened.

            “But, I am alive,” he said, “And in your debt, my sister,” he held out a fist. Gali smiled and gently bumped it with her own.

Chapter Text

            Takua and Jaller made their way down the slopes of the mountain path and through the outskirts of the Le-Wahi jungle. The light of the Avohkii guided them across a grassy plain where the towering spires of Kini-Nui rose to greet them. As they neared the Great Temple, the Avohkii’s light dimmed until they reached the amaja circle. Then the stone’s light went out. Jaller held it up, pointing it in every direction, but still it remained dark.

            “This must be it,” Jaller said with an air of wonder in his voice. But Takua felt a flicker of frustration.

            “No way,” he said, “We’ve been all over the island just to wind up here?”

            “Why not? It’s a sacred place.”

            “Are you sure this thing is working right?” Takua snatched the Avohkii from Jaller’s hands and shook it hard. A bright yellow beam of light shot from the stone and struck one of the Great Temple’s spires, breaking off a large chunk of rock and sending it crashing to the ground.

            “What did you do?!” Jaller cried.

            “Oops,” Takua said. Jaller fixed him with a stare of awe.

            “How did you…?”

            Jaller didn’t have time to finish his question. The lithe bestial forms of the first group of three rahkshi came climbing down the temple spires. All three rattled their dorsal spines and snarled down at the two matoran with their hideous face plates wide open.

            “Give me the stone!” Jaller reached out his hand to Takua.

            “Jaller, no!” Takua looked his friend in the eye, “We both know the Avohkii chose me. I’m the true Herald.”

            Jaller stared back for a moment, then gave Takua a small smile and a nod. The two of them whirled to face the Makuta’s spawn. The three creatures took position next to each other, pointing their staffs at Takua and Jaller.

            “Run!” Takua cried, and the two matoran leapt off the main plateau and raced down the temple steps. The floor exploded behind them. Just as they were reaching the base of the temple, a fissure opened in the ground in front of them, and the second group of three rahkshi emerged. Takua and Jaller skidded to a stop, and backed away, while the first group of rahkshi shrieked behind them.

            The two friends stood back-to-back. Takua pressed the Avohkii to his chest while Jaller whipped out his guardstaff and pointed it at the advancing creatures. The rahkshi were closing in fast. Just before Takua could formulate any kind of escape strategy, Toa Tahu dropped down from seemingly nowhere, landing in front of him and surrounding himself, Takua, and Jaller with his kanohi shield. Toa Gali swept three rahkshi away with a large wave, and Lewa did the same with a strong gale with the remaining three.

            Takua let out a laugh of relief. He also caught a glimpse of Toa Tahu’s face, which had been completely cleared of the poison, and all that remained of his injury was a scar across his cheek. The Toa of Fire’s eyes flashed with a renewed strength.

            “We are done running,” he declared as the rahkshi and began advancing on the Toa. Just as Toa Tahu was igniting his swords, Toa Lewa swooped down and whisked Takua and Jaller away from the action, placing them on top of the suva back at the top of the temple stairs. The Toa of Air spun and dove back towards the ground below. Three rahkshi crept towards the two toa as Gali stood protectively in front of Takua and Jaller as the other three rahkshi advanced towards her and the two matoran.

            Toa Lewa thrust his air katanas upwards, summoning a small cyclone that circled the temple, whipping up sand in its wake. Toa Tahu infused the cyclone with a fiery blaze, and the green, blue, and brown rahkshi were caught up inside it in the blink of an eye.

            Meanwhile Toa Gali was clashing her axes with the staffs of the other three rahkshi, ducking and dodging and flipping out of the way of their attacks. The white rahkshi swung its staff down at Jaller, but Toa Gali’s axe blocked it last minute, and with a mighty swing of one of her aqua axes, the staff flew out of the creature’s clawed hand. As the white rahkshi dove to retrieve its weapon, the red and black rahkshi attempted to flank the Toa of Water. But she ducked under their staffs and swept their legs with her axes.

            “Come this way!” she called to Takua and Jaller, who followed close behind her without question. They descended the stairs once again, and Takua could see the whirling vortex of fire that still carried the first three rahkshi in a circle around Toa Tahu and Toa Lewa. Soon the flames dissipated, and a spiral-shaped cage of glass solidified and cooled around the rahkshi, trapping them for good. Toa Tahu and Toa Lewa fist bumped.

            Toa Gali met with her two Toa brothers, with Takua and Jaller close behind. The other three rahkshi were now leering down at them all from the stairs. Toa Tahu surrounded Takua and Jaller and himself with his kanohi shield.

            “Lewa, Gali, split up!” he said, and his fellow Toa did as he said. The white rahkshi fired a bolt of its anger energy at the Toa of Fire, but his shield absorbed it. The creature hissed but continued its advance, while the black and red rahkshi went after Toa Lewa and Toa Gali respectively.

            Takua huddled with Jaller behind Toa Tahu as his shield was battered by the white rahkshi. Just as the creature raised its staff over its head, Toa Tahu let the shield drop and he swung his swords horizontally across the creature’s torso. The blades bounced off its hide without leaving a mark. The rahkshi shrieked and swung down at the Toa of Fire, who ducked and rolled out of the way of its staff.

            Jaller grabbed Takua by the arm, wrenching him up the stairs as Toa Lewa was knocked towards them by the black colored rahkshi, which then turned and began stalking the matoran. Takua tightened his grip on the Avohkii and ran after his friend. Up ahead, Toa Gali was deadlocked with the red rahkshi, her aqua axes caught on the shaft of its staff. Red energy began rippling forth, surrounding the Toa of Water. Her blue eyes widened in fear, and her grip faltered somewhat, giving the rahkshi the opportunity to swipe her off her feet. She landed on her back with a grunt.

            “Toa Gali!” Takua cried. The red rahkshi’s head swiveled in his direction, and it fixed its beady eyes on the Chronicler. He gulped. Jaller ran in front of him, pointing his guard staff at the creature. A boulder flew from nowhere and collided with the red rahkshi’s head, knocking it over.

            Takua nearly cheered as Toa Pohatu, Toa Onua, and Toa Kopaka emerged from a hole that had just opened in the floor in front of the temple’s suva. Toa Onua brought his quake breakers down on the black rahkshi, which was in the process of draining Toa Lewa. As the Toa of Earth managed to knock back the black rahkshi, Toa Lewa was helped to his feet by Toa Kopaka. Toa Gali, having just recovered, ran to his, Toa Onua, and Toa Pohatu’s side.

            “Brothers!” she said, “We thought we lost you!”

            “You might have,” Toa Onua said with a smile, “If it weren’t for our icy friend.”

            Toa Gali rushed forward and wrapped her arms around Toa Kopaka, who looked stunned for a moment, but reluctantly returned the embrace.

            At last, all six Toa regrouped in the center of the temple. The black and white rahkshi both began firing their energies at them. The red rahkshi still lay stunned on the floor close to the stairs. Takua and Jaller made their way around the temple, keeping their eyes on the battle while keeping a reasonable distance from it.

            Toa Onua sent shockwaves through the floor of the temple while Toa Pohatu kicked up dislodged boulders. The two rahkshi lost their footing and were battered before they could react. The white rahkshi was back on its feet first, and shot its crackling anger energy at the Toa, but Toa Tahu blocked it with his shield. He shot fire at it, but as it dodged it was frozen on the spot by Kopaka. The black rahkshi lifted its staff above its head and brought down one of its pointed ends into the temple floor, and a ripple of purple energy radiated outwards.

            Before any of the Toa could be drained, Toa Lewa and Toa Gali combined their powers to form a small thunderstorm around the creature. Toa Onua and Toa Pohatu broke up the ground beneath its feet and added a bombardment of stone to the storm. Toa Tahu raised his swords and melted the stones to lava. The creature was battered and singed. Part of its armor-plated hide began to melt off. With one last swing of his blade, Toa Kopaka froze it as well.

            There was a moment of stillness, and Takua felt a sigh of relief escape his throat. He began an excited trot towards the Toa, but then he felt something cold and hard strike the center of his back. Immediately a powerful sickening fear bloomed and enveloped him, filling him with the sensation of drowning in freezing water.

            Takua…

            His heart seized at the sound of Makuta whispering in his ear. The edges of his vision darkened.

            Fear me…

            Takua couldn’t move, couldn’t scream. His shaking hands gripped the Avohkii so tight he was sure his knuckles would snap. The red rahkshi approached, holding its staff over its head. Takua watched the creature’s weapon swing downwards in slow motion.

            Jaller slid in front of him, his guardstaff swinging upwards to meet the creature’s staff. When it made contact, the flimsy matoran weapon shattered into a million pieces. Jaller stumbled backwards for a moment, then leapt forward. Takua wanted to scream, but he was still frozen by the rahkshi’s fear power. Jaller grabbed onto the shaft of the rahkshi’s staff, gripping it with both hands. His friend froze and began to tremble with fear as the rahkshi’s red energy rippled out and engulfed the Captain of the Guard’s body. The rahkshi lifted Jaller in the air and threw him across the temple plateau. Jaller tumbled head over heels, coming to a stop at the base of the suva, where the back of his head struck a broken chunk of rock that had been dislodged from it. He lay still.

            Takua rushed to his friend’s side. He cradled Jaller’s head in his hand, and noticed it was wet. His breath caught in his throat as he withdrew his hand and stared at the bright red blood that dripped from his fingers. He looked down at his best friend. Jaller’s yellow eyes were bleary and sightless. His chest heaved, and his hand reached out towards Takua. Takua’s vision began to blur as he grasped Jaller’s hand in his, squeezing it hard.

            “I’m supposed to make the sacrifice,” Takua choked out. The tears were already sliding out of his eyes. Despite the blood pooling under his head, Jaller had a small smile on his face.

            “No, the duty was mine,” his friend said in a raspy whisper. His free hand found the Avohkii on the floor next to him; Takua hadn’t even noticed he had dropped it. Jaller held it up to Takua, his breathing shallow. “You know who you are. You were always different.” Takua grabbed the Avohkii. He could feel the strength leave Jaller’s hand as his friend went limp. His last breath rattled out, and his chest lay still. Takua choked on his sobs, his sight completely overtaken by the blur of tears. He wrapped his arms around Jaller’s lifeless form, holding it close. His ear was on Jaller’s chest, and a fresh wave of tears flowed out when he realized he couldn’t hear the beat of his friend’s heart.

            The world around him faded into darkness. He couldn’t feel anything other than a crushing cold weight closing around his ribcage. After a few minutes suspended in this all-encompassing grief, Takua felt a wave of warmth radiating out of the Avohkii, which he was still holding in his hands. He stared at its golden surface, at the ancient matoran dialect decorating its surface. He remembered when he had first found the stone, how it had felt right in his hands. With that thought he felt its warmth spread up his arms and flood into his chest.

            Jaller’s words came back to him. You know who you are. Takua rose to his feet, still blind to the world around him. He found himself embracing the Avohkii’s warmth, letting it engulf him like the rays of the rising sun. His tears dried on his face. A fiery strength blossomed in his chest and travelled through his veins out to his limbs. He could feel his muscles swell. His mind flooded with clarity. He took in a long breath, and as he let it out, his body cooled, and he could feel the ground under his feet again. He opened his eyes, and found himself standing before the red rahkshi, only this time he was closer to its eye level than before.

            He raised a hand, and by instinct fired a golden beam of light from his palm, which struck the monster in its chest and paralyzed it. It crumpled to the temple floor and lay still, wisps of black smoke drifting off its body. He turned his head to see all six Toa Nuva staring in awe at him. He looked down at himself. He had grown a full bio taller, and he was clothed in gleaming white and gold armor. He reached around to his backplate, and found a pointed staff attached to it. With a wave of his new weapon he summoned a pillar of light to shine from the suva.

            “I am Takanuva,” his voice rang out, “Toa of Light.”

            Takanuva’s gaze lowered to Jaller lying by the suva. He knelt next to him and lifted the small body into his arms. The Toa Nuva watched him as he placed Jaller’s body into the pillar of light above the suva. His friend’s limp form rose into the air, suspended in the light. The wound on the back of his head closed.

            Takanuva stared at his friend. A fresh wave of grief swelled within him, and more tears spilled out. His heart stung. He felt arms around him and suddenly realized Gali was embracing him. He wrapped his arms around her, heaving a shaky sigh.

            “I’m so sorry,” The Toa of Water said. The embrace ended, and Takanuva stepped back a pace, wiping his tears on the back of his hand. He laughed through the grief.

            “All this, just to discover who I am?” he said, gazing back at the shaft of light that held the body of his best friend. The Toa Nuva stood around the suva, their heads bowed. Takanuva suddenly realized Pewku was by his side, nudging her head into his hand. He smiled fondly down at her, petting her shell.

Footsteps sounded behind him, and Takanuva turned to see Turaga Vakama ascending the stairs of Kini-Nui.

            “It seems you’ve found your own destiny,” the elder said, a mix of sadness and pride shining in his yellow eyes. He reached the final stair and walked to Takanuva’s side. He looked up at Jaller’s suspended body in the pillar of light. He bowed his head in grief. After a few quiet moments Turaga Vakama turned back to the new Toa of Light.

            “Mata Nui is wiser than all. The path you walked was not to be here, but in here,” Vakama tapped the end of his Turaga staff on Takanuva’s chest, “You understand your destiny is clear.”

            Takanuva nodded to the elder. He looked back up at Jaller one last time. “Jaller’s sacrifice will not be in vain.”

            The Toa of Light approached the limp form of the red rahkshi, its scaly hide singed from his newfound light powers. His fingers found a plate of armor on its back that opened, and after plunging his hand inside, it came away gripping a large wriggling grey worm-like creature with protruding spikes in its back and a slimy mouth from which flicked a long, forked tongue.

            He turned away from the rahkshi’s husk and approached the Toa Nuva.

            “What do you plan on doing with that?” Tahu asked.

            “What is the Makuta’s will return to him,” Takanuva said. He walked past the Toa of Fire and found a small round platform on the temple floor to stand on.

            “Well, we’re coming with you, aren’t we, new brother?” Pohatu said, stepping towards Takanuva.

            “No, I’m going alone,” Takanuva said.

            “But united we defeated the rahkshi!” Pohatu almost looked hurt.

            “Surely it’ll take nothing less to defeat the Makuta,” Tahu added.

            “I know my destiny,” Takanuva said, still gripping the wriggling creature in his hands, “Yours lie with the matoran and the Turaga. Gather them and wait for my return.” The platform lurched under his feet and began carrying him downwards.

            “Takanuva!” Gali stepped forward, her blue eyes pleading.

            Takanuva smiled at her. “Don’t worry,” he said, “This is what I was made for.” He sank into the temple floor, and soon the Toa of Water was lost from view. Takanuva was surrounded by darkness on all sides. He held a disgusting spawn of Makuta in his hands. And yet, he had never felt more clarity in his mind than ever before. His heart was still heavy with Jaller’s passing, but he also felt a sense of vigor to make him proud. He wasn’t the scared little matoran Chronicler anymore. And he was going to make Makuta pay for everything he’d done to his people and his island home.

Chapter Text

            Hahli had seen the pillar of light from the the beachfront, and as she made her way to Kini-Nui with Turaga Nokama and her fellow Ga-Matoran, she felt a sense of excitement. Nobody had to say out loud that the Seventh Toa had finally arrived. However, as the temple grew closer, and the light grew brighter, she could tell something was wrong. After ascending the stairs, she gasped as her eyes adjusted to the light, and Jaller’s limp body came into view. It was suspended inside the light pillar and lay unnaturally still. She ran up to the suva, looking up at her dear friend.

            Jaller had been something to aspire to: brave, loyal, strong, true. In the months getting to know him, Hahli had felt herself grow more confident in herself. But seeing him like this, it was  her worst fear coming true. The evil of Makuta had even conquered the infallible Captain of the Guard of Ta-Koro. He looked so small up there. Tears pricked the edges of her eyes. All around her, matoran would approach the suva and bow their heads in respect and grief before retreating to make room for others to pay their respects. Kapura stepped up next to her, and she saw a tear fall as he bowed his head. She placed a hand on the Ta-matoran’s shoulder. He met her gaze with a sad smile, wiping his eyes on the back of his hand. Macku placed her arm around Hahli’s shoulders, and she leaned into her friend’s neck, gazing up at Jaller.

            “I don’t understand why he’d insist on going alone.” The voice of Toa Tahu reached her ears, and Hahli’s attention turned to the Toa Nuva gathered at the edge of the temple plateau.

            “Well, it does make sense,” Toa Lewa piped up, “Light-Toa facing the Dark One? Just like a story a Chronicler should write!”

            Something about the word “Chronicler” struck a chord in Hahli. She left Macku’s side and crossed the plateau to where the Toa were gathered.

            “And what if he gets himself killed?” Toa Kopaka said, his arms firmly folded across his chest, “And how would we know what happened?”

            “Where is he?” Hahli spoke up. Her voice drew the attention of all six Toa Nuva. Months ago, she would have felt small among them. But not anymore. “Where did he go?”

            Toa Lewa raised his hands as if she had threatened to throw something at him, “Now, now, little one. You can’t be head-thinking of going into the dark-tunnels after Takanuva, are you?”

            “Taka…nuva?” as soon as the name left Hahli’s mouth, she realized what must have happened. She looked back at Jaller, and pride swelled in her chest. It seemed Takua the Chronicler was the hero Jaller had been looking for all along. The Herald had succeeded in his quest, just as she knew he would. She turned back to the Toa. “Just tell me where he went.”

            The Toa exchanged looks with one another.

            “The position for Chronicler is open now,” Hahli insisted, “And I want to fill it.”

            Toa Gali was the first to smiled and nod. The other Toa followed suit. Toa Gali then gestured to a small circular panel on the temple floor. Hahli strode forward and stepped onto it, flinching as it lurched and began sinking into the ground.

            “Stay safe!” Toa Gali called down after her. Hahli took a deep breath as she was engulfed in darkness. She fought down the fear as she waited for the platform to stop moving. She thought about Takua, remembered his kind smile, his affinity for adventure. Though she may not have guessed him to be the Seventh Toa before, it made perfect sense to her now. Her mind went back to the Borok attack in her home village, how he had launched himself into the air to place himself between the enemy and all of Ga-Koro. Even if he had no chance of fighting them off on his own. He had been braver than he had given himself credit.

            Hahli steeled herself as the platform ground to a stop. She resolved to be as brave as Takua, as brave as Jaller. The tunnel that lay before her glowed faintly, much to her relief. She followed that glow, each step more certain than the last.

*          *          *

            The tunnel was long and winding. Takanuva could feel the Makuta’s presence all around him. But he was no longer afraid. That cold dark feeling no longer had power over him. He looked down at the creature he had pulled out of the rahkshi. It was truly hideous, and the feeling of its flexing sinewy muscles and slippery skin under his fingers was nauseating. But when he reached a split in the tunnel, the loathsome thing would squirm harder and point its head in a direction, leading him to its dark master.

            The sound of footsteps behind him pricked his ears, and he stopped walking. He turned his head and listened. The footsteps quickened. And soon a familiar figure stepped into his light.

            “Hahli?” he gasped. Not only did he not expect her to come after him, but he also was struck at how much smaller she looked to him now. Even so, her blue eyes shone with a determination he’d only seen before on the kohlii field.

            “It’s time someone was your Chronicler,” she said. Takanuva smiled and nodded, feeling a small swell of pride. He waited for her to reach his side before continuing walking.

            Soon Takanuva and Hahli reached the end of the tunnel, which opened into a large dark chamber. The ceiling was held up by massive green crystalline pillars. By the light that emanated from his body, Takanuva could also see a large silvery pool in the center of the chamber. Hahli took a step forward, but he gestured for her to stop where she was. The nasty creature in his hands wriggled harder and began shrieking. A wave of disgust surged within him, and Takanuva threw the creature onto the floor. It immediately slithered away and disappeared on the opposite side of the chamber, where stood a massive door. A thick cloud of darkness hovered in front of it.

            A pair of burning red eyes opened from within the cloud, and the black energy coalesced into a tall muscular armored bipedal being. Takanuva stared at it, planting his feet and reaching behind him to grab the handle of his new light staff.

            “You can no longer hide in shadow,” he said. He glanced behind him, checking on Hahli. She was hiding behind the entrance to the chamber, her blue eyes wide. He turned back to the figure ghosting towards him.

            “I am shadow,” the cold deep voice said, “The shadow that guards the gate.” Makuta’s voice echoed through the chamber. “Now run along, or accept your doom.”

            Takuanuva steeled himself, feeling his new Toa power humming under the surface of his skin. “I am done running,” he said, stepping towards his enemy, “Mata Nui will be awakened this day.” He glanced behind him. “Hahli, summon the matoran!”

            “It’s done!” Hahli nodded, and retreated back into the tunnels.

            When Takanuva turned back to Makuta, he was struck by his size. The Master of Shadows towered over him the same way the Toa towered over him when he was a matoran. But Makuta’s presence was the opposite of comforting. A familiar prick of fear stung the back of his mind, and he could feel his throat dry up. Makuta peered down at him with scarlet red eyes. His skin was grey, and his wild hair and beard was jet black tinged with red at the ends. He wore heavy armor and a long dark cape hung off his shoulders, the ends of which dissolved into the shadows that surrounded his body.

            “Toa of Light,” Makuta whispered, “Now so bold…but at heart, you’re still just Takua.”

            Takanuva swallowed, gripping his light staff tight. His heart began to beat faster. He could feel his body heating up, and his light brightened.

            “You failed to save your friend,” Makuta continued, “You didn’t even warn him.”

            Takanuva felt struck by those words. It was true. Jaller did die. And it was his fault. Jaller died saving him. And he couldn’t do anything to stop it. Takanuva instinctively took a step backwards as Makuta took a step closer to him, his red eyes burning through the Toa of Light. For a moment Takanuva felt like he regressed back to his old self, the small, scared, weak little matoran named Takua. Once again, he’d gotten himself in way over his head.

            “You didn’t fulfill your end of the bargain,” Makuta continued, “It was the Avohkii in exchange for the safety of your people.”

            Takanuva found his voice again, “I made no such bargain with you!” He thrust his staff forward, and shot a beam of light at Makuta, who drifted out of the way effortlessly. A deep mocking laugh rumbled from his chest.

            “And now, for your next great failure,” the Master of Shadows summoned a long, pointed staff from his essence and brandished it with one hand. Without a second thought, Takanuva leapt forward, leading with a swing of his light staff. A vortex of darkness surrounded Makuta and Takanuva’s weapon met empty air. He whirled and barely got his staff up in time to block a blow from Makuta’s weapon. As he held the Master of Shadows at bay, Takanuva could feel his enemy’s strength. But he held his ground.

            Makuta gave a sudden push, startling Takanuva for a moment, but he managed to dive under Makuta’s next blow. He swung and his light staff struck Makuta across the face, leaving a long gash across his cheek. Makuta snapped his head back, and the gash healed with a wisp of smoke. He raised his staff above his head, and a new vortex of shadow engulfed him. Takanuva struck the butt end of his light staff on the chamber floor, sending a bright burst of light outwards. The dark chamber became as bright as daylight for a brief moment, and Makuta hissed in pain, shielding his eyes. With a sweep of his cape, a cloud of darkness billowed out, eating its way through Takanuva’s light.

            And from the cloud coalesced three tall Toa-like figures, each holding a staff like Takanuva. The Toa of Light spun his staff and planted his feet. He watched as his three shadow clones approached and spread Makuta’s darkness in their wake.

            He felt a cold stab of pain in his back, and he spun on his heel, leading with a swing of his light staff. It collided with Makuta’s shadow staff, and the two were deadlocked once again. Takanuva grunted in pain as he held the Master of Shadows at bay, all while the wound in his back radiated a cold burning sensation up and down his spine. He could see his three shadow clones closing in on him in the corner of his eye.

            Takanuva let himself lean back for a moment, then threw his body backwards and swung his legs up, kicking Makuta’s staff out of his hands. He pushed off the ground with his hands and landed back on his feet. The shadow staff dissipated before it hit the floor. Takanuva created a flash of light from his staff, which fizzled out his three shadow clones. Makuta cracked a crooked grin. Shadow energy gathered in his hands, and a new staff formed.

            “If you win, you may try to open the gate,” the Master of Shadows hissed, “When you lose, I’ll have your head.”

            Takanuva gripped his light staff in both his hands.

            “I will not lose!” he snarled back.

*          *          *

            Hahli had made her way back through the tunnels, back to the platform that led her back up to the plateau of Kini-Nui. Her heart raced from the running, from seeing the sheer size and might of the Makuta firsthand, but also from the urgency of her mission. Once the platform ground to a halt, and the clouded daylight stained her vision, Hahli rushed towards the six Turaga of Mata Nui, who had gathered nearby the suva, where Jaller’s body still hovered. She stumbled up to Turaga Vakama, who waited patiently as she caught her breath.

            “I bring word from Takanuva!” she panted, “He wants us to follow. We are going to awaken Mata Nui today!”

            “A light among the shadows,” Turaga Vakama said under his breath. The elder of Ta-Koro glanced over at his fellow Turaga, and whispers began travelling between them all. Hahli scanned Kini-Nui and noticed how many matoran had congregated on the hills and plains surrounding the great temple. They were too far away to have heard what she had said, but the crowd was stirred into confusion and speculation regardless. Turaga Vakama moved over to Hahli’s side, facing the Turaga, the Toa Nuva, and the gathered matoran population.

             “The prophecy is fulfilled! We must go!” he announced. But Turaga Onewa stepped up to him, his brow furrowed with worry.

            “If we descend into those tunnels, we may never return!” the Turaga of Po-Koro said.

            The crowd erupted in a din of uncertainty and fear. The Turaga began an argument amongst themselves. The Toa Nuva also began a discussion, all talking over one another about what their next steps should be. Hahli sighed. This wasn’t going to get them anywhere.

*          *          *

            Takanuva ducked under the rain of shattered crystals as Makuta smashed one of the pillars that held up the ceiling of the chamber. He rolled and replanted his feet, holding his light staff in front of himself. Makuta waved his shadow staff, and a ball of his energy formed on the end of it. He hurled it at Takanuva’s head, who caught it on his own staff, turning it into a ball of light. He threw it back, but Makuta spun out of the way. The light ball hit another pillar, and it crumbled to the floor.

            Thick black tendrils erupted from Makuta’s back and spiraled in Takanuva’s direction. He leapt up and kicked off a nearby pillar, flipping forward and landing in front of the Makuta. He stabbed at the Master of Shadows with his light staff and fired a concentrated beam of gold light. Makuta blocked the beam with his own staff then knocked Takanuva backwards with a swing. Takanuva felt his back hit a pillar, the crystal cracking and splintering from the impact.

            He landed on his feet. Then his knees gave out and his palms hit the floor. His vision swam for a moment and grew darker. He lifted his head to see Makuta’s red eyes leering down at him with sadistic pleasure. Darkness billowed and flowed around them both like ink spilled into water. Takanuva took a deep breath and gathered his energies.

            But a large cold hand gripped him by the throat and lifted him from the floor until his feet dangled. Takanuva kicked and thrashed as his throat was crushed. Through the blinding pain, he began gathering his energies again. His light power began to glow through his skin, and he released it all in one golden explosion. Takanuva hit the floor again as Makuta’s roar reverberated through the chamber.

            Takanuva forced himself to stand and glanced about for his discarded light staff. He spotted it near another crystalline pillar and dove after it. Makuta’s shadow tendrils stabbed into the floor around him, and he felt one pierce through his back armor. A sharp cold pain began to spread throughout his torso. He tripped but thankfully landed mere inches from his weapon on the floor. His fingers clasped the shaft, and he rolled himself onto his back just in time to fire a light beam into Makuta’s eyes. The Master of Shadows roared, his hands pressed over his face.

            Makuta dissolved into the shadows and was lost from view for a few moments. In that time, Takanuva focused his light power to heal the wound on his back. He panted for a moment as he recovered, feeling sweat drip down his neck. His hands were shaking, his breathing painfully shallow. As the adrenaline faded from his system, he was beginning to worry how much longer he could keep the fight up.

*          *          *

            The whole island of Mata Nui was still in an uproar. Countless scared, confused, and defiant voices created a buzzing not unlike a nui-rama swarm around Hahli. She took a deep breath. She climbed onto a large chunk of rock that had been dislodged from one of Kini-Nui’s spires. She stood above the din and spread her arms.

            “Friends!” she shouted. For a moment, the buzz of the crowd was as strong as ever. But then Hahli saw Turaga Vakama glance up at her. He waved his turaga staff at the other elders.

            “Silence!” he said. The Turaga ceased their arguing, then began spreading the plea for silence from the matoran around them. Gradually, the whole island quieted down, which left Hahli standing in front of the largest possible crowd, ready to listen to her.

            She took another long breath in, remembering her dear friend Jaller. He wouldn’t be afraid in this moment, so she won’t be either. She looked down at all her fellow islanders and found that looking into their expectant eyes brought forth the words she wanted to say.

            “This island is a great and wonderous place. Never has anyone been as blessed as we are to live in such a paradise!”

            There were some nods and whispers of agreement.

            “I love my home,” Hahli said, then gestured towards Jaller’s suspended body, “And Jaller loved it too,” she was afraid of getting choked up, but she cleared her throat and continued, “But above all, Jaller respected his duty! Let us repay him by doing our duty! Let us remember him by fulfilling our destiny!”

            She could see the island itself brightening with each word she spoke. Encouraged, she finished her speech.

            “Let us go forward together! Let us awaken the Great Spirit!”

            The crowd cheered. And Hahli sighed in relief. She dropped down from the boulder she was standing on and rejoined the Turaga. The six of them got to work pushing down certain floor tiles on the temple plateau, which caused the whole floor to open and reveal a staircase spiraling into the depths of the island.

            She looked up at Jaller one last time before meeting up with Macku and following her fellow matoran underground.

*          *          *

            Half the pillars that held up the chamber were now shattered to pieces. Cracks decorated the walls and large chunks of the earthen floor had been broken and scattered. Takanuva found himself and the Makuta circling each other close to the silver pool in the middle of the chamber. He had thankfully had a few moments to recover some lost energy, but he knew that he had to end the battle soon.

            But the Makuta was resilient. And he didn’t seem to be slowing or tiring at all. Takanuva tightened his grip on his weapon as he broke into a sprint. Makuta had begun a barrage of shadow orbs conjured from his weapon, breaking up more of the floor and walls. Another pillar fell, and Takanuva found himself ducking under a shower of sharp green crystals. As he shielded himself from the debris, a dark vortex began forming around him. He struck the ground with the butt end of his staff, sending out a burst of light that once again lit up the chamber like daylight on the surface.

            Before he could take another breath, Takanuva was struck with a barrage of shadow orbs. Makuta’s cold darkness seeped into him from each point an orb hit him, and a deep shiver shook his frame. He found himself on his knees again, with the Master of Darkness drifting towards him like smoke.

            “My brother shall not be awakened,” Makuta snarled down at him. Takanuva met his blazing red eyes. Until the sound of footsteps and voices reached his ears.

            Takanuva’s blood iced over when he saw the Turaga, Toa Nuva, and countless matoran filtering into the chamber. It was too soon. He hadn’t won the battle yet. In over his head yet again! He cursed himself. Still stupid reckless Takua after all.

            Makuta had seen it too. He turned back to Takanuva, a wide grin splitting his face. “An audience gathers for your final failure, Toa of Light,” he sneered.

            Takanuva felt his light glow inside him, its strength bringing him to his feet once again. He swayed a bit but caught himself using his light staff for support.

            “Maybe they won’t see me win today,” he said, “But the matoran will go on. And someday, they will triumph!”

            Makuta’s grin didn’t fade. Before Takanuva could react, the Master of Shadows fired a beam of dark energy at the ceiling above tunnel entrance. Matoran scattered as earth and rubble piled up, blocking their only exit to the surface. Takanuva gasped.

            “No.” The word escaped his mouth before he could stop it. Makuta broke out in sadistic laughter. He formed a new shadow orb on the end of his staff and hurled it at the Toa of Light. Instinct took over, and Takanuva tried his special kohlii move. He used his light staff to vault himself into the air, and as he brought his legs back down, he put his whole upper body into the swing of his staff. It intercepted the shadow ball, transformed it into light on contact, and sent it rocketing back at Makuta, who was struck square in the chest. The Master of Shadows flew backwards several bio towards the massive gate at the back of the chamber.

            All was still. Takanuva took a moment of catch his breath, amazed at himself. But the silence was disconcerting nevertheless; he had to make sure he had struck the final blow. With all the eyes of Mata Nui on his back, Takanuva walked across the chamber to where Makuta lay stunned. He kept some distance, but he got close enough to see his enemy was very still. He didn’t seem to be breathing.

            Then he dissolved into shadows. And reformed into a towering figure once again.

            “Well played, Toa,” Makuta said, his voice colder than before, “Now I will protect Mata Nui from you.”

            “Protect him?” Takanuva gripped his staff in both hands and took a step back.

            Makuta peered into him. “Sleep spares him pain. Awake, he suffers.”

            “You are not protecting him!” Takanuva continued walking backwards as Makuta advanced on him. Then the Master of Shadows paused, and his grin disappeared. Confused, Takanuva glanced around and noticed two more towering figures flanking him on either side.

            “Wairuha? Akamai?” he breathed. The two Kaita Nuva smiled down at him.

            “We told you, little brother,” Akamai said with smirk, “United we can rid the island of this bastard for good!”

            Wairuha nodded their head in agreement. Takanuva nodded to them both in gratitude, hope swelling in his chest once again. He turned back to Makuta with a smile on his own face. He surged forward as the two kaita flanked Makuta. Wairuha whipped up an icy whirlwind while Akamai broke up the earth under Makuta’s feet and brought bubbling lava up to the surface. With a roar, Makuta swept the elemental attacks away with his shadowy cape. He vanished from view.

            Takanuva whirled behind him, coming face to face with Makuta. The two began clashing their staffs together. Each swing was blocked, each stab parried. Wairuha and Akamai combined their powers to create an elemental storm around them. Makuta began to stumble backwards, though he still blocked each of Takanuva’s blow. Then chunks of molten earth and loose boulders rose around the Master of Shadows and began striking him from all directions. With each blow, a gash opened in his skin and billowing shadows began to leak out.

            Thick dark tendrils erupted from his back, shooting in every direction. Takanuva ducked under one, and swung his staff, throwing a blade of light towards Makuta. It was quickly snuffed out, and more tendrils shot out. They came from Makuta’s hands, his chest, and his mouth. They came down on him, too many to dodge and too many to destroy.

            Takanuva felt himself get taken over, the cold sank deep into his bones, and he could no longer conjure a faint glow. He felt as if his lungs had frozen over. His limbs were weak and trembling.

            Then a different light piercing through. The shadow tendrils retreated, and the chamber came into view again. Takanuva blinked in surprise, then realized what had caused it: Wairuha and Akamai standing side by side, smothering Makuta in a barrage of all six elements all at once.

            But Makuta wasn’t ready to go down yet. Even as his shadow essence continued to leak out of his various wounds, he spun his staff and sent out more tendrils to break up the hard silvery substance the Kaita Nuvas’ combined elemental power created. Then with an enraged bellow, Makuta struck the floor with his staff and sent a powerful shadowy shockwave outwards, blowing back the kaita and destroying their bond. Takanuva was also thrown backwards and landed flat on his back.

            But he felt a new surge of adrenaline. The Toa Nuva were on the ground. The Matoran and Turaga were still watching the battle in abject terror. It was up to him.

            Takanuva dug deep inside himself, willing every last ounce of his Toa power up to the surface. His body heated up as he began to glow. Makuta stared at him for a moment, then laughed his cold laugh.

            “You can’t destroy me. For I am noth—,” Makuta never got to finish the statement. Takanuva blasted forward at the speed of light and struck him in the chest, sending both himself and the Master of Shadows into the silvery pool.

            Hahli stared at the surface of the silver pool, feeling the silence pressing all around her. The Turaga and Toa Nuva had gathered around the pool as well. Nothing happened for a long time. She wasn’t sure whether it was more foolish to believe Takanuva was dead, or to believe that he could emerge any moment now. She stepped up to the pool, noticing that despite its shiny surface, the silver liquid did not reflect anything around it.

            Then came the sound of boiling, and tiny shafts of light broke through the substance. The surface swelled and deformed, and a massive figure pulled itself from the liquid and rose to its feet, facing the gate on the opposite side of the chamber. It stood nearly twice as tall as Makuta, its head nearly reached the ceiling.

            It turned around, and Hahli’s breath caught in her throat as she got a good look at his face. He was the perfect blend between Takanuva and Makuta: wild black hair with bright streaks of white and yellow, large violet eyes, heavy white and grey armor, and a long black cloak. A mesmerizing blend of light and shadow energies rose from his body like steam.

            The massive fusion turned back towards the gate.

            “Light has revealed the will of Mata Nui,” he said, his voice a blend of Makuta’s resonance and Takanuva’s warmth. “Our brother must be awakened.”

            The giant crossed the distance to the gate and grasped the underside of the large stone door. With considerable effort, he lifted the door above his head. A pale silvery light flooded the chamber from the opening.

            “Go!” his voice boomed, “Run!” And the whole population of Mata Nui surged towards the light. Hahli snapped out of her awe and scampered after her fellow matoran. The Turaga and Toa were herding them all together, trying to get everyone through as fast as possible since the giant was already beginning to strain under the door’s weight.

            “Hold, little one,” the giant said, stopping Hahli in her tracks. She looked up into his violet eyes, so full of questions she couldn’t ask any of them. “There is someone you should take with you.”

            The giant held the door with one hand, and the other glowed a brilliant white. A column of light materialized in front of her. And within it, an even brighter light began to glow and shape itself. Hahli shielded her eyes, but in the next second it was dark again. She blinked and saw Jaller laying on the ground. And a groan escaped his lips.

            Hahli surged forward, wrapping her arms around him as he sat up. She felt the warmth of his living body, his heartbeat, heard his breath in her ear.

            “Jaller!” she sighed, squeezing him harder. She felt his arms close around her as well.

            The wonderful moment was all too brief, because the grinding of stone made both Hahli and Jaller’s eyes snap up to the giant keeping the door open. He was sinking lower, his legs giving out, his eyes full of pain.

            “My duty…is done.” And with one last roar, the giant fell, and the stone door dropped on top of him. His body was lost under the cloud of dust and shadow. Hahli and Jaller had made it to the other side, but they wondered at what cost.

            “Get out of there!” Jaller cried, leaving Hahli’s side to run up to the door. Hahli trailed behind him, worrying about what they’d both see when the smoke cleared.

            Suddenly, Takanuva could feel himself again. The cold darkness of Makuta was gone. He sat up, blinking away the blurry edges of his vision. He became aware of how much every muscle in his body hurt. He glanced around, realizing he had no idea where he was. The sky was the wrong color. The earth beneath him was too hard and smooth. Before he could get him bearings, something small and sturdy struck him and wrapped itself around his neck.

            “You’re alive!” the sound of Jaller’s voice cut through the fog, and Takanuva snapped out of his stupor. He squeezed his friend, pure joy overflowing his soul. He felt tears well up and spill out. He sniffed and blinked the rest away as he stood himself up and collected himself enough to give his friend a smile. “Kohlii-head,” Jaller teased, “You could’ve been Makuta-bones!”

            “Could’ve been, but I’m not!” Takanuva lightly punched Jaller in the arm, taking his enhanced Toa strength into account. His friend grunted in pain and punched back. The two of them laughed. He spotted Hahli next to Jaller and embraced her as well.

            “What happened?” he asked, “How are you…? How is Jaller…? What did…?”

            “You merged with Makuta!” Hahli said, “You opened the gate and brought him back!”

            Takanuva glanced back at the large stone door. At the base was a dark smudge, like an explosion of black powder. Then, he did it? He destroyed Makuta? And now his best friend was alive again? Takanuva looked down at Hahli and Jaller with wonder and joy.

            Takanuva met up with the Toa Nuva. He exchanged fits bumps, received pats on the shoulder and back, and finally came face to face with Gali. She smiled fondly at him and embraced him. He worried he might shed tears again, but the moment was soon interrupted by the approach of the six Turaga of Mata Nui.

            Turaga Vakama gestured for Takanuva, Jaller, and Hahli to follow him. Takanuva took in his surroundings. They were on a massive metallic balcony overlooking a vast silver sea. It was large enough that every matoran from every village was able to stand in a crowd around a massive carving on the metal floor that represented the Three Virtues.

            “Let us awaken the Great Spirit!” Turaga Vakama declared, leading Takanuva, Jaller, and Hahli to the symbol of the Three Virtues. He lead Hahli to the first circle. “Unity!” he said. He directed Jaller to the second circle. “Duty!” Takanuva stepped onto the center circle. “Destiny!”

            Each circle glowed and soon Hahli, Jaller, and Takanuva were bathed in pure white light. And three beams of light shot forth, combined into one, and fired off into the distant silver sea. Takanuva and his companions gasped in amazement at what was illuminated.

            There was an island in the middle of the silver sea. A gleaming metropolis under a soft silvery sky. A long stone pathway rose from the sea, starting at the ledge and leading far off into the distance, and leading straight to the shore of that new island.

            “What is that?” Takanuva asked, feeling the familiar burn of curiosity. Turaga Vakama joined him at his side, beaming.

            “The city of the Great Spirit, my island home,” Turaga Vakama said. Takanuva felt stunned for a moment. Then the flood of questions came pouring out.

            “So, Mata Nui isn’t where you’re from? What about us? The matoran? Are we from somewhere else too? Are we from that city? Why did we come to Mata Nui, then?”

            Turaga Vakama chuckled, patting Takanuva’s arm.

            “While we make our migration, I promise that all your questions will be answered,” the elder took a step towards the stone pathway leading down to that distant island. He turned back and gestured for Takanuva, and for all the island of Mata Nui, to follow. Hahli and Jaller joined Takanuva, and the three of them followed Vakama.

            Behind them were the Toa Nuva and the rest of the Turaga. And behind them was the Chronciler’s Company. Takanuva waved to them, and they all returned it with great enthusiasm. Behind the Company was the rest of the matoran population.

            Thus began the Great Migration. The new Chronicler, Hahli, began by transcribing the battle between Takanuva and Makuta, and the triumph of the Toa of Light. Takanuva walked with his head held high, with his friends by his side, and with his people at his back. The future was uncertain, but it looked bright.

            New legends awake, but old lessons must be remembered. For this is the way of the Bionicle.